THE BMW 3 SERIES.
OWNER'S MANUAL.
Owner's Manual
for Vehicle
The Ultimate
Driving Machine
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Contents
A - Z
328i
328i xDrive
335i
335i xDrive
335is
M3
Owner's Manual for Vehicle
Congratulations, and thank you for choosing a BMW.
Thorough familiarity with your vehicle will provide you with
enhanced control and security when you drive it. We therefore
have this request:
Please take the time to read this Owner's Manual and familiarize
yourself with the information that we have compiled for you
before starting off in your new vehicle. It contains important data
and instructions intended to assist you in gaining maximum use
and satisfaction from your BMW's unique range of technical fea-
tures. The manual also contains information on maintenance
designed to enhance operating safety and contribute to main-
taining the value of your BMW throughout an extended service
life.
This manual is supplemented by a Service and Warranty Informa-
tion Booklet for US models or a Warranty and Service Guide
Booklet for Canadian models.
Please also read the other booklets of vehicle literature, e.g. the
Supplementary Owner's Handbook for the BMW M3.
We wish you an enjoyable driving experience.
BMW Group
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
© 2011 Bayerische Motoren Werke
Aktiengesellschaft
Munich, Germany
Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the
written consent of BMW AG, Munich.
US English VIII/11, 09 11 450
Printed on environmentally friendly paper,
bleached without chlorine, suitable for recycling.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Contents
The quickest way to find special topics is to
consult the index, refer to page 240.
4 Notes
7 Reporting safety defects
At a glance
10 Dashboard
18 Radio
Controls
24 Opening and closing
42 Adjustments
53 Transporting children safely
57 Driving
78 Controls overview
89 Technology for driving comfort and
safety
103 Lamps
109 Climate
116 Practical interior accessories
Driving tips
132 Things to remember when driving
Entertainment
142 BMW Professional radio
Communications
156 Telephone
167 ConnectedDrive
Mobility
174 Refueling
177 Wheels and tires
197 Engine compartment
202 Maintenance
204 Care
208 Replacing components
214 Giving and receiving assistance
220 Indicator and warning lamps
Reference
234 Technical data
240 Everything from A to Z
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
4
Notes
Notes
Using this Owner's Manual
We have tried to make all the information in this
Owner's Manual easy to find. The fastest way to
find specific topics is to refer to the detailed
index at the back of the manual. If you wish to
gain an initial overview of your vehicle, you will
find this in the first chapter.
Should you sell your BMW some day, please
remember to hand over the Owner's Manual as
well; it is an important component of your vehi-
cle.
Updates after press date
Updates after press date for the Owner's Man-
uals, when necessary, are issued as appendices
to the printed Quick Reference Guide for the
vehicle.
Additional sources of information
Should you have any other questions, your
BMW center will be glad to advise you at any
time.
Information on BMW, e.g. on technical aspects,
can also be found on the Internet at
www.bmwusa.com.
Symbols used
Indicates precautions that must be fol-
lowed precisely in order to avoid the pos-
sibility of personal injury and serious damage to
the vehicle.<
Indicates information that will assist you
in gaining the optimum benefit from your
vehicle and enable you to care more effectively
for your vehicle.<
Refers to measures that can be taken to
help protect the environment.<
< Marks the end of a specific item of informa-
tion.
Symbols on vehicle components
Indicates that you should consult the rel-
evant section of this Owner's Manual for
information on a particular part or assembly.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
5
Notes
Vehicle equipment
This Owner's Manual describes all models and
all series-specific equipment, country-specific
equipment, and optional equipment that is
offered in the series. For this reason, this
Owner's Manual also describes and illustrates
some equipment that may not be available in
your vehicle, for example due to the special
options or national-market version selected.
This also applies to safety related functions and
systems.
If equipment and models are not described in
this Owner's Manual, please consult the
accompanying Supplementary Owner's Hand-
books.
Status of this Owner's Manual
at time of printing
BMW pursues a policy of continuous, ongoing
development that is conceived to ensure that
our vehicles continue to embody the highest
quality and safety standards combined with
advanced, state-of-the-art technology. For this
reason, it is possible in exceptional cases that
features described in this Owner's Manual
could differ from those on your vehicle.
Updates after press date
Updates after press date for the Owner's Man-
uals, when necessary, are issued as appendices
to the printed Quick Reference Guide for the
vehicle.
For your own safety
Maintenance and repair
Advanced technology, e.g. the use of
modern materials and powerful electron-
ics, requires specially adapted maintenance
and repair methods. You should therefore have
the corresponding work on your vehicle per-
formed only by your BMW center or at a work-
shop that works according to BMW repair pro-
cedures with correspondingly trained
personnel. If this work is not carried out prop-
erly, there is a danger of subsequent damage
and related safety hazards.<
Parts and accessories
For your own safety, use genuine parts
and accessories approved by BMW.
When you purchase accessories tested and
approved by BMW and Original BMW Parts, you
simultaneously acquire the assurance that they
have been thoroughly tested by BMW to ensure
optimum performance when installed on your
vehicle.
BMW warrants these parts to be free from
defects in material and workmanship.
BMW will not accept any liability for damage
resulting from installation of parts and accesso-
ries not approved by BMW.
BMW cannot test every product made by other
manufacturers to verify if it can be used on a
BMW safely and without risk to either the vehi-
cle, its operation, or its occupants.
Original BMW Parts, BMW Accessories and
other products approved by BMW, together
with professional advice on using these items,
are available from all BMW centers.
Installation and operation of accessories not
approved by BMW, such as alarms, radios,
amplifiers, radar detectors, wheels, suspension
components, brake dust shields, telephones,
including operation of any mobile phone from
within the vehicle without using an externally
mounted antenna, or transceiver equipment, for
instance, CBs, walkie-talkies, ham radio or sim-
ilar accessories, may cause extensive damage
to the vehicle, compromise its safety, interfere
with the vehicle's electrical system or affect the
validity of the BMW Limited Warranty. See your
BMW center for additional information.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
6
Notes
Maintenance, replacement, or repair of
the emission control devices and sys-
tems may be performed by any automotive
repair establishment or individual using any cer-
tified automotive part.<
California Proposition 65 warning
California law requires us to issue the following
warning:
Engine exhaust and a wide variety of
automobile components and parts,
including components found in the interior fur-
nishings in a vehicle, contain or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects and reproductive harm. In
addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and
certain products of component wear contain or
emit chemicals known to the State of California
to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm.
Battery posts, terminals and related accesso-
ries contain lead and lead compounds. Wash
your hands after handling.
Used engine oil contains chemicals that have
caused cancer in laboratory animals. Always
protect your skin by washing thoroughly with
soap and water.<
Service and warranty
We recommend that you read this publication
thoroughly.
Your BMW is covered by the following warran-
ties:
> New Vehicle Limited Warranty
> Rust Perforation Limited Warranty
> Federal Emissions System Defect Warranty
> Federal Emissions Performance Warranty
> California Emission Control System Limited
Warranty
Detailed information about these warranties is
listed in the Service and Warranty Information
Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.
Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and
designed to meet the particular operating con-
ditions and registration requirements in your
country and continental region in order to
deliver the full driving pleasure while the vehicle
is operated under those conditions. If you wish
to operate your vehicle in another country or
region, you may be required to adapt your vehi-
cle to meet different prevailing operating condi-
tions and registration requirements. You should
also be aware of any applicable warranty limita-
tions or exclusions for such country or region. In
such case, please contact Customer Relations
for further information.
Maintenance
Maintain the vehicle regularly to sustain the
road safety, operational reliability and the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Specifications for required maintenance mea-
sures:
> BMW Maintenance system
> Service and Warranty Information Booklet
for US models
> Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for
Canadian models
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
7
Notes
If the vehicle is not maintained according to
these specifications, this could result in serious
damage to the vehicle. Such damage is not cov-
ered by the BMW New Vehicle Limited War-
ranty.
Reporting safety defects
For US customers
The following only applies to vehicles owned
and operated in the US.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause injury
or death, you should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety Administration,
NHTSA, in addition to notifying BMW of
North America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, West-
wood, New Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone
1-800-831-1117.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order
a recall and remedy campaign. However,
NHTSA cannot become involved in individual
problems between you, your center, or BMW of
North America, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Adminis-
trator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW.,
Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain
other information about motor vehicle safety
from http://www.safercar.gov
For Canadian customers
Canadian customers who wish to report a
safety-related defect to Transport Canada,
Defect Investigations and Recalls, may tele-
phone the toll-free hotline 1-800-333-0510.
You can also obtain other information about
motor vehicle safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
This overview of buttons, switches and displays
is intended to familiarize you with your vehicle's
operating environment. The section will also
assist you in becoming acquainted with the
control concepts and options available for
operating the various systems.
At a glance
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
10
At a glance Dashboard
Dashboard
Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and
optional equipment that is offered in the model
range is described. For this reason, descrip-
tions will be given of some equipment that may
not be available in a vehicle, for example due to
the special options or national-market version
selected. This also applies to safety related
functions and systems.
Around the steering wheel: controls and displays
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
11
Dashboard
At a glance
4 Exterior mirrors folding in and out 50
5 Adjusting exterior mirrors, automatic curb
monitor 50
9 Instrument cluster 12
12 Ignition lock 57
13 Buttons on the steering wheel
15 Horn, entire surface
16 Adjusting the steering wheel 52
18 Releasing the hood 198
19 OBD socket 203
20 Opening the trunk lid 31
1
Convertible: opening and closing
windows jointly 35
2
Convertible: opening and closing
rear windows 35
3
Opening and closing front
windows 35
6
Parking lamps 103
Low beams 103
Automatic headlamp control 103
Adaptive Light Control 105
High-beam Assistant 106
7
Fog lamps 107
8
Turn signals 67
High beams, headlamp
flasher 105
High-beam Assistant 106
Roadside parking lamps 105
Computer 80
Settings and information about the
vehicle 82
10
Windshield wipers 68
Rain sensor 68
11
Switching the ignition on/off and
starting/stopping the engine 57
Telephone: accepting and ending
a call; dialing the selected phone
number; redialing if no phone
number is selected
Convertible: microphone on steer-
ing column
Volume
Voice commands for
telephone 163
Convertible: microphone on steer-
ing column
Changing the radio station
Interrupting a traffic bulletin
Selecting a music track
Scrolling through the redial list
Next entertainment source
Recirculated air mode 113
14
Steering wheel heating 52
17
Cruise control 71
Active Cruise Control 71
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
12
At a glance Dashboard
Instrument cluster
1 Speedometer
2 Indicator lamps for turn signals
3 Indicator and warning lamps 13
4 Displays for Active Cruise Control 71
5 Tachometer 79
6 Engine oil temperature 79
7 Display for
> Clock 78
> Outside temperature 78
> Indicator and warning lamps 87
8 Display for
> Position of automatic transmission 60
> Gear indicator of 7-gear Sport automatic
transmission with double clutch 62
> Computer 80
> Date of next scheduled service, and
remaining distance to be driven 84
> Odometer and trip odometer 78
> High-beam Assistant 106
> Initializing Flat Tire Monitor 93
> Resetting the Tire Pressure Monitor 95
> Checking the oil level 198
> Settings and information 82
> There is a Check Control
message 87
9 Fuel gauge 79
10 Resetting the trip odometer 78
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
13
Dashboard
At a glance
Indicator and warning lamps
The concept
Indicator and warning lamps can light up in a
variety of combinations and colors.
Several of the lamps are checked for proper
functioning and light up temporarily when the
engine is started or the ignition is switched on.
What to do in case of a malfunction
A list of all indicator and warning lamps, as well
as notes on possible causes of malfunctions
and on how to respond, can be found starting
on page 220.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
14
At a glance Dashboard
Around the center console: controls and displays
1 Hazard warning flashers
2 Driving stability control systems
> Dynamic Stability Control DSC 90
> Dynamic Traction Control DTC 91
3 Central locking system 29
4 Radio 18
5 Air conditioner or automatic climate control
Air distribution for air
conditioner 110
Air distribution to the
windshield 112
Air distribution to the upper body
area 112
Air distribution to the footwell 112
Automatic air distribution and flow
rate 113
Cooling function 114
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
15
Dashboard
At a glance
Automatic recirculated air control
AUC and recirculated air
mode 113
Recirculated air mode 110
Maximum cooling 113
ALL program 114
Air volume 110, 113
Defrosting windows 114
Rear window defroster 111, 114
Seat heating 48
6
Park Distance Control PDC 89
Coupe:
Roller sunblinds 120
Coupe:
Hill Descent Control HDC 92
7
Convertible:
Opening and closing retractable
hardtop 38
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
18
At a glance Radio
Radio
Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and
optional equipment that is offered in the model
range is described. For this reason, descrip-
tions will be given of some equipment that may
not be available in a vehicle, for example due to
the special options or national-market version
selected. This also applies to safety related
functions and systems.
BMW Professional radio
1 Changing audio sources
> Radio
> HD Radio
> Satellite radio
> CD player
> CD changer
> External audio device, e.g. MP3 player
> USB audio interface
2 Volume control, ON/OFF. 142
3 Display for
> Radio
> CD
> Telephone
> Computer
> External audio device, e.g. MP3 player
> USB audio interface
> Tone setting
> Time display
4 CD slot
5 Ejecting CD 148
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
19
Radio
At a glance
6 Selecting functions
> Turn: selecting menu item or setting a
value
> Press: confirming selection or storing
settings
7 MENU, changing to
> Telephone
> Computer
> Adjusting
> BMW phone numbers
8 Establishing/ending telephone connections
9 Opening the settings
> Speed-dependent volume 143
> Tone setting 143
> Surround sound function 143
10 Displaying the time
11 Function buttons for confirming the menu
items displayed above them
12 Changing stations or tracks
> Changing stations 144
> Changing tracks with the CD
player 148
13 Selecting the frequency manually 144
Presentation in the Owner's Manual
"…" identifies radio display texts used to select
individual functions.
Menu navigation
All radio functions can be accessed using the
buttons on the radio and using the menus.
Opening audio menu
Press the button.
The menu of audio sources appears on the dis-
play.
Opening settings menu
Press the button.
The settings menu appears on the display.
Selecting a menu item
Menu items can be selected using either the
knob on the right or the function buttons.
Using the knob on the right
1. Highlighting a menu item: turn the knob on
the right, arrow 1.
2. Select a menu item: press the knob on the
right, arrow 2.
Using the function buttons
Press the left or right side of the
function button under the menu item.
If only one menu item is displayed above a func-
tion button, press the middle of the button.
Setting values
To set numerical values or values on a scale:
1. Select the desired menu item and press the
knob on the right.
2. Turn the knob on the right to set the value.
3. Press the knob on the right to store the
value.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
20
At a glance Radio
Symbols on the display
Symbol Function
Function is selected
The function is activated
The function is deactivated
Exit menu, go back one menu
Show other menu items
Scroll display, list contains more
than 2 entries
Changing to a higher level direc-
tory
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
21
Radio
At a glance
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
This chapter is intended to provide you with
information for complete control of your vehicle.
All features and accessories that are useful for
driving and your safety, comfort and
convenience, are described here.
Controls
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
24
Controls Opening and closing
Opening and closing
Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and
optional equipment that is offered in the model
range is described. For this reason, descrip-
tions will be given of some equipment that may
not be available in a vehicle, for example due to
the special options or national-market version
selected. This also applies to safety related
functions and systems.
Remote control
Each remote control contains a rechargeable
battery that is automatically recharged when it
is in the ignition lock while the car is being
driven. Use each remote control at least twice a
year for longer road trips in order to maintain the
batteries' charge status. In cars with Comfort
Access, the remote control contains a replace-
able battery, refer to page 35.
The settings called up and implemented when
the car is unlocked depend on which remote
control is used to unlock the car, refer to Per-
sonal Profile, next column.
In addition, information about service require-
ments is stored in the remote control, refer to
Service data in the remote control, page 202.
Integrated key
Press button 1 to release the key.
The integrated key fits the following locks:
> Glove compartment, refer to page 120
> Driver's door, refer to page 29
New remote controls
Your BMW center can supply new remote con-
trols with integrated keys as additional units or
as replacements in the event of loss.
Personal Profile
The concept
You can set many of your BMW's functions to
suit your personal needs and preferences.
Without any action on your part, Personal Pro-
file ensures that most of these settings are
stored for the remote control currently in use.
When you unlock the car, the remote control
used for the purpose is recognized and the set-
tings stored for it are called up and imple-
mented.
This means that your personal settings will be
activated for you, even if in the meantime your
car was used by someone else with another
remote control and the corresponding settings.
The individual settings are stored for a maxi-
mum of four remote controls. They are stored
for two remote controls if Comfort Access is in
use.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
25
Opening and closing
Controls
Personal Profile settings
For more information on specific settings, refer
to the specified pages.
> Response of the central locking system
when the car is unlocked, refer to page 25
> Automatic locking of the vehicle, refer to
page 29
> Automatic call-up of the driver's seat posi-
tion, refer to page 48
> Triple turn signal activation, refer to
page 67
> Settings for the display in the instrument
cluster:
> 12h/24h format of the clock, refer to
page 83
> Date format, refer to page 83
> Units of measure, refer to page 83
> Light settings:
> Pathway lighting, refer to page 104
> Daytime running lights, refer to
page 104
> High-beam Assistant, refer to page 106
> Automatic climate control: AUTO program,
cooling function and automatic recirculated
air control activated/deactivated, tempera-
ture, air volume and distribution, refer to
page 112 ff
> Entertainment:
> Speed-dependent volume control, refer
to page 143
Central locking system
The concept
The central locking system functions when the
driver's door is closed.
The system simultaneously engages and
releases the locks on the following:
> Doors
> Trunk lid
> Fuel filler flap
> Convertible: glove compartment
Operating from outside
> Via the remote control
> Using the door lock
> In cars with Comfort Access, via the handles
on the driver's door and the front passenger
door
At the same time as locking and unlocking via
the remote control:
> Welcome lights, the interior light, and the
courtesy lighting are switched on and off.
> Alarm system, refer to page 32, is armed or
disarmed.
Operating from inside
By means of the button for central locking, refer
to page 29.
In the event of a sufficiently severe accident, the
central locking system unlocks automatically. In
addition, the hazard warning flashers and inte-
rior lamps come on.
Opening and closing:
Using the remote control
Persons or animals in a parked vehicle
could lock the doors from the inside. You
should therefore take the remote control with
you when you leave the vehicle so that the latter
can be opened from outside.<
Convertible: to operate the retractable
hardtop with the remote control, the
doors and trunk lid must be closed and the
cargo area partition must be folded down and
engaged on both sides. Refer also to page 39.<
Unlocking
Press the button.
The interior lamps, the courtesy lighting of the
doors, and the welcome lamps come on.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
26
Controls Opening and closing
Setting unlocking characteristics
You can set whether only the driver's door or
the entire vehicle is to be unlocked when the
button is pressed for the first time.
For operating principle, refer to page 82.
1. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 57.
2. Briefly press button 1 in the turn signal/high
beam lever up or down repeatedly until the
symbol appears in the display, accompa-
nied by the word "SET".
3. Press button 2.
4. Briefly press button 1 in the turn signal/high
beam lever down repeatedly until the sym-
bol appears in the display.
5. Press button 2.
6. Use button 1 to select:
>
Press the button once to unlock only
the driver's door and the fuel filler flap.
Press the button twice to unlock the
entire vehicle.
>
Press the button once to unlock the
entire vehicle.
7. Press button 2.
The setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Coupe: convenient opening
Press and hold the button.
The windows and the glass roof are opened.
Convertible: convenient opening
When you are close to the vehicle, the remote
control for Comfort Access can be used to open
the retractable hardtop.
Hold the button down.
The windows and the retractable hardtop are
opened if the doors are closed.
If you continue pressing the button, the win-
dows move up.
Watch during the opening process to
ensure that no one is injured. Releasing
the button interrupts the opening process.<
Locking
Press the button.
Do not lock the vehicle from the outside if
there is any person inside, because the
vehicle cannot be unlocked from inside without
special knowledge.<
Convertible: convenient closing
When you are close to the vehicle, the remote
control for Comfort Access can be used to
close the retractable hardtop and the windows.
Press and hold the button.
The retractable hardtop and the windows are
closed.
Watch during the closing process to
ensure that no one is injured. Releasing
the button interrupts the closing process.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
27
Opening and closing
Controls
Switching on interior lamps
While the car is locked:
Press the button.
You can also use this function to locate your
vehicle in parking garages etc.
Unlocking the trunk lid
Press the button for about 1 second and
then release it.
The trunk lid opens a short distance, regardless
of whether it was locked or unlocked.
The trunk lid swings back and up when
opened. Ensure that there is sufficient
clearance. To avoid locking yourself out by
accident, do not place the remote control in the
cargo area. A previously locked trunk lid is
locked again after closing.
Before and after each trip, check that the trunk
lid has not been inadvertently unlocked.<
Convertible: convenient loading
When you are close to the vehicle, the remote
control for Comfort Access can be used to par-
tially raise the open hardtop for more conve-
nient loading of the cargo area.
1. Briefly press the button and, within one
second, press again and hold until the
retractable hardtop stops in an intermediate
position. The trunk lid opens slightly.
2. Open the trunk lid, press the cargo area par-
tition upward and stow the cargo in the
cargo area.
3. Press down the cargo area partition until it
engages on both sides and close the trunk
lid.
4. Press the button for a longer period to
fold the retractable hardtop back in.
Confirmation signals
You can activate or deactivate the confirmation
signals.
For operating principle, refer to page 82.
1. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 57.
2. Briefly press button 1 in the turn signal/high
beam lever up or down repeatedly until the
symbol appears in the display, accompa-
nied by the word "SET".
3. Press button 2.
4. Briefly press button 1 in the turn signal/high
beam lever down repeatedly until the
desired symbol appears in the display.
> Confirmation signal during unlocking
> Confirmation signal during locking
5. Press button 2.
6. Use button 1 to select:
>
The hazard warning flashers are acti-
vated during unlocking/locking.
>
An acoustic signal sounds during
unlocking/locking.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
28
Controls Opening and closing
>
The hazard warning flashers are acti-
vated and an acoustic signal sounds
during unlocking/locking.
>
The function is deactivated.
7. Press button 2.
The setting is stored.
Calling up the driver's seat position
The driver's seat position last set is stored for
the remote control currently in use.
You can select whether or not the seat is reset
to that position automatically.
When this Personal Profile function is
used, first make sure that the footwell
behind the driver's seat is free of obstacles.
Failure to do so could cause injury to persons or
damage to objects as a result of a rearward
movement of the seat.<
The adjusting procedure is halted immediately
when you touch a seat adjustment switch or
one of the memory buttons.
Activating/deactivating automatic
call-up
For operating principle refer to page 82.
1. Briefly press button 1 in the turn signal/high
beam lever up or down repeatedly until the
symbol appears in the display, accompa-
nied by the word "SET".
2. Press button 2.
3. Briefly press button 1 in the turn signal/high
beam lever down repeatedly until the sym-
bol appears in the display.
4. Press button 2.
5. Use button 1 to select:
>
Call-up when the vehicle is unlocked.
>
Call-up when the driver's door is
opened.
>
Switch off automatic function.
6. Press button 2.
The setting is stored.
Malfunctions
The remote control may malfunction due to
local radio waves. If this occurs, unlock and lock
the car at the door lock with the integrated key.
Convertible: if hardtop movement via the
remote control is interrupted briefly, the move-
ment will be completed more quickly if you keep
the corresponding button pressed continu-
ously.
If the car can no longer be locked with a remote
control, the battery in the remote control is dis-
charged. Use the remote control on an
extended trip to recharge the battery, refer to
page 24. The remote control for Comfort
Access contains a battery that may have to be
changed, refer to page 35.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
29
Opening and closing
Controls
For US owners only
The transmitter and receiver units comply with
part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communications
Commission regulations. Operation is gov-
erned by the following:
FCC ID:
LX8766S
LX8766E
LX8CAS
Compliance statement:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
> This device must not cause harmful inter-
ference, and
> this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modifications or
changes to these devices could void the
user's authority to operate this equipment.<
Opening and closing:
Using the door lock
Do not lock the vehicle from the outside if
there is any person inside, because the
vehicle cannot be unlocked from inside without
special knowledge.<
With Comfort Access, you can set how the vehi-
cle is unlocked, refer to page 25.
Convenient opening and closing
Coupe: you can operate the windows and the
glass sunroof via the door lock.
Convertible: you can operate the windows and
the retractable hardtop via the door lock.
Hold the key in the position for unlocking or
locking.
During each closing procedure, and when
opening the retractable hardtop, watch
the process and ensure that no one becomes
trapped. Releasing the key stops the opera-
tion.<
Manual operation
In the event of an electrical malfunction, you can
lock and unlock the driver's door by turning the
integrated key to the corresponding limit posi-
tions in the door lock.
Opening and closing:
From inside
This button serves to unlock or lock doors and
the trunk lid, but does not activate the anti-theft
system. Depending on the equipment package,
the fuel filler flap can be unlocked as needed.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
30
Controls Opening and closing
Automatic locking
You can also set the situations in which the car
locks:
For operating principle, refer to page 82.
1. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 57.
2. Briefly press button 1 in the turn signal/high
beam lever up or down repeatedly until the
symbol appears in the display, accompa-
nied by the word "SET".
3. Press button 2.
4. Briefly press button 1 in the turn signal/high
beam lever down repeatedly until the sym-
bol appears in the display.
5. Press button 2.
6. Use button 1 to select:
>
The central locking system automati-
cally locks the vehicle after some time if
no door has been opened.
>
The central locking system automati-
cally locks the vehicle as soon as you
drive off.
>
The central locking system automati-
cally locks the vehicle after some time if
no door has been opened, or as soon as
you drive off.
>
The central locking system remains
unlocked.
7. Press button 2.
The setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Unlocking and opening doors
> Either unlock the doors together using the
button for the central locking system and
then pull the door handle above the armrest
or
> pull on the door handle of each door twice:
the first time unlocks the door, the second
time opens it.
Locking
> Use the central locking button to lock all of
the doors simultaneously, or
> press down the safety lock button of a door.
To prevent you from being locked out, the
open driver's door cannot be locked using
the lock button.
Persons or animals in a parked vehicle
could lock the doors from the inside. You
should therefore take the remote control with
you when you leave the vehicle so that the latter
can be opened from outside.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
31
Opening and closing
Controls
Trunk lid
In order to avoid damage, make sure there
is sufficient clearance before opening the
trunk lid.<
Opening from inside
Press the button: the trunk lid opens unless it
has been locked.
Opening from outside
Press the button, see arrow, or the button
on the remote control for a longer period. The
trunk lid will open slightly. It can now be swung
upwards.
Coupe: locking or unlocking separately
The switch is located in the glove compartment.
1 Locking the trunk lid
2 Unlocking the trunk lid
Locking separately
Push the switch in the direction of arrow 1.
The trunk lid is locked and cannot be unlocked
using the central locking system.
If you give the remote control without the inte-
grated key to someone else while the glove
compartment is locked, the trunk lid cannot be
opened. This is an advantage when valet park-
ing, for example. Locking the glove compart-
ment, refer to page 120.
Unlocking separately
Push the switch in the direction of arrow 2.
Emergency release
Pull the lever in the cargo area. The trunk lid is
unlocked.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
32
Controls Opening and closing
Closing
The handle recesses on the interior trim of the
trunk lid make it easier to pull down.
Make sure that the closing path of the
trunk lid is clear; otherwise, injuries may
result.<
Coupe
Convertible
To close the trunk lid, press it down
lightly. The lid is closed automatically.<
Alarm system
The concept
The vehicle alarm system responds:
> When a door, the hood or the trunk lid is
opened
> To movements inside the vehicle: Interior
motion sensor, refer to page 33
> When the car's inclination changes, for
instance if an attempt is made to jack it up
and steal the wheels or to raise it prior to
towing away
> When there has been an interruption of
power supply from the battery
The alarm system signals unauthorized entry
attempts for a short time by means of:
> An acoustic alarm
> Switching on the hazard warning flashers
> Flashing the high beams
Arming and disarming
General information
When you lock or unlock the vehicle, either with
the remote control or at the door lock, the alarm
system is armed or disarmed at the same time.
Door lock with armed alarm system
In some national-market versions, unlocking via
the door lock triggers the alarm.
To switch off this alarm, unlock the vehicle with
the remote control or switch on the ignition.
Trunk lid with the alarm system armed
The trunk lid can be opened via the remote con-
trol even when the alarm system is armed.
Press the button on the remote control for
approx. 1 second.
The trunk lid is locked and monitored again as
soon as it is closed.
Panic mode
You can trigger the alarm system if you find
yourself in a dangerous situation:
Press the button for at least three seconds.
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
Switching off an alarm
> Unlock the car with the remote control, refer
to page 25.
> Insert the remote control all the way into the
ignition lock.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
33
Opening and closing
Controls
Indicator lamp on inside mirror
> The indicator lamp flashes continuously:
The system is armed.
> The indicator lamp flashes after locking:
The doors, hood, or trunk lid are not prop-
erly closed, the remaining components are
secured.
Then the indicator lamp flashes continu-
ously after approx. 10 seconds. The interior
motion sensor and tilt sensor are not active.
> The indicator lamp goes out after unlocking:
The vehicle has not been tampered with.
> If the indicator lamp flashes after unlocking
until the remote control is inserted in the
ignition, but for no longer than approx.
5minutes:
The vehicle has been tampered with.
Tilt alarm sensor
The tilt of the vehicle is monitored. The alarm
system reacts, e.g. to attempts to steal a wheel
or tow the vehicle.
Interior motion sensor
Coupe
For proper function, the windows and glass
sunroof must be closed.
Convertible
The interior of the car is monitored up to the
height of the seat cushions. Thus the alarm sys-
tem is activated together with the interior
motion sensor even if the hardtop is open. The
alarm can be triggered unintentionally by falling
objects such as leaves, refer to Avoiding unin-
tentional alarms.
Avoiding unintentional alarms
The tilt sensor and interior motion sensor can
be deactivated together, for example in the fol-
lowing situations:
> In car washes
> In stacking garages
> During transport on car-carrying trains,
boats/ships or on a trailer
> When leaving animals in the vehicle
Switching off tilt alarm sensor and
interior motion sensor
Once the vehicle is locked, press the
button on the remote control again
within approx. 10 seconds.
The indicator lamp lights up briefly and then
flashes continuously. The tilt alarm sensor and
the interior motion sensor are switched off until
the next time the vehicle is unlocked and subse-
quently locked again.
Comfort Access
The concept
It is possible to access the vehicle without actu-
ating the remote control. It is sufficient to have
the remote control with you, for example in your
jacket pocket. The vehicle automatically
detects the remote control in the vicinity or in
the passenger compartment.
Comfort Access supports the following func-
tions:
> Unlocking/locking the vehicle
> Convenient closing
> Unlocking the trunk lid separately
> Engine starting
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
34
Controls Opening and closing
Functional requirement
> There are no external sources of interfer-
ence in the vicinity.
> The remote control must be outside the
vehicle to lock it.
> The next unlocking and locking cycle is not
possible until after approx. 2 seconds.
> It is only possible to start the engine if the
remote control is inside the vehicle.
Comparison to the standard remote
control
The above functions can be controlled by
pressing the remote control buttons or by using
Comfort Access.
If you notice a brief delay while opening or
closing windows, the glass roof or retract-
able hardtop, the system is checking whether a
remote control is inside the vehicle. Please
repeat the opening or closing procedure, if nec-
essary.<
Unlocking
Grasp the handle on the driver's or front pas-
senger door completely, arrow 1.
This corresponds to pressing the button.
Locking
Touch the surface on the door handle, arrow 2,
with your finger for approx. 1 second.
This corresponds to pressing the but-
ton.
To preserve the battery, please make
sure that the ignition and all electrical
consumers are switched off before locking the
vehicle.<
Coupe: convenient closing
Keep pressing the surface, arrow 2, with your
finger.
Convertible: window and convertible
top operation
With the ignition at radio readiness or beyond,
you can open and close the windows and the
convertible top when a remote control is
located inside the vehicle.
Unlocking the trunk lid separately
Press the button on the outside of the trunk lid.
This corresponds to pressing the button.
If the vehicle detects that a remote con-
trol has been accidentally left inside the
locked vehicle's cargo area after the trunk lid is
closed, the lid will reopen. The hazard warning
flashers flash and a signal sounds.<
Switching on radio readiness
Pressing the Start/Stop button switches on
radio readiness.
Do not depress the brake or the clutch; other-
wise, the engine will start immediately.
Starting the engine
The engine can be started or the ignition can be
switched on when a remote control is inside the
vehicle. It is not necessary to insert a remote
control into the ignition lock, refer to page 57.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
35
Opening and closing
Controls
Switching off the engine in cars with
automatic transmission
The engine can only be switched off when the
selector lever is in position P, refer to page 59.
To switch the engine off when the selector lever
is in position N, the remote control must be in
the ignition lock.
Malfunction
Local radio waves can interfere with the func-
tion of Comfort Access, for example when a
mobile phone is in the immediate vicinity of the
remote control or by when a mobile phone is
being charged in the vehicle.
If this happens, open or close the vehicle via the
buttons on the remote control or using the inte-
grated key. To start the engine afterward, insert
the remote control into the ignition lock.
Warning lamps
The warning lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up when you attempt to
start the engine: the engine cannot
be started. The remote control is not inside the
vehicle or is malfunctioning.
Take the remote control with you inside the
vehicle or have it checked. If necessary, insert
another remote control into the ignition lock.
The warning lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up while the engine is
running: the remote control is no
longer inside the vehicle. After the engine is
switched off, the engine can only be restarted
within approx. 10 seconds.
The indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up: replace the battery
in the remote control.
Replacing the battery
The remote control for Comfort Access con-
tains a battery that will need to be replaced from
time to time.
1. Take the integrated key out of the remote
control, refer to page 24.
2. Remove the cover.
3. Insert the new battery with the plus side fac-
ing up.
4. Press the cover on to close.
Dispose of the old battery at a collection
point or at your BMW center.<
Windows
To prevent injuries, watch the windows
while closing them.
Take the remote control with you when you
leave the car; otherwise, children could operate
the electric windows and possibly injure them-
selves.<
Coupe: opening, closing
> Press the switch to the resistance point:
The window opens as long as you press the
switch.
> Press the switch beyond the resistance
point:
The window opens automatically. Press the
switch again to stop the opening move-
ment.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
36
Controls Opening and closing
You can close the windows in the same manner
by pulling the switch.
Convertible: opening, closing
Individually
> Press the switch to the resistance point:
The window opens as long as you press the
switch.
> Press the switch beyond the resistance
point:
The window opens automatically. Press the
switch again to stop the opening move-
ment.
You can close the windows in the same manner
by pulling the switch. The rear windows do not
close automatically.
Jointly
> Press the switch to the resistance point:
All windows open as long as you press the
switch.
> Press the switch beyond the resistance
point:
All windows open automatically. Press the
switch again to stop the opening move-
ment.
> Pull the switch:
All windows close as long as you pull the
switch.
After switching off the ignition
When the remote control is removed or the igni-
tion is switched off, you can still operate the
windows for approx. 1 minute as long as no
door is opened.
Convenient opening and closing
For information on Convenient opening and
closing via the remote control or the door lock,
refer to page 25 or 29. For information on Con-
venient closing with Comfort Access, refer to
Locking on page 26.
Pinch protection system
If the closing force exceeds a specific value as a
window closes, the closing action is interrupted
and the window reopens slightly.
Despite the pinch protection system
check and clear the window's travel path
prior to closing it; otherwise, the safety system
might fail to detect certain kinds of obstruc-
tions, such as thin objects, and the window
would continue closing.
Do not install any accessories that might inter-
fere with window movement. Otherwise, the
pinch protection system could be impaired.
Convertible: the rear windows are not equipped
with pinch protection. Therefore, watch them
closely when closing to avoid personal injury.<
Closing without pinch protection
If there is an external danger, or if ice on the win-
dows, etc., prevents you from closing the win-
dows normally, proceed as follows:
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
37
Opening and closing
Controls
1. Pull the switch past the resistance point and
hold it there. Pinch protection is limited and
the window reopens slightly if the closing
force exceeds a certain value.
2. Pull the switch again past the resistance
point within approx. 4 seconds and hold it
there. The window closes without pinch
protection.
Coupe: Glass roof, electric
To prevent injuries, watch the glass roof
while closing it.
Take the remote control with you when you
leave the car; otherwise, children could operate
the roof and possibly injure themselves.<
Tilting
Press the switch.
> The closed glass roof is tilted and the slid-
ing visor opens slightly.
Opening, closing
> Push the switch rearward to the resistance
point:
The glass roof and the sliding visor open
together as long as you hold the switch in
this position.
> Push the switch rearward past the resis-
tance point:
The glass roof and the sliding visor open
automatically. Briefly press the switch again
to stop the opening movement.
You can close the glass roof in a similar manner
by pressing the switch forwards. The sliding
visor remains open and can be closed by hand.
For information on Convenient opening and
closing via the remote control or door lock, refer
to page 25 or 29.
After switching off the ignition
When the remote control is removed or the igni-
tion is switched off, you can still operate the roof
for approx. 1 minute as long as no door has
been opened.
Pinch protection system
If the glass roof encounters an obstruction dur-
ing closing from approximately the middle of
the opening in the roof, or during closing from
the tilted position, the closing movement is
interrupted and the glass roof is opened again
slightly.
Despite the pinch protection system
check and clear the roof's travel path prior
to closing it; otherwise, the safety system might
fail to detect certain kinds of obstructions, such
as very thin objects, and the roof would con-
tinue closing.<
Closing without pinch protection
If there is an external danger, press the switch
forward past the resistance point. The roof
closes without pinch protection.
Following interruptions in electrical
power supply
After a power failure, there is a possibility that
the glass roof can only be tilted. The system
must be initialized. BMW recommends having
this work performed by your BMW center.
Closing manually
In the event of an electrical malfunction, you can
move the glass roof manually:
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
38
Controls Opening and closing
1. Unclip the front of the cover of the interior
lamps using the screwdriver from the
onboard vehicle tool kit, refer to page 208.
2. Insert the screwdriver into the openings on
each side to press the clips.
3. Remove the control unit.
4. Unplug the motor. Considerably less effort
will be required for manual operation.
5. Insert the Allen wrench supplied with the
onboard vehicle tool kit, refer to page 208,
into the opening provided. Move the glass
roof in the desired direction.
6. Reinstall the control unit and reattach the
lamp cover.
Convertible: retractable
hardtop
The retractable hardtop combines reliable
weather protection with simple and convenient
operation.
The following tips will enhance your driving
pleasure in your Convertible:
> It is advisable that you close the retractable
hardtop when you park the vehicle. Not only
does the closed hardtop protect the vehicle
interior against unanticipated weather dam-
age, it also offers theft protection. However,
even when the hardtop is closed, valuables
should only be stored in the locked cargo
area.
> Do not attach roof rack systems to the
retractable hardtop, and in particular do not
attach magnetic racks.
> Do not attach rack systems to the trunk lid,
and in particular do not attach magnetic
racks.
> When the retractable hardtop is operated,
the trunk lid swings back and up. Before
operating the retractable hardtop, ensure
that there is enough clearance, e.g. when
parked in front of a wall.
> If you open the hardtop while it is wet, e.g.
after driving in the rain, water may drip into
the cargo area. If necessary, remove items
from the cargo area beforehand to avoid
water stains or soiling.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
39
Opening and closing
Controls
Do not place any objects on the retract-
able hardtop or on the trunk lid; other-
wise, they could fall during movements of the
retractable hardtop and cause damage or injury.
Never move the retractable hardtop when the
rollover protection system is in the activated
position.
Driving when the hardtop is not fully opened or
closed may result in damage or injury.
Do not reach into the mechanism during the
opening or closing procedure. Keep children
away from the swiveling area of the retractable
hardtop.<
The retractable hardtop cannot be moved
at temperatures below +147/–106.<
The retractable hardtop can only be
opened and closed when the vehicle is
stationary. To avoid causing damage, do not
drive off until the hardtop has stopped mov-
ing.<
Before opening and closing
> Comply with the safety precautions
described above.
> Ensure that the cargo area partition is
folded down and engaged on both sides,
refer to page 124; otherwise, it will not be
possible to open the retractable hardtop.
> Do not place any objects next to or on the
cargo area partition and close the storage
compartment on the left side of the cargo
area.
> Do not exceed the maximum loading height
under the cargo area partition; refer to the
label in the cargo area showing a line indi-
cating the maximum height.
> Ensure that the trunk lid is closed.
> The vehicle should be parked on fairly level
ground. Excessive angle is indicated by a
lamp.
Before moving the hardtop, make sure
that there are no objects on or next to the
cargo area partition, the storage compartment
on the left side of the cargo area is closed, and
the maximum loading height in the cargo area
has not been exceeded; otherwise, damage
may occur.<
Opening and closing
When the vehicle is stationary and at radio
readiness or beyond, refer to page 57:
If possible, conserve the battery by only
operating the retractable hardtop when
the engine is running.
Before closing the retractable hardtop, remove
all foreign objects from the windshield frame as
these could prevent the hardtop from closing
properly.<
1 Push button: open the retractable hardtop.
Pull button: close the retractable hardtop.
2 LEDs
The side windows move down when the
switch for hardtop operation is pulled or
pushed.<
LEDs
> While the hardtop is being operated, the left
LED lights up green. It goes out as soon as
the top is fully opened or closed.
> If the right-hand LED flashes red when you
release the switch, the opening or closing
action has not yet finished.
> If the right LED lights up red when the
switch is pressed, the cargo area partition is
folded up, the trunk lid is not closed, the
vehicle is standing on a strong incline or
there is a malfunction. The retractable hard-
top cannot be moved.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
40
Controls Opening and closing
Interruption
The automatic sequence of movements is
interrupted if the switch for hardtop operation is
released. The sequence can be continued in
the desired direction by pushing or pulling the
switch.
A hardtop that is not fully opened or
closed is a safety hazard.
Do not interrupt and resume the closing proce-
dure several times in close succession as this
could damage the mechanism.<
If the hardtop is not fully opened or
closed, the trunk lid cannot be opened
and the windows cannot be moved.<
Convenient opening and closing with
remote control or via door lock
Refer to pages 26 and 29.
Wind deflector
The wind deflector keeps air movements in the
passenger compartment to a minimum when
the hardtop is open and provides an even more
comfortable ride, particularly at high speeds.
Installation
The wind deflector is stored in a protective
cover in the cargo area. Brief instructions for
operation can be found on the protective cover.
1. Remove the wind deflector from the protec-
tive cover and unfold it, arrows 1.
2. Press together the top and bottom parts of
the wind deflector until the catch engages,
arrow 2.
3. Push the fastening pin, arrow 3, into the
opening provided on the right side of the
vehicle until it snaps into place. Remove the
protective caps beforehand, if necessary.
4. Push the fastening pin, arrow 4, into the
opening provided on the left side of the
vehicle until it snaps into place.
5. Turn the rotary handle in the direction of
arrow 5 as far as the first stop to insert the
right fastening pin into the holders.
6. Turn the rotary handle in the direction of
arrow 6 as far as the symbol to insert the
left fastening pin into the holders.
7. Fold up the top section of the wind deflec-
tor.
With the wind deflector installed: do not
recline the front-seat backrests too far if
the seat is to be slid all the way back, as this
would damage the wind deflector.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
41
Opening and closing
Controls
Only turn the rotary handle within the
range between the two symbols; other-
wise, the cable system inside the wind deflector
could be damaged.<
Removing the wind deflector
Proceed in the reverse order as used for instal-
lation.
Protective caps are provided in the vehicle for
the holders of the wind deflector.
Folding
Slide the red release lever towards the middle of
the wind deflector and push the two halves
apart.
Loading function
Cargo can still be loaded on the rear seat of the
vehicle even if the wind deflector has been
installed.
1. Lower all windows.
2. Fold down the top section of the wind
deflector, arrow 1.
3. Turn the rotary handle to position ,
arrow 2.
Fold both sections of the wind deflector forward
and rest them against the front seats, arrow 3.
To protect the seat cushions or to use the bag
holders, you can fold the rear backrest down,
refer to page 124.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
42
Controls Adjustments
Adjustments
Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and
optional equipment that is offered in the model
range is described. As a result, some equip-
ment described may not be available in a partic-
ular vehicle, for example due to the options or
national-market version selected. This also
applies to safety related functions and systems.
Sitting safely
The ideal sitting position can make a vital con-
tribution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving. In con-
junction with the safety belts, the head
restraints and the airbags, the seated position
has a major influence on your safety in the event
of an accident. To ensure that the safety sys-
tems operate with optimal efficiency, we
strongly urge you to observe the instructions
contained in the following section.
For additional information on transporting chil-
dren safely, refer to page 53.
Airbags
Always maintain an adequate distance
between yourself and the airbags. Always
grip the steering wheel on the rim, with your
hands in the 3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions,
to minimize the risk of injury to the hands or
arms in the event of the airbag being triggered
off.
No one and nothing should come between the
airbags and the seat occupant.
Do not use the cover of the front airbag on the
front passenger side as a storage area. Make
sure that the front passenger is sitting correctly,
e.g. not resting feet or legs on the dashboard;
otherwise, leg injuries can occur if the front air-
bag deploys.
Make sure that passengers keep their heads
away from the side airbag and do not lean
against the cover of the head airbag; otherwise,
serious injuries can result if the airbag
deploys.<
Even if you follow all the instructions, injuries
resulting from contact with airbags cannot be
fully excluded, depending on the circum-
stances. The ignition and inflation noise may
provoke a mild hearing loss in extremely sensi-
tive individuals. This effect is usually only tem-
porary.
For airbag locations and additional information
on airbags, refer to page 99.
Head restraint
A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the
risk of neck injury in the event of an accident.
Adjust the head restraint in such a way
that its center is at approx. ear level. Oth-
erwise, there is an increased risk of injury in the
event of an accident.<
Head restraints, refer to page 45.
Safety belt
Before every drive, make sure that all occupants
wear their safety belts. Airbags complement the
safety belt as an additional safety device, but
they do not represent a substitute.
Your vehicle has four seats, each of which is
equipped with a safety belt.
Never allow more than one person to
wear a single safety belt. Never allow
infants or small children to ride in a passenger's
lap. Make sure that the belt in the lap area sits
low across the hips and does not press against
the abdomen.
The safety belt must not rest against the throat,
run across sharp edges, pass over hard or frag-
ile objects or be pinched. Fasten the safety belt
so that it sits as snugly as possible against the
lap and shoulder without being twisted. Other-
wise, the belt could slide over your hips and
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
43
Adjustments
Controls
injure your abdomen in the event of a frontal
collision.
Avoid wearing bulky clothing and regularly pull
the belt in the upper-body area taut; otherwise,
its restraining effect could be impaired.<
Safety belts, refer to page 49.
Seats
Note before adjusting
Never attempt to adjust your seat while
the vehicle is moving. The seat could
respond with unexpected movement, and the
ensuing loss of vehicle control could lead to an
accident.
On the front passenger seat as well, do not
incline the backrest too far to the rear while the
vehicle is being driven; otherwise, there is a
danger in the event of an accident of sliding
under the safety belt, eliminating the protection
normally provided by the belt.<
Comply with the instructions on head restraint
height on page 45, and on damaged safety
belts on page 49.
Manual adjustment
Observe the adjustment instructions on
page 43 to ensure the best possible per-
sonal protection.<
Longitudinal direction
Pull lever 1 and slide the seat to the desired
position.
After releasing the lever, move the seat gently
forward or back to make sure it engages prop-
erly.
Height
Pull lever 2 and apply your weight to the seat or
lift it off, as necessary.
Backrest
Pull lever 3 and apply your weight to the back-
rest or lift it off, as necessary.
Angle
Pull the lever and apply your weight to the seat
or lift it off, as necessary.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
44
Controls Adjustments
Thigh support
Pull the lever and move the thigh support for-
ward or back.
Electrical adjustment
Observe the adjustment instructions on
page 43 to ensure the best possible per-
sonal protection.<
1 Longitudinal direction
2 Height
3 Angle
4 Backrest
5 Convertible: head restraints
Coupe: the head restraints are adjusted manu-
ally, refer to Head restraints below.
Lumbar support
You can also adjust the contour of the backrest
to obtain additional support in the lumbar
region.
The upper hips and spinal column receive sup-
plementary support to help you maintain a
relaxed, upright sitting position.
> Increase or decrease curvature: press the
switch at the front or rear, respectively.
> Shift curvature up or down: press the switch
at the top or bottom, respectively.
Backrest width
You can change the width of the backrest to suit
your individual preferences by adjusting the lat-
eral-support pads.
Press the front or rear end of the switch.
Backrest width decreases or increases accord-
ingly.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
45
Adjustments
Controls
Longitudinal adjustment from
outside/behind
To move the front seats forward or backward
from outside or from one of the rear seats: with
the door open, press the front end 1 or rear
end 2 of the switch.
Head restraints
Correctly adjusted head restraint
A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the
risk of neck injury in the event of an accident.
Correctly adjust the head restraints of all
occupied seats; otherwise, there is an
increased risk of injury in an accident.<
Height
Adjust the head restraint so that its center is
approximately at ear level.
Distance
Adjust the distance so that the head restraint is
as close as possible to the back of the head.
Front active head restraints
In a rear collision of a sufficient strength, the
active head restraint reduces the distance to
the head.
Do not use seat or head restraint covers
that could impair the function of the active
head restraint.
Do not hang any items, e.g. clothes hangers,
directly on the head restraints. Attach only
BMW approved accessories to the seat or head
restraint.
Otherwise, the protective function of the active
head restraint will not be ensured and its full
potential in reducing the risk of injury in the
event of a rear collision may not be realized.
In the event of faults, immobilization, or after the
active head restraints have been triggered,
have the testing, repair, or disassembly per-
formed only by your BMW center or a workshop
that has the required explosives licenses.
Unprofessional attempts to work on the system
could lead to failure in an emergency or to
undesired airbag activation, either of which
could result in personal injury.<
For technical reasons, the head restraint
cannot be removed.<
Coupe: front seats
Height adjustment
> To raise: pull up.
> To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and
slide the head restraint down.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
46
Controls Adjustments
Convertible: front seats
Height adjustment
> To raise: press the button upward.
> To lower: press the button downward.
Adjusting the distance to the back of
the head
> Forward: pull up.
> Back: press the button and push the head
cushion toward the rear.
Do not insert objects behind the head
cushion; otherwise, the head restraint
may not function properly.<
Coupe: rear seats
Height adjustment
> To raise: pull up.
> To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and
slide the head restraint down.
Removing
Only remove a head restraint if no one will be
sitting on the seat in question.
1. Pull up as far as it will go.
2. Press the button, arrow 1, tilt the rear seat
backrest slightly forward and pull the head
restraint all the way out.
Entering the rear seats
Coupe: seat with manual longitudinal
adjustment
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
47
Adjustments
Controls
Easy entry
The easy entry feature includes a memory func-
tion for the longitudinal adjustment and back-
rest angle.
1. Pull the lever and swing the backrest for-
ward.
2. Push the seat forward.
Previous position
Push the seat backward and swing the backrest
back.
When pushing the seat into its rearmost
position, make sure that no one is injured
and that no objects are damaged.
Before driving off, engage both seats and back-
rests so that they are locked in place. Other-
wise, there is a risk of an accident due to unex-
pected movement.<
Seat with electrical longitudinal
adjustment
Coupe
Convertible
Seat backrest warning lamp:
Lights up when a seat backrest is not
engaged.
Easy entry
The easy entry feature includes a memory func-
tion for the longitudinal adjustment and back-
rest angle.
1. Pull lever 1 and swing the backrest forward.
2. Press the front end 2 of the switch until the
seat has moved into the desired position.
Previous position
Press the rear end 3 of the switch until the seat
automatically stops in its previous position, and
fold the backrest back. If you release the switch
before the previous seat position is reached,
the seat will stop at its current position.
When sliding the seat backward, make
sure no one is injured and no objects are
damaged.
Before driving off, engage both seats and back-
rests so that they are locked in place. Other-
wise, there is a risk of an accident due to unex-
pected movement.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
48
Controls Adjustments
Seat heating
Depending on the vehicle's equipment, press
one of the buttons labeled 1 or 2 here.
Press the button once per temperature level.
Three LEDs indicate the highest temperature.
To switch off:
Press button longer.
If you continue driving within approx. the next
15 minutes, the seat heating is automatically
activated at the previously set temperature.
The temperature is lowered or the heating is
switched off entirely to save on battery power.
The LEDs stay lit.
Seat and mirror memory
You can store and call up two different combi-
nations of driver's seat and exterior mirror posi-
tions.
Settings for the backrest width and lumbar sup-
port are not stored in memory.
Storing
1. Switch on radio readiness or the ignition,
refer to page 57.
2. Adjust the seat and exterior mirrors to the
desired positions.
3. Press the button.
The LED in the button lights up.
4. Press the desired memory button 1 or 2:
the LED goes out.
The driver's seat and exterior mirror posi-
tions are stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Call-up
Do not call up the memory while you are
driving; otherwise, unexpected seat
movement could result in an accident.<
Comfort function
1. Unlock and open the driver's door or switch
on radio readiness, refer to page 57.
2. Briefly press the desired memory button 1
or 2.
The adjusting procedure is halted immediately
when you touch a seat adjustment switch or
one of the memory buttons.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
49
Adjustments
Controls
Safety feature
1. Close the driver's door and switch the igni-
tion on or off, refer to page 57.
2. Press the desired memory button 1 or 2
and keep it pressed until the adjustment
process has been completed.
If the button was pressed accidentally:
Press the button again; the LED goes out.
Safety belts
Observe the adjustment instructions on
page 43 to ensure the best possible per-
sonal protection.<
Before every drive, make sure that all occupants
wear their safety belts. Airbags complement the
safety belt as an additional safety device, but
they do not represent a substitute.
Closing
Make sure you hear the latch plate engage in
the belt buckle.
The upper belt anchor is suitable for adults of
any stature as long as the seat is adjusted prop-
erly, refer to page 43.
Opening
1. Grasp the belt firmly.
2. Press the red button in the buckle.
3. Guide the belt into its reel.
"Fasten safety belts" reminder for
driver's and front passenger seat
The indicator lamps light up and an
acoustic signal sounds. Check
whether the safety belt has been fas-
tened correctly.
The 'Fasten safety belts' reminder is issued as
long as the driver's safety belt has not been fas-
tened. The "Fasten safety belts" reminder is
also activated at road speeds above approx.
5 mph or 8 km/h if the front passenger safety
belt is not fastened, if objects are placed on the
front passenger seat, or if driver or front pas-
senger unfasten their safety belts.
Damage to safety belts
If the safety belts are damaged or
stressed in an accident: have the belt sys-
tem, including any belt tensioners or child
restraint systems, replaced and the belt
anchors checked. Have this work carried out
only at your BMW center. Otherwise correct
operation of this safety equipment is not guar-
anteed.<
Coupe: belt hand-over
The concept
The belt hand-over makes it easier for you to
fasten your safety belt. When you close the
door and switch on radio readiness or the igni-
tion, the belt hand-over extends automatically
and presents the in a position that is convenient
for fastening it around you. After you have fas-
tened your safety belt, the belt hand-over
retracts to its original position.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
50
Controls Adjustments
Even if you have not yet fastened your safety
belt, the belt hand-over will retract if you:
> Wait for more than approx. one minute
> Open the corresponding door
> Start driving.
Closing the respective door reactivates the belt
hand-over if the ignition or radio readiness is on.
Front passenger seat
The belt hand-over will extend only if the seat is
occupied and after the front passenger door is
closed.
Pinch protection system
If the belt hand-over encounters resistance on
moving in or out, it moves back slightly in the
opposite direction and stops in this position. To
reactivate the belt hand-over: open and close
the door or switch the ignition off and on.
Although there is a pinch protection sys-
tem, always check that the maneuvering
area of the belt hand-over is clear. Otherwise it
cannot be ensured that the system will stop
moving in certain extreme situations.<
Mirrors
Exterior mirrors
The front passenger's mirror is more con-
vex than the driver's mirror. The objects
seen in the mirror are closer than they appear.
Do not gauge your distance from traffic behind
you on the basis of what you see in the mirror;
otherwise, there is an increased risk of an acci-
dent.<
1 Adjustments
2 Switching to the other mirror or to the auto-
matic curb monitor
3 Folding mirrors in and out
The setting for the exterior mirrors is stored for
the remote control currently in use. The stored
position is called up automatically when the
vehicle is unlocked.
Manual adjustment
The mirrors can also be adjusted manually:
press the edge of the glass.
Folding mirrors in and out
At driving speeds up to approx. 12 mph/
20 km/h, you can fold the mirrors in and out by
pressing button 3. This can be beneficial in
narrow streets, for example, or for moving mir-
rors that were folded in by hand back out into
their correct positions. Mirrors that have been
folded in fold out automatically at a speed of
approx. 24 mph/40 km/h.
Before entering an automatic car wash,
fold in the exterior mirrors manually or
with button 3 to prevent them from being dam-
aged, depending on the width of the vehicle.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
51
Adjustments
Controls
Automatic heating
Depending on the outside temperature, both
exterior mirrors are heated automatically when
the engine is running or the ignition is switched
on.
Passenger side mirror tilt function –
automatic curb monitor
Activating
1. Push the switch to the position for the
driver's side mirror, arrow 1.
2. Shift into reverse or engage the selector
lever- or transmission position R.
The glass of the mirror on the passenger
side tilts slightly down. This allows the
driver to see the area immediately adjacent
to the vehicle, e.g. a curb, when backing into
a parking space.
Deactivating
Push the switch to the position for the passen-
ger side mirror, arrow 2.
Interior rearview mirror
Turn the knob to reduce glare from the head-
lamps of cars behind you when driving at night.
Interior and exterior mirrors,
automatic dimming feature
The automatic dimming feature of the interior
and exterior mirrors is controlled by two photo
cells in the interior rearview mirror. One photo
cell is in the mirror frame, see arrow; the other is
on the back of the mirror.
In order to ensure that the system functions
correctly, keep the photo cells clean, do not
cover the area between the interior rearview
mirror and windshield, and do not affix adhesive
labels or stickers of any kind to the windshield
directly in front of the mirror.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
52
Controls Adjustments
Steering wheel
Adjustments
Do not adjust the steering wheel position
while the car is in motion; otherwise, there
is a risk of an accident due to unexpected move-
ment.<
1. Fold the lever down.
2. Move the steering wheel to the preferred
height and angle to suit your seated posi-
tion.
3. Swing the lever back up.
Do not use force to swing the lever
back up; otherwise, the mechanism
will be damaged.<
Steering wheel heating
Press the button.
The LED in the button lights up when the steer-
ing wheel heating is switched on.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
53
Transporting children safely
Controls
Transporting children safely
Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and
optional equipment that is offered in the model
range is described. As a result, some equip-
ment described may not be available in a partic-
ular vehicle, for example due to the options or
national-market version selected. This also
applies to safety related functions and systems.
The right place for children
Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle; otherwise, they could endanger
themselves and/or other persons by opening
the doors, for example.<
Children always in the rear
Accident research has shown that the safest
place for children is on the rear seat.
Children under the age of 13 or smaller
than 5 ft/150 cm may be transported only
in the rear in suitable child restraint systems
appropriate for their age, weight and size. Oth-
erwise, there is an increased risk of injury in the
event of an accident.<
Children 13 years of age or older must be buck-
led in with a safety belt as soon as there no
longer is any child restraint system that is
appropriate for their age, size and weight.
Children in the front passenger seat
Should it be necessary to use a child
restraint system on the front passenger
seat, the front and side airbags for the front pas-
senger must be deactivated. Otherwise, a child
traveling on that seat will face a significant risk
of injury if the airbags are triggered off, even
with a child restraint system.<
For more information on automatic deactivation
of the front passenger airbags refer to
page 100.
Convertible: key switch for
passenger belt
The passenger safety belt can be locked with a
key switch so that it is prevented from being
pulled out.
The key switch is situated on the side surface of
the passenger-side dashboard.
Locking the passenger belt
Lock the passenger belt to install a child
restraint system.
Insert key and push in.
Keep key pushed in and turn it until reaching the
stop at the position. Pull key out at this stop.
After removing the key, make sure that
the switch is in the position; other-
wise, the locking action on the safety belt is not
guaranteed.<
Unlocking the passenger belt
If no child restraint system is fastened to the
front passenger seat, unlock the passenger
belt; otherwise, the freedom of movement of
the upper body is limited.
Insert key and push in.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
54
Controls Transporting children safely
Keep key pushed in and turn it until reaching the
stop at the position. Pull key out at this stop.
Make sure that the passenger belt is
unlocked; otherwise, the front passenger
may become trapped by the safety belt.<
Installing child restraint
systems
Observe the child restraint system manu-
facturer's instructions when selecting,
installing and using child restraint systems.
Otherwise, the protective effect may be dimin-
ished. <
Standard child restraint systems are designed
to be secured with a lap belt or with the lap-belt
section of a lap-and-shoulder belt. Incorrectly
or improperly installed child restraint systems
can increase the risk of injury to children.
Always follow the installation instructions for
the system with the greatest care.
On the front passenger seat
After installing a child restraint system on
the front passenger seat, make sure that
the front and side airbags for the front passen-
ger are deactivated; otherwise, there is an
increased risk of injury if the airbags deploy.<
Seat position
Before installing a child restraint system, move
the front passenger seat as far back and up as
possible to obtain the best possible position for
the belt. Do not change the seat position after
this.
Backrest width
The backrest width of the front passenger
seat must be at its widest possible set-
ting. Do not change the setting after installing
the child seat; otherwise, the child seat's stabil-
ity on the front passenger seat is limited.<
1. Adjust the backrest width to its widest set-
ting, refer to page 44.
2. Install the child seat.
Child seat security
The rear safety belts and the front passenger
safety belt can be prevented from being pulled
out in order to fasten child restraint systems.
To lock the safety belt
1. Secure the child restraint system with the
belt.
2. Pull the belt strap all the way out.
3. Allow the belt strap to retract and pull it taut
against the child restraint system.
The safety belt is locked.
To unlock the safety belt
1. Open the belt buckle.
2. Remove the child restraint system.
3. Allow the safety belt strap to retract all the
way.
LATCH child restraint fixing
system
LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHil-
dren.
To install and use the LATCH child
restraint system, follow the operating and
safety instructions provided by the manufac-
turer of the system; otherwise, the protective
function of the seat may be compromised.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
55
Transporting children safely
Controls
Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors
Mounts for lower LATCH anchors
Before installing the child seat, pull the belt out
of the area for the child restraint fixing system.
Ensure that both lower LATCH anchors
are correctly engaged and that the child
restraint system is resting firmly against the
backrest; otherwise, the protective function of
the seat may be compromised.<
The mounts for the lower LATCH anchors are
located behind the labeled protective caps.
Installing LATCH child restraint
systems
1 Installing child restraint system, refer to the
system operating instructions.
2 Make sure that both LATCH anchors are
correctly locked in position.
Child restraint system with tether strap
Convertible
For Canadian Customers Only.
The following statement is required by Trans-
port Canada.
This vehicle is not equipped with user-ready
tether anchorages. As such neither a child
restraint system, nor a booster cushion, requir-
ing the use of a tether strap can be properly
secured in the vehicle.
Coupe
Use the tether strap anchors to secure
child restraint systems only; otherwise,
the anchors could be damaged.<
For child restraint systems with tether straps
there are two additional anchors, see arrows.
Placement of the tether strap
Coupe
Make sure the upper retaining strap does
not run over sharp edges and is not
twisted as it passes to the top anchor. Other-
wise, the strap will not properly secure the child
restraint system in the event of an accident.<
1 Direction of travel
2 Head restraint
3 Hook for upper retaining strap
4 Anchor
5 Rear window shelf
6 Seat backrest
7 Upper retaining strap of child restraint sys-
tem
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
56
Controls Transporting children safely
If necessary, fold the anchors upward before
use.
1. Push the head restraint upward.
2. Guide the upper retaining strap between
the head restraint holders.
3. Use the hook to clip the retaining strap to
the anchor.
4. Push the head restraint into its lowermost
position.
5. Pull the retaining strap taut.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
57
Driving
Controls
Driving
Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and
optional equipment that is offered in the model
range is described. For this reason, descrip-
tions will be given of some equipment that may
not be available in a vehicle, for example due to
the special options or national-market version
selected. This also applies to safety related
functions and systems.
Ignition lock
Insert the remote control into the
ignition lock
Insert the remote control all the way into the
ignition lock.
> Radio readiness is switched on.
Individual electrical consumers can operate.
Comfort Access
If the car is equipped with Comfort Access, only
insert the remote control into the ignition lock
under special circumstances, refer to page 33.
Removing the remote control from the
ignition lock
Do not forcibly pull the remote control out
of the ignition lock as this may cause
damage.<
Before removing the remote control, push it all
the way in to release the locking mechanism.
> The ignition is switched off if it was on.
Automatic transmission
You cannot take out the remote control unless
the selector lever is in the P position: interlock.
Start/Stop button
Pressing the Start/Stop button switches radio
readiness or the ignition on or off.
Manual transmission: when you press the
Start/Stop button and depress the clutch,
the engine starts.
Automatic transmission and Sport automatic
transmission with double clutch: when you
press the Start/Stop button and depress the
brake pedal, the engine starts.<
Radio readiness
Individual electrical consumers can operate.
The time and the outside temperature are dis-
played in the instrument cluster.
Radio readiness is switched off automatically:
> When the remote control is removed from
the ignition lock
> In cars with Comfort Access, by touching
the surface above the door lock, refer to
Locking on page 34
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
58
Controls Driving
Ignition on
All electrical consumers can operate. The
odometer and trip odometer are displayed in
the instrument cluster.
When the engine is off, please switch off
the ignition and any unnecessary electri-
cal consumers in order to preserve the bat-
tery.<
Radio readiness and ignition off
All indicator and warning lamps as well as dis-
plays in the instrument cluster go out.
Starting the engine
Do not run the engine in enclosed areas;
otherwise, the inhalation of toxic exhaust
gases can cause loss of consciousness and
death. The exhaust gases contain carbon mon-
oxide, an odorless and colorless, but highly
toxic gas. Never leave an unattended vehicle
with the engine running; otherwise, such a vehi-
cle represents a potential safety hazard.
Before leaving the vehicle with the engine run-
ning, always shift into neutral or selector lever/
transmission position P and apply the parking
brake forcefully to prevent the vehicle from roll-
ing.<
Avoid frequent starting in quick succes-
sion as well as repeated start attempts in
which the engine does not start. Otherwise, the
fuel is not burned or incompletely burned and
there is a danger of overheating and damaging
the catalytic converter.<
Do not wait for the engine to warm up while the
vehicle remains stationary. Start driving right
away, but at moderate engine speeds.
Manual transmission
Remote control in the ignition lock or, with
Comfort Access, inside the vehicle, refer to
page 33.
1. Depress the brake.
2. Depress the clutch and shift into neutral.
3. Press the Start/Stop button.
The starter operates automatically for a certain
time, and stops automatically as soon as the
engine has started.
Automatic transmission
Remote control in the ignition lock or, with
Comfort Access, inside the vehicle, refer to
page 33.
1. Depress the brake.
2. Move the selector lever to position P.
3. Press the Start/Stop button.
The starter operates automatically for a certain
time, and stops automatically as soon as the
engine has started.
Sport automatic transmission with
double clutch
Remote control in the ignition lock or, with
Comfort Access, inside the vehicle, refer to
page 33.
1. Depress the brake.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
The engine starts independent of the current
transmission position.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
59
Driving
Controls
Switching off the engine
Always take the remote control with you
when you leave the vehicle.
When parking, apply the parking brake force-
fully; otherwise, the vehicle could begin to roll.<
Manual transmission
1. With the car at a standstill, press the Start/
Stop button.
2. Shift into first gear or reverse.
3. Forcefully apply the parking brake.
4. Removing the remote control from the igni-
tion lock, refer to page 57.
Automatic transmission
1. With the car at a standstill, move the selec-
tor lever to position P.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
3. Forcefully apply the parking brake.
4. Removing the remote control from the igni-
tion lock, refer to page 57.
Sport automatic transmission with
double clutch
1. With the car at a standstill, press the Start/
Stop button.
If the transmission is shifted into N when the
engine is switched off, you will be notified
visually and acoustically of this fact.
2. Forcefully apply the parking brake.
3. Remove remote control from the ignition
lock, refer to page 57. The transmission is
automatically shifted into transmission
position P.
Parking brake
The parking brake is primarily intended to pre-
vent the vehicle from rolling while parked; it
brakes the rear wheels.
Indicator lamp
The indicator lamp is lit, and when you
drive off an acoustic signal sounds in
addition. The parking brake is still
applied.
Indicator lamp for Canadian models.
Applying
The lever locks in position automatically.
Releasing
Pull slightly upwards, press the button and
lower the lever.
In exceptional cases, if the parking brake
has to be used to slow or stop the car, do
not pull the lever up too hard. In doing so, con-
tinuously press the button of the parking brake
lever.
Otherwise, excessive force on the parking
brake can lock up the rear wheels and cause the
rear of the car to swerve.<
To prevent corrosion and one-sided brak-
ing action, occasionally apply the parking
brake lightly when the vehicle is slowly coming
to a stop if the traffic conditions are suitable.
The brake lamps do not light up when the park-
ing brake is applied.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
60
Controls Driving
Manual transmission
When shifting into 5th or 6th gear, press
the gearshift lever to the right. Otherwise,
the engine could be damaged if you inadvert-
ently shift into 3rd or 4th gear.<
Reverse gear
Select this only when the vehicle is stationary.
When the gearshift lever is pressed to the left, a
slight resistance has to be overcome.
Automatic transmission with
Steptronic
In addition to fully automatic operation, you can
also manually shift with the Steptronic, refer to
page 61.
Vehicle parking
To prevent the vehicle from rolling,
always select position P and apply the
parking brake before leaving the vehicle with
the engine running.<
Disengaging the remote control
In order to remove the remote control from the
ignition lock, you must first move the selector
lever to position P and switch off the engine:
interlock. Removing the remote control from
the ignition lock, refer to page 57.
Selector lever positions
P R N D M/S + –
Displays in the instrument cluster
The selector lever position is displayed and, in
manual mode, the engaged gear, e.g. M4.
Changing selector lever positions
> With the ignition switched on or the engine
running, the selector lever can be moved
out of position P.
> Before moving the lever away from P or N
with the vehicle stationary, first depress the
brake; otherwise, the selector lever will
refuse to move: shiftlock.
To prevent the vehicle from creeping
after you select a driving position,
depress the brake until you are ready to
start.<
A lock prevents you from inadvertently engag-
ing selector lever positions R and P. To cancel
the lock, press the button on the front of the
selector lever, see arrow.
P Park
Select this only when the vehicle is stationary.
The rear wheels are locked.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
61
Driving
Controls
R Reverse
Select this only when the vehicle is stationary.
N Neutral
You can select this in a car wash, for example.
The vehicle can roll.
D Drive, automatic position
Position for normal vehicle operation. All for-
ward gears are selected automatically.
Under normal operating conditions, fuel con-
sumption is lowest when you are driving in posi-
tion D.
Kickdown
Kickdown enables you to achieve maximum
performance.
Press the accelerator pedal beyond the full-
throttle resistance point.
Sport program and manual mode M/S
Move selector lever from position D toward the
left into the M/S shifting slot; the Sport program
is activated. This position is recommended for a
performance-oriented driving style.
DS is displayed in the instrument cluster.
To deactivate the sport program or manual
mode M/S, move the selector lever to the right
into position D.
Shifting gears via the selector lever
Move selector lever from position D toward the
left into the M/S shifting slot:
When you press the selector lever forwards or
backwards, the manual mode is activated and
Steptronic changes gear.
The engaged gear, e.g. M1 is displayed in the
instrument cluster.
Upshifts and downshifts are executed only
when they will result in a plausible combination
of engine and vehicle speed; thus, for example,
a downshift that would cause the engine to
overrev will not be executed by the system.
The gear selected is briefly displayed in the
instrument cluster, followed again by the gear
actually in use.
Changing gears using shifting paddles
on steering wheel
The shift paddles allow you to shift gears
quickly since both hands can remain on the
steering wheel.
> When you use the shift paddles on the
steering wheel to shift gears in automatic
mode, the transmission switches to manual
mode.
> If you do not accelerate or shift gears using
the shift paddles for a certain amount of
time, the transmission switches back to
automatic mode.
If the selector lever is in the M/S gear
plane, manual mode remains active.<
> To upshift, briefly pull the right shift
paddle +.
> To downshift, briefly pull the left shift pad-
dle –.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
62
Controls Driving
Upshifts and downshifts are executed only
when they will result in a plausible combination
of engine and vehicle speed; thus, for example,
a downshift that would cause the engine to
overrev will not be executed by the system.
The gear selected is briefly displayed in the
instrument cluster, followed again by the gear
actually in use.
Overriding selector lever lock
Should the selector lever refuse to move out of
position P even though the ignition is switched
on, the brake is depressed and the button on
the selector lever is pressed, the selector lever
lock can be overridden:
1. Switch off ignition.
2. Unclip the sleeve of the selector lever.
3. Pull the sleeve up over the selector lever
until the sleeve is inside out.
4. Using the screwdriver from the onboard
vehicle tool kit, refer to page 208, press the
red lever and with the button pressed,
simultaneously move the selector lever to
the desired position.
7-gear Sport automatic
transmission with double
clutch
The concept
The 7-gear Sport automatic transmission with
double clutch is an automated manual trans-
mission with two clutches and secondary gear
sets in which the clutching and shifting is han-
dled by an electrohydraulic system.
With the 7-gear Sport automatic transmission
with double clutch, the gears are shifted without
an interruption in driving power.
You operate the 7-gear Sport automatic trans-
mission with double clutch using the selector
lever and two shift paddles on the steering
wheel.
It offers you the following functions:
> Either manual or automatic mode: sequen-
tial mode or drive mode
> Automatic downshifting and protection
against incorrect gear selection, even in
sequential mode
> Acceleration assistant, Launch Control,
refer to page 66
> Automatic intermediate throttle application
System limitations
The 7-gear Sport automatic transmission with
double clutch has an overheating protection
that protects the clutch from extreme loads.
The indicator lamp lights up in yellow if
the transmission becomes too warm.
Avoid high engine loads and frequent
accelerations from zero. If the transmission is
overheated, the indicator lamp lights up in red
and the power flow to the motor is interrupted. It
is only possible to continue driving once the
transmission has cooled down.
Avoid frequent powerful accelerations from
zero and do not hold the vehicle on inclines by
pressing lightly on the accelerator while letting
the clutch slip, as this may cause the transmis-
sion to overheat.
Selector lever positions
P R N D M/S + –
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
63
Driving
Controls
Displays in the instrument cluster
The selector lever position and the engaged
gear are displayed, e.g. M4.
Engaging selector lever positions
> The selector lever can be moved out of
position P only with the engine running:
interlock.
> Before moving the lever away from P or N
with the vehicle stationary, first depress the
brake; otherwise, the desired shift will not
be executed: shiftlock.
Shifting into N, D, R
Briefly push the selector lever in the desired
direction, overcoming a resistance point if nec-
essary. When shifting out of P or into R, simul-
taneously press the button 1.
The engaged selector lever position is also dis-
played on the selector lever.
When you release the selector lever, it returns
to its center position.
Shifting into P
Press the button P.
P Park
Select this only when the vehicle is stationary.
The rear wheels are locked.
The transmission is shifted into P if, with
the engine running, you open the driver's
door, do not have your safety belt fastened, and
subsequently actuate neither the brake pedal
nor the accelerator. Before leaving the vehicle,
make sure that the automatic transmission
selector lever is in the park position. Otherwise,
the vehicle may begin to move.<
The transmission is shifted into P as soon
as you switch off the engine, unless the
transmission is in N and the remote control is in
the ignition lock, refer to page 205. As soon as
you remove the remote control from the ignition
lock, then the transmission is shifted into P.<
R Reverse
Select this only when the vehicle is stationary.
N Neutral
You can select this in a car wash, for example.
The vehicle can roll.
After the engine is switched off, the trans-
mission remains in N if you leave the
remote control in the ignition lock. You can use
this function at a car wash, for example, refer to
page 205.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
64
Controls Driving
D Drive mode
In Drive mode, all forward gears are shifted
automatically.
Kickdown
For sudden acceleration maneuvers such as
passing, depress the accelerator past the resis-
tance point. This provides maximum accelera-
tion.
Sport program and
manual mode M/S
Push selector lever toward the left from the
selector lever position D, the Sport program is
activated. This position is recommended for a
performance-oriented driving style.
The engaged gear, e.g. S1, is displayed in the
instrument cluster.
When you press the selector lever forwards or
backwards, the manual mode is activated and
Steptronic changes gear.
The engaged gear, e.g. M1 is displayed in the
instrument cluster.
In the following situations, the 7-gear Sport
automatic transmission with double clutch
does the thinking for you:
> Upshifts and downshifts are executed only
when they will result in a plausible combina-
tion of engine and vehicle speed; thus, for
example, a downshift that could cause the
engine to overrev will not be executed by
the system.
> At a stop, the transmission is automatically
shifted down to the first gear.
> Shortly before the speed falls below a gear-
dependent minimum speed, the transmis-
sion automatically downshifts without your
intervention.
Quick downshifting: even in sequential mode,
you can skip over several gears in order to
achieve an optimum acceleration. To do so,
depress the accelerator past the resistance
point.
To return to automatic mode, push the selector
lever to the right.
Gear shifting
Upshift or downshift using the selector lever or
the shift paddles. You do not need to lift your
foot off the accelerator when doing so.
Using the selector lever
> To upshift, pull the selector lever toward the
rear.
> To downshift, push it toward the front.
Using the shift paddles on the steering
wheel
You can also shift manually using two shift pad-
dles on the steering wheel. The shift paddles
allow you to shift gears quickly since both
hands can remain on the steering wheel.
> When you use the shift paddles on the
steering wheel to shift gears in automatic
mode, the transmission switches to manual
mode.
> If you do not accelerate or shift gears using
the shift paddles for a certain amount of
time, the transmission switches back to
automatic mode if the selector lever is in
position D.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
65
Driving
Controls
> To upshift, briefly pull the right shift
paddle +.
> To downshift, briefly pull the left shift pad-
dle –.
Driving dynamics control
The driving dynamics control permits you, at
the push of a button, to have your BMW react in
an even more sporty fashion when driving:
> Optimal use is made of the engine's speed
range.
> Gear changes occur more quickly.
> The engine reacts more spontaneously to
accelerator pedal movements.
Activating the system
Press the SPORT button.
The LED in the button lights up and SPORT
appears in the info display.
Deactivating the system
> Press the SPORT button again.
> Switch off the engine.
The LED in the button goes out and SPORT
disappears from the info display.
Manually unlocking parking lock
In the event of a power supply interrup-
tion such as a discharged or discon-
nected battery or an electrical malfunction, the
parking lock must be manually unlocked; other-
wise, the rear wheels are immobilized and the
vehicle cannot be towed.<
Only unlock the parking lock manually for tow-
ing and make sure to set the parking brake
forcefully beforehand so that the vehicle cannot
roll. Lock the parking lock again after the vehicle
is parked.
Releasing
1. Unclip the sleeve of the selector lever.
2. Pull the sleeve up over the selector lever
until the sleeve is inside out.
3. Using the allen wrench from the tool kit,
refer to page 208, rotate the cover until it
reaches the stop, arrow 1, and remove,
arrow 2.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
66
Controls Driving
4. Insert allen wrench into the opening,
arrow 1.
5. Rotate allen wrench until it reaches the
stop, arrow 2. The parking lock is unlocked.
Do not turn allen wrench in the oppo-
site direction; otherwise, you may
damage the mechanism.<
6. Remove allen wrench from the opening.
After parking the vehicle, lock the parking
lock again. Otherwise, there is a danger
that the vehicle will roll.<
Locking
1. Press the button, see arrow.
The parking lock is locked again.
2. Replace cover again.
3. Clip the selector lever sleeve back into
place.
4. Forcefully apply the parking brake.
Jump-starting and towing, starting on
page 217.
Launch Control
Launch Control enables an optimum accelera-
tion when starting off on a road surface with
good traction.
Do not use Launch Control too often; oth-
erwise, the powerful stresses on the vehi-
cle will lead to premature component wear.<
Launch Control is available when the engine is
at operating temperature, i.e. after driving con-
tinuously for approx. 6.2 miles/10 km.
1. With the engine running, step on the brake
with your left foot.
2. Activate Dynamic Traction Control (DTC),
refer to page 91.
3. Activate Driving dynamics control, refer to
page 65.
4. With the vehicle stationary, activate the
manual mode and select 1
st
gear.
5. With your right foot, push the accelerator
pedal past the resistance point. The engine
speed for pulling away is adjusted. A flag
symbol appears in the instrument cluster.
6. When you release the brake pedal, the vehi-
cle accelerates. Keep the accelerator pedal
floored.
7. The upshifting occurs automatically as long
as you keep the accelerator pedal pressed
past the resistance point.
Launch Control will be ready for use again after
you drive a certain distance.
Launch Control is not available for use during
the break-in phase, refer to page 132.
To maintain driving stability, keep DSC
activated whenever possible.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
67
Driving
Controls
Turn signals/
headlamp flasher
1 High beams
2 Headlamp flasher
3 Turn signal
Using turn signals
Press the lever beyond the resistance point.
To turn off manually, press the lever to the
resistance point.
Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator
lamp indicates that a turn signal indicator
has failed.<
Signaling a turn briefly
Press the lever as far as the resistance point for
as long as you wish to signal a turn.
Triple turn signal activation
Press the lever as far as the resistance point.
The turn signals flash three times.
You can activate or deactivate this function.
1. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 57.
2. Briefly press button 1 in the turn signal/high
beam lever up or down repeatedly until the
symbol appears in the display, accompa-
nied by the word "SET".
3. Press button 2.
4. Briefly press button 1 in the turn indicator
lever down repeatedly until the symbol
appears in the display.
5. Press button 2.
6. Use button 1 to select:
>
Turn signals flash once.
>
Triple turn signal.
7. Press button 2.
The setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
68
Controls Driving
Wiper system
1 Switching on wipers
2 Switching off wipers or brief wipe
3 Activating/deactivating intermittent wipe or
rain sensor
4 Cleaning windshield and headlamps
5 Setting speed for intermittent wipe or sen-
sitivity of the rain sensor
Switching on wipers
Press the lever upward, arrow 1.
The lever automatically returns to its initial posi-
tion when released.
Normal wiper speed
Press once.
The system switches to operation in the inter-
mittent mode when the vehicle is stationary.
Fast wiper speed
Press twice or press beyond the resistance
point.
The system switches to normal speed when the
vehicle is stationary.
Intermittent wipe or rain sensor
If the car is not equipped with a rain sensor, the
intermittent-wipe time is a preset.
If the car is equipped with a rain sensor, the time
between wipes is controlled automatically and
depends on the intensity of the rainfall. The rain
sensor is mounted on the windshield, directly in
front of the interior rearview mirror.
Activating intermittent wipe or rain
sensor
Press the button, arrow 3. The LED in the but-
ton lights up.
Setting speed for intermittent wipe or
sensitivity of the rain sensor
Turn thumbwheel 5 up or down.
Deactivating intermittent wipe or rain
sensor
Press the button again, arrow 3.
The LED goes out.
Deactivate the rain sensor before enter-
ing an automatic car wash. Failure to do
so could result in damage caused by undesired
wiper activation.<
Cleaning windshield and headlamps
Pull the lever, arrow 4.
Washer fluid is sprayed onto the windshield and
the wipers are operated for a short time.
When the vehicle lighting system is switched
on, the headlamps are cleaned at regular and
appropriate intervals.
Do not use the washers if there is any
danger that the fluid will freeze on the
windshield. If you do, your vision could be
obscured. Antifreeze should therefore be
added to the fluid, refer to Washer fluid.
Do not use the washers when the washer fluid
reservoir is empty; otherwise, you will damage
the washer pump.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
69
Driving
Controls
Windshield washer nozzles
Both windshield washer nozzles are automati-
cally heated with the engine running or the igni-
tion switched on.
Washer fluid
Washer fluid antifreeze is flammable.
Therefore, keep it away from ignition
sources and only store it in the closed original
container that is kept out of reach of children;
otherwise, there is a risk of personal injury.
Comply with the instructions on the con-
tainer.<
Washer fluid filler neck
Only refill washer fluid when the engine is
cool to avoid contact with hot engine
parts. Otherwise, fluid spills constitute a fire
hazard and a risk to personal safety.<
All washer nozzles are supplied with washer
fluid by the same reservoir.
Fill with water and, if required, with a washer
antifreeze, according to manufacturer's recom-
mendations.
Mix the water and antifreeze before filling
the washer fluid reservoir to make sure
the correct concentration is maintained.<
Capacity
Approx. 6.3 US quarts/6 liters.
Cruise control
The concept
Cruise control is available for use at speeds of
approx. 20 mph or 30 km/h. The car then stores
and maintains the speed that you specify using
the lever on the steering column. In order to
maintain the specified speed, the system
brakes the vehicle when the engine braking
effect is insufficient on downhill gradients.
Do not use cruise control when driving at
constant speed is prevented by adverse
conditions, e.g. winding roads, dense traffic or
poor road conditions due to, e.g., snow, rain, ice
or loose surfaces. Otherwise, you could lose
control of the vehicle and cause an accident as a
result.<
Manual transmission
You can shift gears while cruise control is acti-
vated. The system is deactivated when you
drive at very low engine speeds for an extended
period.
One lever for all functions
1 Storing and maintaining speed or accelerat-
ing
2 Storing and maintaining speed or deceler-
ating
3 Deactivating cruise control
4 Resuming a previously stored speed
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
70
Controls Driving
Maintaining current speed
Briefly press the lever, arrow 1, or pull it briefly,
arrow 2.
The car's current speed is stored and main-
tained. It is displayed on the speedometer and
briefly in the instrument cluster.
On uphill gradients, it may prove impossible to
maintain the set speed if current engine power
output is insufficient. If the engine braking
effect is insufficient on downhill slopes, the sys-
tem will brake the vehicle slightly.
Increasing desired speed
Repeatedly press the lever to the resistance
point or beyond, arrow 1, until the desired
speed is reached.
> Each time the lever is pressed to the resis-
tance point, the desired speed is increased
by approx. 1 mph or 1 km/h.
> Each time the lever is pressed beyond the
resistance point, the desired speed is
increased by up to 5 mph or 10 km/h.
The system stores and maintains the speed.
Accelerating using the lever
Accelerating slightly:
Press the lever to the resistance point, arrow 1,
until the desired speed is reached.
Accelerating significantly:
Press the lever beyond the resistance point,
arrow 1, until the desired speed is reached.
The vehicle accelerates without pressure on
the accelerator pedal. The system stores and
maintains the speed.
Decreasing speed
Repeatedly pull the lever to the resistance point
or beyond, arrow 2, until the desired speed is
displayed.
> Each time the lever is pulled to the resis-
tance point, the desired speed is decreased
by approx. 1 mph or 1 km/h.
> Each time the lever is pulled beyond the
resistance point, the desired speed is
reduced by up to 5 mph or 10 km/h until the
minimum speed of 20 mph or 30 km/h is
achieved.
The system stores and maintains the speed.
Deactivating cruise control
Briefly press the lever upwards or downwards,
arrow 3.
The displays on the speedometer disappear.
In addition, the system is automatically deacti-
vated:
> When the brakes are applied.
> When the manual transmission is shifted
very slowly or shifted into neutral.
> When the automatic transmission selector
lever is moved into the neutral position.
> When the selector lever of the Sports auto-
matic transmission with double clutch is
moved into the neutral position.
> When DTC is activated or DSC is deacti-
vated.
> When DSC or ABS is intervening.
Cruise control is not deactivated by depressing
the accelerator pedal. Once the accelerator
pedal is released, the stored speed is achieved
again and maintained.
Warning lamp
The warning lamp lights up when
cruise control is deactivated due to
control intervention by the DSC, for
example.
Resuming a previously stored speed
Press the button, arrow 4.
The last stored speed is resumed and main-
tained.
In the following instances, the stored speed is
deleted and can no longer be resumed:
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
71
Driving
Controls
> When driving stability control systems are
intervening.
> In cars with manual transmission: when you
shift gears very slowly or shift to neutral.
> In cars with automatic transmission: when
you engage selector lever position N.
> In cars with Sport automatic transmission
with double clutch: when you engage selec-
tor lever position N.
> When the ignition is switched off.
Displays in the instrument cluster
1 Stored speed
2 Selected speed is displayed briefly
If --- mph or --- km/h temporarily appears
in the instrument cluster display, it is pos-
sible that the system prerequisites for operation
are currently not met.
Calling up Check Control messages, refer to
page 88.<
Malfunction
The warning lamp lights up. The
cruise control is malfunctioning. You
can continue your journey. Have the
system checked.
Active Cruise Control
The concept
With Active Cruise Control, you can select a
desired speed which is not only automatically
maintained when driving on open roadways, but
also varied to maintain a selected distance set-
ting as slower traffic is encountered.
Active Cruise Control is a technological
advance over the familiar cruise control and is a
welcome relief from the constant adjustment of
speed that can accompany driving in traffic on
highways or other high-speed thoroughfares.
Especially on longer trips, the system can
reduce fatigue and tension, while increasing
your enjoyment of driving. Please use it safely
and responsibly.
Within the limits of its capability, the system
automatically adapts the car's speed to that of a
slower vehicle in front of you. You can specify
the distance to be maintained from the vehicle
in front in four stages. For safety reasons, the
distance is speed-dependent. Based on your
selected distance setting, the system automat-
ically decreases the throttle setting and lightly
applies the brakes if necessary. The vehicle
brake lamps will automatically illuminate to sig-
nal a following driver to take action. In addition,
it may be necessary for the vehicle or the driver
to downshift, depending on the kind of trans-
mission your vehicle is equipped with, to main-
tain the distance setting selected. If the vehicle
ahead speeds up or when the lane ahead
becomes clear, your vehicle will accelerate to
the speed you have selected by increasing the
throttle setting and shifting gears automatically
or by the driver as needed. Your selected speed
will be held when driving downhill, too.
Since this Active Cruise Control system is a
new technology and operates differently from
conventional cruise control systems which you
may be accustomed to, you are strongly urged
to read all of the pages relating to this system
before use. Pay special attention to the System
limitations section beginning on page 76.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
72
Controls Driving
Braking sensation
> If you step on the brake pedal while the sys-
tem is braking, pedal sensation will be
slightly different from the usual.
> Possible noises during automatic braking
are normal.
Manual transmission
You can shift gears while cruise control is acti-
vated. The system is deactivated when you
drive at very low engine speeds for an extended
period.
Range of applications
The minimum desired speed is 20 mph or
30 km/h, the maximum desired speed is
110 mph or 180 km/h.
As with conventional cruise control sys-
tems, Active Cruise Control in no way
diminishes or substitutes for the driver’s own
personal responsibility, alertness and aware-
ness in adjusting speed, braking or otherwise
controlling the vehicle. The driver should
decide when to use the system on the basis of
road, traffic, visibility, and weather conditions.
Active Cruise Control is intended for use on
highway-type roadways where traffic is moving
relatively smoothly. Do not use this system in
city driving; heavy traffic such as during rush
hour; on curvy, winding roads, slippery roads or
roads with sharp curves such as highway off-
ramps; during inclement weather such as snow,
strong rain or fog; or when entering inter-
changes, service/parking areas or toll booths.
It is also important to regulate your vehicle's
speed and distance setting within applicable
legal limits. Always be ready to take action or
apply the brakes if necessary, especially when
the system is actively following a vehicle in front
of you. Otherwise, driving situations could
result that pose the risk of accidents.<
One lever for all functions
1 Store and increase desired speed
2 Store and decrease desired speed
3 Deactivate system, refer to page 73
4 Resume stored desired speed and dis-
tance, refer to page 74
5 Select distance to vehicle driving ahead,
refer to page 73
Storing current speed
Briefly press the lever, arrow 1, or pull the lever,
arrow 2, at a driving speed of more than approx.
20 mph or 30 km/h.
The car's current speed is stored. It is displayed
on the speedometer and briefly in the instru-
ment cluster.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
73
Driving
Controls
Increasing desired speed
Press or briefly press the lever to the resistance
point or beyond, arrow 1, until the desired
speed is displayed.
> Each time the lever is briefly pressed to the
resistance point, the desired speed is
increased by approx. 1 mph or 1 km/h.
> Each time the lever is briefly pressed
beyond the resistance point, the desired
speed is increased by up to 5 mph or
10 km/h until the maximum speed of
110 mph or 180 km/h is achieved.
The speed then displayed is stored and
achieved on a clear road.
Decreasing desired speed
Pull the lever, arrow 2, until the desired speed is
displayed.
The other functions work analogously to those
described under Increasing desired speed.
Selecting distance
> Press downward:
Increase distance.
> Press upward:
Decrease distance.
The selected distance is displayed in the instru-
ment cluster.
Use good judgment to select the appro-
priate following distance given road con-
ditions, traffic, applicable laws and driving rec-
ommendations for safe following distance.
Otherwise, an accident risk could result.<
Deactivating cruise control
Press the lever upward or downward, arrow 3.
The displays on the speedometer disappear.
In addition, the system is automatically deacti-
vated:
Distance 1
Distance 2
Distance 3
Distance 4
This is always the preset dis-
tance when you use the system
for the first time after starting the
engine.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
74
Controls Driving
> When the brakes are applied.
> The speed is reduced to below 20 mph or
30 km/h due to a traffic situation.
> When the manual transmission is shifted
very slowly or shifted into neutral.
> When the automatic transmission selector
lever is moved into the neutral position.
> When the selector lever of the Sports auto-
matic transmission with double clutch is
moved into the neutral position.
> When Dynamic Traction Control DTC is
activated.
> When Dynamic Stability Control DSC is
deactivated.
> When DSC or ABS is intervening.
> The system does not recognize any objects
for a longer time, e.g. on infrequently trav-
eled roads without a shoulder or guard rails,
or if the radar sensor is covered with dirt,
refer to page 75.
> The parking brake is engaged.
When the system is deactivated, you
must brake the vehicle yourself and/or
maneuver as necessary; otherwise, there is a
risk of accidents.<
Warning lamp
The warning lamp lights up when
Active Cruise Control has been
automatically deactivated, for exam-
ple due to a driving speed below 20 mph or
30 km/h or a DSC intervention.
Resuming stored desired speed and
distance
Briefly press the button, arrow 4.
The stored speed and distance are regained
and maintained.
In the following instances, the stored speed is
deleted and can no longer be resumed:
> When driving stability control systems are
intervening.
> In cars with manual transmission: when you
shift gears very slowly or shift to neutral.
> In cars with automatic transmission: when
you engage selector lever position N.
> In cars with Sport automatic transmission
with double clutch: when you engage selec-
tor lever position N.
> When the ignition is switched off.
Displays in the instrument cluster
1 Stored desired speed
2 Shows yellow: vehicle detected ahead
Flashes in red: system cannot maintain dis-
tance; driver must brake the vehicle
Flashes in yellow: driving stability control
systems are intervening; cruise control is
deactivated
3 Selected distance to vehicle ahead
The indicator lights up as soon as the sys-
tem is activated.
4 Selected desired speed is temporarily dis-
played
If --- mph or --- km/h temporarily appears
in the instrument cluster display, it is pos-
sible that the system prerequisites for operation
are currently not met. Calling up Check Control
messages, refer to page 88.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
75
Driving
Controls
Warning lamps
The indicator 2 flashes in red; a
signal sounds.
The system indicates that you
must brake and/or maneuver the
vehicle yourself. Active Cruise
Control cannot automatically restore the dis-
tance to the vehicle ahead.
This indicator does not release you from your
responsibility to adapt your desired speed and
driving style to prevailing driving conditions.
The indicator 2 flashes in yellow.
The prerequisites for operating
Active Cruise Control are not met,
e.g. as a result of ABS or DSC
interventions. Active Cruise Con-
trol is deactivated. You can reactivate the sys-
tem, if desired, by briefly pressing or pulling the
lever when road and traffic conditions permit. It
is not possible to resume a stored speed.
Radar sensor
The sensor's ability to detect vehicles ahead
may be restricted as a result of heavy rain, dirt,
snow or ice. If necessary, clean the radar sensor
located in the front bumper, see arrow. Be sure
to use particular care when removing any layers
of snow or ice from the sensor.
The system cannot be activated if the sensor is
incorrectly aligned.
For US owners only
The transmitter and receiver units comply with
part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communications
Commission regulations. Operation is gov-
erned by the following:
FCC ID:
NF3 ACC2SCU 003YK04001 0000
Compliance statement:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
> This device must not cause harmful inter-
ference, and
> this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modifications or
changes to these devices could void the
user’s authority to operate this equipment.<
Malfunction
The warning lamp lights up. The
Active Cruise Control is malfunction-
ing. Have the system checked.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
76
Controls Driving
System limitations
Always remember that the range and abil-
ity of the system does have physical limi-
tations. It will not apply the brakes or decelerate
your vehicle when there is a slow-moving vehi-
cle, stopped vehicle, or stationary object ahead
of you, for example at a traffic light or when
approaching a parked vehicle. Also, the system
does not react to oncoming traffic, pedestrians
or other types of potential traffic such as a rider
on horseback. The system may also not detect
smaller moving objects such as motorcycles or
bicycles. Be especially alert when encountering
any of these situations as the system will nei-
ther automatically brake, nor provide a warning
to you. Also, be aware that every decrease in
the distance setting allows your vehicle to come
closer to a vehicle in front of you and requires a
heightened amount of alertness.<
Active Cruise Control is not and must not
be used as a collision avoidance/warning
system.<
If while your vehicle is actively following a vehi-
cle in front of you and the vehicle ahead speeds
up or the lane ahead becomes clear, then your
vehicle will accelerate to the speed you have
selected. Be aware that changing to a clear,
unobstructed lane will also result in your vehicle
accelerating.
Be certain to deactivate the system when
you pull into an exit lane for a highway off-
ramp.<
Also, vehicles traveling in a staggered manner
on a highway may cause a delay in the system's
reaction to a vehicle in front of you or may cause
the system to react to a vehicle actually in the
lane next to you. Always be ready to take action
or apply the brakes if necessary.
While Active Cruise Control is capable of
braking your vehicle automatically when
you approach a slower vehicle ahead, it is
important to be aware that the ability of the sys-
tem to apply the brakes is also limited, e.g.
when you reduce your desired speed sharply.
The system cannot stop your vehicle. It uses
only a portion of braking system capacity and
does not utilize the full capacity of the vehicle
braking system. Therefore, the system cannot
decrease your speed for large differences in
speed between your vehicle and the vehicle
ahead. Examples: when you approach a vehicle
traveling at a much lower speed than your own
speed such as approaching a toll booth or when
a much slower vehicle cuts in front of you at
close range.<
Active Cruise Control can only decelerate the
vehicle to approx. 20 mph or 30 km/h.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
77
Driving
Controls
Swerving vehicles
When a vehicle moves from an adjacent lane
into your lane, Active Cruise Control will not
recognize this vehicle until it is fully in your lane
ahead of your vehicle.
When a vehicle ahead suddenly swerves
into your lane, the system may not be able
to maintain the selected distance automatically.
This also applies to great differences in speed
between you and vehicles ahead, e.g. when
quickly approaching a truck. There is a risk of
collision. Once the system has established that
a vehicle is indeed in front of you, it will indicate
that you must brake and/or maneuver the vehi-
cle yourself. Take action yourself; otherwise,
there is a risk of an accident.<
Behavior in curves
Because of the limited range of the system, it is
possible that in curves or on the peaks and val-
leys of hilly roads, a vehicle ahead may be rec-
ognized late, or not at all. Therefore, it is up to
the driver to select a speed that is prudent in
view of the curves and terrain of the roadway.
In approaching a curve, it is possible that Active
Cruise Control would react briefly to a vehicle in
the adjacent lane. In addition, the system can
sense if your vehicle is in a curve and may not
accelerate. If your vehicle decelerates in either
case, you can choose to overcome the deceler-
ation by briefly pressing the accelerator pedal.
Your responsibility
Your actions have priority at all times. When you
press the accelerator pedal while driving with
Active Cruise Control, the automatic braking
function will be temporarily interrupted. Once
you release the accelerator pedal, the desired
speed or the selected distance to the vehicle
ahead is achieved again.
Do not leave your foot on the accelerator
pedal and make sure that no objects such
as floor mats are lying on the accelerator pedal.
Otherwise, the system may not be able to brake
the vehicle.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
78
Controls Controls overview
Controls overview
Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and
optional equipment that is offered in the model
range is described. For this reason, descrip-
tions will be given of some equipment that may
not be available in a vehicle, for example due to
the special options or national-market version
selected. This also applies to safety related
functions and systems.
Odometer, outside
temperature display, clock
1 Knob in the instrument cluster
2 Outside temperature display and clock
3 Odometer and trip odometer
Knob in the instrument cluster
> To reset the trip odometer while the ignition
is switched on
> To display the time, outside temperature
and odometer briefly while the ignition is
switched off
Units of measure
To select the respective units of measure, miles
or km for the odometer as well as 7 or 6 for
the outside temperature, refer to page 83.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Time, outside temperature display
Setting the time, refer to page 86.
Outside temperature warning
When the displayed temperature sinks to
approx. +377/+36, a signal sounds and a
warning lamp lights up. There is an increased
risk of black ice.
Black ice can also form at temperatures
above +377/+36. You should there-
fore drive carefully on bridges and shaded
roads, for example; otherwise, there is an
increased risk of an accident.<
Odometer and trip odometer
Resetting the trip odometer:
With the ignition switched on, press button 1 in
the instrument cluster.
When the vehicle is parked
If you still want to view the time, outside tem-
perature and odometer reading briefly after the
remote control has been taken out of the igni-
tion lock:
Press button 1 in the instrument cluster.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
79
Controls overview
Controls
Tachometer
Never force the engine speed up into the red
warning field, see arrow. In this range, the fuel
supply is interrupted to protect the engine.
Engine oil temperature
When the engine is at normal operating temper-
ature, the engine oil temperature is between
approx. 2107/1006 and approx. 3007/
1506.
If the engine oil temperature is too high, a warn-
ing lamp lights up in the instrument cluster.
Fuel gauge
Fuel tank capacity: approx. 16.1 US gal/
61 liters.
You can find information on refueling on
page 175.
If the tilt of the vehicle varies for a longer period,
when you are driving in mountainous areas, for
example, the indicator may fluctuate slightly.
Reserve
Once the fuel level has fallen to the reserve
zone of approx. 2.1 US gal/8 liters, the indicator
lamp and the cruising range for the remaining
amount of fuel light up briefly. The indicator
lamp remains permanently on when the remain-
ing range is less than approx. 30 miles/50 km.
With a dynamic driving style, e.g. rapid corner-
ing, engine functions are not always assured.
Refuel as soon as possible once your
cruising range falls below 30 miles/
50 km; otherwise, engine functions are not
ensured and damage can occur.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
80
Controls Controls overview
Computer
Displays in the instrument cluster
Calling up information
Press the button in the turn signal/high beam
lever.
The following items of information are dis-
played in the order listed:
> Cruising range
> Average speed
> Average fuel consumption
> Current fuel consumption
> No information
To set the corresponding units of measure,
refer to Formats and units of measure on
page 83.
Cruising range
Displays the estimated cruising range available
with the remaining fuel. The range is calculated
on the basis of the way the car has been driven
over the last 18 miles/30 km and the amount of
fuel currently in the tank.
Refuel as soon as possible once your
cruising range falls below 30 miles/
50 km; otherwise, engine functions are not
ensured and damage can occur.<
Average speed
Periods with the vehicle parked and the engine
switched off are not included in the calculations
of average speed.
To reset average speed: press the button in the
turn signal/high beam lever for approx.
2seconds.
Average fuel consumption
The average fuel consumption is calculated for
the time during which the engine is running.
To reset average fuel consumption: press the
button in the turn signal/high beam lever for
approx. 2 seconds.
Current fuel consumption
Displays the current fuel consumption. This
allows you to see whether your current driving
style is conducive to fuel economy with mini-
mum exhaust emissions.
Displays in BMW Professional radio
Calling up information
1. Switch on radio readiness or ignition.
2. Press the button.
3.
Press the button.
Fuel consumption
Displays the average fuel consumption, e.g. for
the whole trip, a leg of the trip, or after each
refueling. The average fuel consumption is cal-
culated for the time during which the engine is
running.
To start the of the consumption calculation:
1.
Press the button.
2.
Press the button.
The previous display is set to zero and the
system begins to recalculate the average
fuel consumption.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
81
Controls overview
Controls
Average speed
An average speed driven can be displayed.
The average speed is calculated for the time
during which the engine has been running.
To start the calculation of the average speed:
1.
Press the button.
2.
Press the button.
The previous display is set to zero and the
system begins to recalculate the average
speed.
Cruising range
"RANGE"
The display shows the estimated distance that
can still be driven with the existing fuel quantity,
taking into account the prior average fuel con-
sumption.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
82
Controls Controls overview
Settings and information
Operating principle
Certain settings and information can only be
called up when the ignition is switched on. A
number of settings cannot be made while driv-
ing.
1 Button for:
> Selecting display
> Setting values
2 Button for:
> Confirming selected display or set val-
ues
> Calling up computer information 80
3 When the lights are on: instrument lighting
brightness 107
4 Calling up Check Control 87
5 Checking oil level 198
6 Initializing the Flat Tire Monitor 93
Resetting the Tire Pressure Monitor 95
7 Setting the time 86
8 Setting the date 86
9 Viewing service requirement display 84
10 Setting formats and units of measure,
resetting to factory settings 83
11 Adjusting settings
> Confirmation signals when locking and
unlocking the vehicle 27
> Response during unlocking
procedure 25
> Automatic locking 29
> Pathway lighting 104
> Daytime running lights 104
> Triple turn signal activation 67
> Seat memory 49
Exiting displays
The outside temperature reading and the time
reappear when you press button 2 or if you
make no entries within approx. 15 seconds. If
required, complete the current setting first.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
83
Controls overview
Controls
Formats and units of measure
In the instrument cluster
Setting the units of measure
You can set formats and units of measure.
1. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 57.
2. Briefly press button 1 in the turn signal/high
beam lever up or down repeatedly until the
symbol appears in the display, accompa-
nied by the word "SET".
3. Press button 2.
4. Use button 1 to select desired format or
desired unit of measure, e.g. for fuel con-
sumption.
> Fuel consumption: mpg, km/l,
l/100km
> Distance covered: mls, km
> Time: 12h, 24h format
> Date: day.month dd.mm,
month/day mm/dd
> Temperature: 7, 6
5. Press button 2.
6. Use button 1 to make the setting.
7. Press button 2.
The setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Resetting to factory settings
You can reset the settings for formats and units
of measure to the factory settings.
1. Briefly press button 1 in the turn signal/high
beam lever up or down repeatedly until the
symbol appears in the display, accompa-
nied by the word "SET".
2. Press button 2.
3. Use button 1 to select "RESET".
4. Press button 2 until is displayed.
The settings are reset.
The setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
In BMW Professional radio
Adjusting
1. Switch on radio readiness or ignition.
2. Press the button.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
84
Controls Controls overview
3.
Press the button.
> "DIST": change the unit of measure-
ment for the range.
> "LANG": select the language of the dis-
play text.
> "CONSMP": change the unit of mea-
surement for the average fuel consump-
tion.
> "TEMP": change the unit of measure-
ment for the external temperature.
4. Highlight the desired menu item and press
the button.
5. Make the desired setting.
The settings of the units of measurement are
adopted for the displays in the radio and in the
instrument cluster and are stored in the remote
control currently in use.
Service requirements
The remaining driving distance and the date of
the next scheduled service are displayed briefly
immediately after you start the engine or switch
on the ignition.
The extent of service work required can
be read out from the remote control by
your dealership Service Advisor.<
For certain maintenance operations, you can
view the respective distance remaining or due
date individually in the instrument cluster.
1. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 57.
2. Push button 1 in the turn signal/high beam
lever up or down repeatedly until the appro-
priate symbol appears in the display,
accompanied by the words "SERVICE-
INFO".
3. Press button 2.
4. Use button 1 to scroll through the individual
service items.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
85
Controls overview
Controls
Possible displays
1 Button for selecting functions
2 Service requirements
3 Engine oil
4 Roadworthiness test
5 Front brake pads
6 Rear brake pads
7 Brake fluid
The sequence of displayed service items may
vary. The data for the next service appointment
is shown first.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
86
Controls Controls overview
Clock
Setting the time
To set the 12h/24h mode, refer to Formats and
units of measure on page 83.
1. Push button 1 in the turn signal/high beam
lever up or down repeatedly until the appro-
priate symbol appears in the display,
accompanied by the time and the word
"SET".
2. Press button 2.
3. Use button 1 to set the hours.
4. Press button 2 to confirm the entry.
5. Use button 1 to set the minutes.
6. Press button 2 to confirm the entry.
7. Press button 2.
The system accepts the new time.
In BMW Professional radio
1. Switch on radio readiness or ignition.
2. Press the button.
3.
Press the button.
4.
Press the button.
5. Select the desired category.
6. Adjust the settings and press the knob on
the right.
Date
Setting the date
To set the dd/mm or mm/dd date format, refer
to Formats and units of measure on page 83.
1. Push button 1 in the turn signal/high beam
lever up or down repeatedly until the appro-
priate symbol appears in the display,
accompanied by the date and the word
"SET".
2. Press button 2.
3. Use button 1 to set the day of the month.
4. Press button 2 to confirm the entry.
5. Set the month and the year in the same way.
6. Press button 2.
The system stores the new date.
In BMW Professional radio
1. Switch on radio readiness or ignition.
2. Press the button.
3.
Press the button.
4.
Press the button.
5. Select the desired category.
6. Adjust the settings and press the knob on
the right.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
87
Controls overview
Controls
Check Control
The concept
The Check Control monitors vehicle functions
and alerts you to any malfunctions in the sys-
tems monitored. This type of Check Control
message includes indicator and warning lamps
in the instrument cluster and, in some cases, an
acoustic signal.
Indicator and warning lamps can light up in a
variety of combinations and colors.
Several of the lamps are checked for proper
functioning and light up temporarily when the
engine is started or the ignition is switched on.
Indicates that Check Control messages have
been stored. These Check Control messages
can be viewed again later, refer to page 88.
What to do in case of a malfunction
The meaning of each lamp in the event of a mal-
function and tips on how to respond are listed
starting on page 220.
Hiding Check Control messages
Press the button on the turn signal/high beam
lever.
> Some Check Control messages are dis-
played continuously and remain visible until
the malfunction has been rectified. If several
malfunctions occur at once, the messages
are displayed consecutively.
These messages can be hidden for approx.
8 seconds. After this, they are displayed
again automatically.
> Other Check Control messages are hidden
automatically after approx. 20 seconds.
They are stored and can be displayed again
later.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
88
Controls Controls overview
Displaying stored Check Control
messages
1. Push button 1 in the turn signal/high beam
lever up or down repeatedly until the appro-
priate symbol appears in the display,
accompanied by the words "CHECK
CONTROL".
2. Press button 2.
If there are no Check Control messages,
then "CHECK OK" is displayed.
If a Check Control message has been
stored, the corresponding lamp lights up.
3. Push button 1 to check for other messages.
4. Press button 2.
The display again shows the outside tem-
perature and the time.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
89
Technology for driving comfort and safety
Controls
Technology for driving comfort and safety
Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and
optional equipment that is offered in the model
range is described. For this reason, descrip-
tions will be given of some equipment that may
not be available in a vehicle, for example due to
the special options or national-market version
selected. This also applies to safety related
functions and systems.
Park Distance Control PDC
The concept
The PDC assists you with maneuvering in tight
parking spaces. Acoustic signals warn you of
the presence of an object in front of or behind
your vehicle. To measure the distance, there
are four ultrasonic sensors in either bumper.
An acoustic warning sounds when an object is
less than approx. 24 in/60 cm from the front
sensors and rear corner sensors or less than
approx. 5 ft/1.50 m from the rear center sen-
sors.
PDC is a parking aid that can indicate
objects when they are approached
slowly, as is usually the case when parking.
Avoid approaching an object at high speed; oth-
erwise, physical circumstances may lead to the
system warning being issued too late.<
Switching on automatically
With the engine running or the ignition switched
on, the system is activated after approx. one
second when you shift into reverse or move the
automatic transmission selector lever to
position R. Wait this short period before driving.
Switching off automatically
After approx. 55 yd/50 m of driving or above
approx. 20 mph/approx. 30 km/h, the system
switches off and the LED goes out.
Switching on manually
When parking in the forward direction, the sen-
sors must be switched on manually to enable
them to signal an approach to an object in front
of or behind the vehicle.
Press the button; the LED lights up.
Switching off manually
Press the button again; the LED goes out.
Signal tones
When nearing an object, its position is indicated
correspondingly by an interval tone. For exam-
ple, if an object is detected behind the vehicle,
the signal tone sounds from the rear. As the dis-
tance between vehicle and object decreases,
the intervals between the tones become
shorter. If the distance to the nearest object
falls to below roughly 1 ft/30 cm, then a contin-
uous tone sounds.
An interval tone is interrupted after approx.
3seconds
> If you remain in front of an object that has
been detected by only one of the corner
sensors
> If you are driving parallel to a wall.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
90
Controls Technology for driving comfort and safety
Malfunction
The warning lamp lights up. PDC is
malfunctioning. Have the system
checked.
To avoid this problem, keep the sensors clean
and free of ice or snow in order to ensure that
they will continue to operate effectively. When
using a high-pressure cleaner, do not spray the
sensors for extended periods of time and only
from a distance of at least 1 ft/30 cm.
Manual operation
The LED above the button also flashes.
System limitations
Even with PDC, final responsibility for
estimating the distance between the
vehicle and any obstructions always remains
with the driver. Even when sensors are pro-
vided, there is a blind spot in which objects can
no longer be detected. The system is also sub-
ject to the physical limits that apply to all forms
of ultrasonic measurement, such as those
encountered with trailer towbars and hitches,
thin or wedge-shaped objects, etc. Low objects
that have already been displayed, e.g. curbs,
can disappear again from the detection area of
the sensors before or after a continuous tone
sounds. Higher, protruding objects, e.g. ledges,
cannot be detected. Therefore, always drive
cautiously; otherwise, there is a risk of personal
injury or property damage.
Loud sound sources outside or inside the car
can drown out the PDC signal. Therefore,
always drive cautiously; otherwise, there is a
risk of personal injury or property damage.<
Driving stability control
systems
Your BMW has a number of systems that help
to maintain the vehicle's stability even in
adverse driving conditions.
ABS Antilock Brake System
ABS prevents locking of the wheels during
braking. Safe steering response is maintained
even during full braking. Active safety is thus
increased.
The ABS is operational every time you start the
engine. Braking safely, refer to page 134.
Electronic brake-force distribution
EBV
The system controls the brake pressure in the
rear wheels to ensure stable braking behavior.
Dynamic Brake Control DBC
When you apply the brakes rapidly, this system
automatically produces the maximum braking
force boost and thus helps to achieve the short-
est possible braking distance during full brak-
ing. This system exploits all of the benefits pro-
vided by ABS.
Do not reduce the pressure on the brake for the
duration of the full braking application.
Dynamic Stability Control DSC
DSC prevents the driving wheels from losing
traction when you pull away from rest or accel-
erate. The system also recognizes unstable
driving conditions, for example if the rear of the
car is about to swerve or if momentum is acting
at an angle past the front wheels. In these
cases, DSC helps the vehicle maintain a safe
course within physical limits by reducing engine
output and through braking actions at the indi-
vidual wheels.
The laws of physics cannot be repealed,
even with DSC. An appropriate driving
style always remains the responsibility of the
driver. Therefore, do not reduce the additional
safety margin again by taking risks, as this could
result in an accident.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
91
Technology for driving comfort and safety
Controls
Deactivating DSC
Press the button for at least 3 seconds until the
indicator lamp for DSC OFF lights up and DSC
OFF is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Dynamic Traction Control DTC and DSC have
been simultaneously deactivated. Stabilizing
and drive-output promoting actions are no
longer executed.
In the same way as with a differential interlock,
even if DSC is deactivated, brake actions are
still performed to enhance drive output if the
drive wheels experience a significant loss of
traction.
To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC again
as soon as possible.
Activating DSC
Press the button again; the indicator lamp in the
instrument cluster goes out.
For better control
If the indicator lamp flashes: the DSC
controls the driving and braking forces.
If the indicator lamp lights up: DSC and
DTC have failed.
The indicator lamp lights up and
DSC OFF is displayed in the instrument
cluster: DSC is deactivated.
Dynamic Traction Control DTC
DTC is a version of DSC in which the drive out-
put is optimized for particular road conditions,
e.g. unplowed snow-covered roads. The sys-
tem assures the maximal drive output, but with
reduced driving stability. It is therefore neces-
sary to drive with appropriate caution.
You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC
under the following special circumstances:
> When driving uphill on snow-covered roads,
in slush or on unplowed, snow-covered
roads
> When rocking a stuck vehicle free or start-
ing off in deep snow or on loose ground
> When driving with snow chains
Activating DTC
Press the button; the indicator lamp for DSC
OFF lights up and TRACTION is displayed in
the instrument cluster.
For better control
If the indicator lamp flashes: DTC con-
trols the driving and braking forces.
If the indicator lamp lights up: DSC and
DTC have failed.
The indicator lamp lights up and
TRACTION is displayed in the instru-
ment cluster: DTC is activated.
Deactivating DTC
Press the button again; the indicator lamp in the
instrument cluster goes out.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
92
Controls Technology for driving comfort and safety
xDrive
xDrive is your BMW's four-wheel-drive system.
The combined efforts of xDrive and DSC help to
further optimize traction and driving dynamics.
The xDrive four-wheel-drive system distributes
driving power variably to the front and rear axles
depending on the driving situation and road
conditions.
Hill Descent Control HDC
HDC is a downhill driving assistant that controls
your speed on steep downhill gradients and
makes it even easier to control your BMW's
handling under these conditions. The vehicle
then moves slightly faster than double walking
speed without the driver needing to intervene.
HDC can be activated as long as you are driving
under approx. 20 mph or 35 km/h. When driving
downhill at a speed of under approx. 20 mph or
35 km/h, the vehicle's speed is automatically
reduced to slightly more than double walking
speed and maintained.
Increasing or decreasing speed
By accelerating or braking you can change this
speed within a range from approx. 3 to 15 mph,
approx. 5 to 25 km/h.
You can specify a target speed within the same
range by using the lever of the cruise control.
1 To increase speed
2 To decrease speed
Activating HDC
Press the button; the LED lights up.
When the vehicle is being braked automatically,
the LED flashes.
Deactivating HDC
Press the button again; the LED goes out.
HDC is automatically deactivated at speeds
greater than approx. 35 mph/60 km/h.
Using HDC
In cars with manual transmission:
Use HDC in lower gears and in reverse gear.
With automatic transmission:
You can use HDC in any drive position.
Displays in the instrument cluster
1 Display for target speed
2 HDC display
Malfunction
The HDC display disappears during HDC oper-
ation, or does not appear:
HDC is temporarily unavailable due to exces-
sive brake temperature, or DSC has failed.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
93
Technology for driving comfort and safety
Controls
Drive-off assistant
The drive-off assistant enables you to drive off
smoothly on uphill gradients. It is not necessary
to use the parking brake for this.
1. Hold the car in place by depressing the
brake.
2. Release the brake and drive off without
delay.
The drive-off assistant holds the car in
place for approx. 2 seconds after the
brake is released. Drive off without delay after
releasing the brake. Otherwise, the drive-off
assistant will no longer hold the car in place
after approx. 2 seconds and the car will start to
roll backwards.<
Flat Tire Monitor FTM
The concept
The system does not measure the actual infla-
tion pressure in the tires.
The system detects a pressure loss in a tire by
comparing the rotational speeds of the individ-
ual wheels while moving.
In the event of a pressure loss, the diameter and
therefore the rotational speed of the corre-
sponding wheel change. This is detected and
reported as a flat tire.
Functional requirement
The system must have been initialized while the
tire inflation pressure was correct; otherwise,
reliable signaling of a flat tire is not ensured.
Each time a tire inflation pressure has been cor-
rected or a wheel or tire has been changed,
reinitialize the system.
System limitations
Sudden serious tire damage caused by
external influences cannot be indicated in
advance.<
A natural, steady pressure loss in all four tires is
not detected. Therefore, check the tire inflation
pressure regularly.
In the following situations, the system could be
delayed or malfunction:
> System has not been initialized
> Driving on snowy or slippery road surface
> Performance-oriented style of driving: slip
in the drive wheels, high lateral acceleration
> Snow chains are attached
Initialization
The initialization process adopts the set infla-
tion tire pressures as reference values for the
detection of a flat tire. Initialization is started by
confirming the inflation pressures.
Do not initialize the system when driving with
snow chains.
For operating principle refer to page 82.
1. Start the engine immediately before pulling
away, but do not drive off yet.
2. Briefly press the button 1 in the turn signal/
high beam lever up or down repeatedly until
the corresponding symbol and "RESET"
appear.
3. Press button 2 to confirm your choice of the
Flat Tire Monitor.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
94
Controls Technology for driving comfort and safety
4. Press button 2 for approx. 5 seconds, until
the reading shown below is displayed:
5. Start driving.
Initialization is completed while the car is on
the move, without any feedback.
The initialization is completed during driv-
ing, which can be interrupted at any time.
When driving resumes, the initialization is con-
tinued automatically.<
Indication of a flat tire
The warning lamps light up in yellow
and red. In addition, an acoustic sig-
nal sounds. There is a flat tire or a
major loss in tire pressure.
1. Reduce speed and stop the vehicle with
caution. Avoid sudden braking and steering
maneuvers.
If the vehicle is not equipped with run-flat
tires, do not continue driving; continuing
to drive can result in serious accidents.<
When a flat tire is reported, the Dynamic Stabil-
ity Control DSC is activated.
Actions in the event of a flat tire
Run-flat tires
With a damaged tire, is possible to continue
driving at speeds of up to 50 mph/80 km/h.
When driving with a damaged tire:
1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu-
vers.
2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
3. At the next opportunity, check the inflation
pressure in all four tires.
If the inflation pressure in all four tires is cor-
rect, the Flat Tire Monitor might not have
been initialized. The system must then be
initialized.
Possible driving distance with complete loss of
tire pressure:
The distance it is possible to drive with a flat tire
depends on the load and the stress on the vehi-
cle while driving.
With an average load, it may be possible to drive
for approx. 50 miles/80 km.
When driving with damaged tires, the handling
characteristics change, e.g. the vehicle will skid
sooner when braking, braking distances will be
longer, or self-steering response will change.
Adapt your driving style accordingly. Avoid
turning abruptly and driving over obstacles
such as curbs, potholes, etc.
Since the possible driving distance depends to
a considerable degree on the strain exerted on
the vehicle while driving, it can be shorter or,
with a gentle driving style, can also be longer,
depending on the speed, road condition, out-
side temperature, vehicle load, etc.
Drive cautiously and do not exceed a
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
When there is a tire pressure loss, the handling
characteristics change, e.g. there will be
reduced directional stability during braking,
braking distances will be longer, and self-steer-
ing response will change.<
Vibrations or loud noises while driving can
indicate final failure of the tire. Reduce
your speed and bring the vehicle to a stop; oth-
erwise, tire components may become
detached, which could result in an accident. Do
not continue driving; instead, contact your
BMW center.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
95
Technology for driving comfort and safety
Controls
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM
The concept
Check the inflation pressure in the four installed
tires. The system notifies you if there is a signif-
icant loss of pressure in one or more tires.
Functional requirement
The system must have been reset while the
inflation pressure was correct; otherwise, reli-
able signaling of a flat tire is not ensured.
Always use wheels with TPM electronics to
ensure that the system will operate properly.
Each time a tire inflation pressure has been cor-
rected or a wheel or tire has been changed,
reset the system.
System limitations
Sudden serious tire damage caused by
external influences cannot be indicated in
advance.<
The system does not function correctly if it has
not been reset. For example, a flat tire may be
indicated even though the tire inflation pres-
sures are correct.
The system is inactive and cannot indicate a flat
tire:
> When a wheel without TPM electronics is
installed.
> Interference with TPM by other systems or
devices with the same transmission fre-
quency.
Resetting the system
Each time a tire inflation pressure has been cor-
rected or a wheel or tire has been changed,
reset the system.
For operating principle refer to page 82.
1. Start the engine, but do not start driving.
2. Briefly press the button 1 in the turn signal/
high beam lever up or down repeatedly until
the corresponding symbol and "RESET"
appear.
3. Press button 2 to confirm your choice of the
Tire Pressure Monitor. The following dis-
play appears:
4. Press button 2 for approx. 5 seconds, until
the small warning lamp lights up in yellow
and the following appears in the display:
5. Start driving.
After several minutes of driving time, the
adjusted inflation pressures will be adopted as
nominal values. The resetting process is com-
pleted automatically as you drive. The indicator
lamp goes out after the system reset is com-
pleted.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
96
Controls Technology for driving comfort and safety
The trip can be interrupted at any time. When
driving resumes, resetting continues automati-
cally.
Message for low tire inflation pressure
The warning lamps light up in yellow
and red. In addition, a signal sounds.
> There is a flat tire or substantial loss of tire
pressure in the indicated wheel.
> The system was not reset after a wheel
change and thus issues a warning based on
the inflation pressures initialized last.
Reduce speed and stop the vehicle with cau-
tion. Avoid sudden braking and steering
maneuvers.
If the vehicle is not equipped with run-flat
tires, do not continue driving; continuing
to drive can result in serious accidents.<
When a low tire pressure is reported, the
Dynamic Stability Control DSC is activated.
Actions in the event of a flat tire
Run-flat tires
You can continue driving with a damaged tire at
speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.
When driving with a damaged tire:
1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu-
vers.
2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
3. At the next opportunity, check the inflation
pressure in all four tires.
If the inflation pressure is correct in all four
tires, then the Tire Pressure Monitor may
not have been reset. The system must then
be reset.
Possible driving distance with complete loss of
tire inflation pressure:
The distance it is possible to drive with a flat tire
depends on the load and the stress on the vehi-
cle while driving.
With an average load, it may be possible to drive
for approx. 50 miles/80 km.
When driving with damaged tires, the handling
characteristics change, e.g. the vehicle will skid
sooner when braking, braking distances will be
longer, or self-steering response will change.
Adapt your driving style accordingly. Avoid
turning abruptly and driving over obstacles
such as curbs, potholes, etc.
Since the possible driving distance depends to
a considerable degree on the strain exerted on
the vehicle while driving, it can be shorter or,
with a gentle driving style, can also be longer,
depending on the speed, road condition, out-
side temperature, vehicle load, etc.
Drive cautiously and do not exceed a
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
When there is a tire pressure loss, the handling
characteristics change, e.g. there will be
reduced directional stability during braking,
braking distances will be longer, and self-steer-
ing response will change.<
Vibrations or loud noises while driving can
indicate complete failure of the tire.
Reduce your speed and bring the vehicle to a
stop; otherwise, tire components may become
detached, which could result in an accident. Do
not continue driving; instead, contact your
BMW center.<
Malfunction
The small warning lamp flashes in
yellow and then lights up continu-
ously; the large warning lamp lights
up in yellow. No punctures can be
detected.
Display in the following situations:
> A wheel without TPM electronics has been
installed:
Have it checked by your BMW center.
> Malfunction
Have the system checked.
> Tire Pressure Monitor was unable to com-
plete the resetting process. Reset the sys-
tem again.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
97
Technology for driving comfort and safety
Controls
The small warning lamp flashes in
yellow and then lights up continu-
ously; the large warning lamp lights
up in yellow. No punctures can be
detected.
Display in the following situations:
> Interference from systems or devices that
use the same radio frequency:
The system automatically becomes active
again when the vehicle moves out of the
interference zone.
Declaration according to
NHTSA/FMVSS 138
Tire Pressure Monitoring Systems
Each tire should be checked monthly when cold
and inflated to the inflation pressure recom-
mended by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. If
your vehicle has tires of a different size than the
size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire infla-
tion pressure label, you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for those tires. As
an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring sys-
tem, TPMS, that illuminates a low tire pressure
telltale when one or more of your tires are signif-
icantly underinflated. Accordingly, when the
low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should
stop and check your tires as soon as possible,
and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly underinflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and
tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s han-
dling and stopping ability. Please note that the
TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if underin-
flation has not reached the level at which the
TPMS low tire pressure telltale illuminates.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined
with the low tire pressure telltale. When the sys-
tem detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash
for approximately one minute and then remain
continuously lit. This sequence will continue
upon subsequent vehicle startups as long as
the malfunction exists. When the malfunction
indicator is illuminated, the system may not be
able to detect or signal low tire pressure as
intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a
variety of reasons, including the installation of
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning
properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more tires or
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow
the TPMS to continue to function properly.
Active steering
The concept
Active steering varies the turning angle of the
front wheels in relation to steering wheel move-
ments. It also varies the steering force required
to turn the wheels depending on the speed at
which you are driving.
When you are driving in the low speed range,
e.g. in a town or when parking, the steering
angle is increased, i.e. steering becomes very
direct and less effort is required to turn the
wheels. In the higher speed range, on the other
hand, the steering angle is reduced as the
speed increases. This improves the handling of
your BMW over the entire speed range.
In critical situations, the system can make tar-
geted corrections to the steering angle pro-
vided by the driver and thus stabilize the vehicle
before the driver intervenes. This stabilizing
intervention is simultaneously deactivated
when DSC is switched off, refer to page 91.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
98
Controls Technology for driving comfort and safety
Malfunction
The warning lamps light up. Active
steering is malfunctioning or is tem-
porarily deactivated. At low speeds,
greater steering wheel movements
are required, whereas at higher speeds the
vehicle reacts more sensitively to steering
wheel movements. The stability-enhancing
feature may also be deactivated. Drive cau-
tiously and think well ahead.
Deactivation
Active steering is deactivated to perform an ini-
tialization. A message indicates that the feature
is deactivated. Initialization may take several
minutes.
If the message does not disappear during the
current trip, have the system checked.
Defect
If there is a defect, a corresponding message
appears. Have the system checked.
Servotronic
The concept
The Servotronic varies the steering force
required to turn the wheels relative to the vehi-
cle speed.
At low speeds, the steering force is strongly
assisted, i.e. less force is needed for steering.
As the vehicle speed increases, the steering
assisting power is reduced.
Malfunction
The warning lamp lights up. Ser-
votronic is malfunctioning or has
failed. Steering response will be dif-
ferent. You can continue your journey, but mod-
erate your speed and exercise due caution.
Have the system checked as soon as possible.
Brake Force Display
On the left: normal braking.
On the right: sharp braking.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
99
Technology for driving comfort and safety
Controls
Airbags
The following airbags are located under the
marked covers:
1 Front airbags
2 Coupe: head airbags
3 Side airbags in the seat backrests
4 Convertible: knee airbags
Protective action
Observe the adjustment instructions on
page 42 to ensure the best possible per-
sonal protection.<
The front airbags help protect the driver and
front passenger by responding to frontal
impacts in which safety belts alone cannot pro-
vide adequate restraint. When needed, the
head and side airbags help provide protection in
the event of side impact. The relevant side air-
bag supports the side upper body area. The
head air bag supports the head.
The airbags have been designed to not be trig-
gered in every collision situation, e.g. not in
minor accidents or rear-end collisions.
Do not apply adhesive materials to the
cover panels of the airbags, cover them or
modify them in any other way.
Keep the dashboard and windows on the front
passenger side clear, i.e. do not cover with
adhesive labels or coverings, and do not attach
holders such as for navigation instruments or
mobile phones.
Do not attach seat covers, cushions or other
objects not specifically approved for seats with
integral side airbags to the front seats. Do not
hang items of clothing such as coats or jackets
over the backrests. Do not attempt to remove
the airbag retention system from the vehicle. Do
not modify the individual components of the
system or its wiring in any way. This includes
the upholstered covers on the steering wheel,
instrument panel, seats and roof posts, as well
as the sides of the roof lining. Do not attempt to
remove or dismantle the steering wheel.
Do not touch the individual components imme-
diately after the system has been triggered,
because there is a danger of burns.
In the event of faults, immobilization, or after the
airbag system has been triggered, have the
testing, repair, or disassembly and scrapping of
gas generators performed only by your BMW
center or a workshop that has the required
explosives licenses. Unprofessional attempts to
work on the system could lead to failure in an
emergency or to undesired airbag activation,
either of which could result in personal injury.<
Warning notices and information about the air-
bags can also be found on the sun visors.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
100
Controls Technology for driving comfort and safety
Automatic deactivation of the front
passenger airbags
An analysis of the impression in the front pas-
senger seat cushion determines whether and
how the seat is occupied. The front and side air-
bags for the front passenger are activated or
deactivated by the system accordingly.
The indicator lamp above the interior
rearview mirror shows the current status
of the front passenger airbags, deactivated or
activated, refer to Status of front passenger air-
bags below.<
Before transporting a child on the front
passenger seat, read the safety precau-
tions and handling instructions under Trans-
porting children safely, refer to page 53.
The front and side airbags can also be deacti-
vated by adolescents and adults sitting in cer-
tain positions; the indicator lamp for the front
passenger airbags lights up. In such cases, the
passenger should change his or her sitting
position so that the front passenger airbags are
activated and the indicator lamp goes out. If the
desired airbag status cannot be achieved by
changing the sitting position, transport the rele-
vant passenger on a rear seat. Do not attach
seat covers, seat cushion padding, ball mats or
other items to the front passenger seat unless
they are specifically recommended by BMW.
Do not place any items under the seat which
could press against the seat from below. Other-
wise, a correct analysis of the seat cushion is
not ensured.<
Status of front passenger airbags
The indicator lamp for the front passenger air-
bags shows the functional status of the front
passenger front and side airbags in accordance
with whether and how the front passenger seat
is occupied. The indicator lamp shows whether
the front passenger airbags are activated or
deactivated.
> The indicator lamp lights up when a child in
a specially designated child restraint sys-
tem is detected, as intended, on the seat.
The front and side airbags for the front pas-
senger are not activated.
Most child seats are detected by the
system, This particularly applies to
child seats that were required by NHTSA at
the time of manufacture of the vehicle. After
mounting a child seat, ensure that the indi-
cator lamp for the front passenger airbag is
lit. It indicates that the child seat has been
detected and that the front passenger air-
bags are deactivated.<
> The indicator lamp does not light up as long
as a person of sufficient size and in a correct
sitting position is detected on the seat.
The front and side airbags for the front pas-
senger are activated.
> The indicator lamp does not light up if the
seat is empty.
The front and side airbags for the front pas-
senger are not activated.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
101
Technology for driving comfort and safety
Controls
Operational readiness of airbag system
As of radio readiness, refer to page 57, the
warning lamp lights up briefly to indicate that
the entire airbag system and the belt tensioners
are operational.
Airbag system malfunction
> Warning lamp does not light up at radio
readiness or beyond.
> Warning lamp remains permanently on.
In the event of a fault in the airbag system,
have it checked without delay; otherwise,
there is the risk that the system will not function
as intended even if a sufficiently severe acci-
dent occurs.<
Convertible: rollover
protection system
The rollover protection system is activated
automatically in the event of an accident, a crit-
ical driving situation, an extreme tilt in the car's
longitudinal axis or upon loss of ground contact.
The protection bars behind the rear head
restraints deploy within fractions of a second.
As a supplementary system to the reinforced
windshield frame, the rollover protection sys-
tem ensures that the necessary headroom is
maintained for all vehicle occupants.
Always keep the area of movement of the
rollover protection system clear.
In minor accidents, you are protected by the
fastened safety belt and, depending on acci-
dent severity, by the safety belt tensioner and
multi-phase airbag retention system.<
Resetting
If the rollover protection system was not
impacted after being automatically activated, it
can be reset by lowering the protection bars to
their original positions. This does not require
tools.
1. Push the locking lever to one side and hold
it there.
2. Push the protection bar halfway down from
above.
3. Release the locking lever.
4. Push the protection bar down until it snaps
into place.
5. Repeat the procedure for the other protec-
tion bar.
Have the rollover protection system checked
after an unexpected activation.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
102
Controls Technology for driving comfort and safety
Never move the retractable hardtop when
the rollover protection system is in the
activated position.
Do not make any modifications to the individual
components of the rollover protection system
or its cabling.
Work on the rollover protection system should
be performed only by your BMW center.
Incorrectly performed work on the system may
lead to system failure or incorrect operation.
To check the system and ensure flawless long-
term operation, always observe the service
intervals, refer to page 84.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
103
Lamps
Controls
Lamps
Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and
optional equipment that is offered in the model
range is described. For this reason, descrip-
tions will be given of some equipment that may
not be available in a vehicle, for example due to
the special options or national-market version
selected. This also applies to safety related
functions and systems.
At a glance
0 Lamps off,
daytime running lights
1 Parking lamps and daytime running lights
2 Low beams,
welcome lamps
3 Automatic headlamp control, daytime run-
ning lights, welcome lamps, High-beam
Assistant, and Adaptive Light Control
Parking lamps/low beams,
automatic headlamp control
General information
When the driver's door is opened with ignition
switched off, then the exterior lighting is auto-
matically switched off if the light switch is in
position 0, 2, or 3.
Parking lamps
In switch position 1, the front, rear and side
vehicle lighting is switched on. You can use the
parking lamps for parking.
The parking lamps will discharge the bat-
tery. Therefore, do not leave them on for
unduly long periods of time; otherwise, the bat-
tery might not have enough power to start the
engine. It is preferable to switch on the left-
hand or right-hand roadside parking lamps,
refer to page 105.<
Low beams
The low beams light up when the light switch is
in position 2 and the ignition is on.
Automatic headlamp control
When the switch is in position 3, the low beams
are switched on and off automatically depend-
ing on ambient lighting conditions, e.g. in a tun-
nel, in twilight, or if there is precipitation. The
Adaptive Light Control is active. The LED next
to the symbol is illuminated when the low
beams are on. You can also activate the daytime
running lights, refer to page 104. In the situa-
tions described above, the lamps then automat-
ically switch from daytime running lights to low
beams.
The headlamps may also come on when the
sun is sitting low on a blue sky.
The low beams remain switched on inde-
pendent of the ambient lighting condi-
tions when you switch on the fog lamps.<
The automatic headlamp control cannot
serve as a substitute for your personal
judgment in determining when the lamps
should be switched on in response to ambient
lighting conditions. For example, the system
cannot detect fog or hazy weather. To avoid
safety risks, you should always switch on the
low-beam headlamps manually under these
conditions.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
104
Controls Lamps
Welcome lamps
If you leave the light switch in position 2 or 3
when you park the car, the parking lamps and
the interior lamps light up briefly when you
unlock the vehicle.
Pathway lighting
If the headlamp flasher is activated after switch-
ing off the ignition with the lamps switched off,
the low beams come on and remain on for a cer-
tain time.
Setting duration
For operating principle, refer to page 82.
1. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 57.
2. Briefly press button 1 in the turn signal/high
beam lever up or down repeatedly until the
symbol appears in the display, accompa-
nied by the word "SET".
3. Press button 2.
4. Briefly press button 1 in the turn signal/high
beam lever down repeatedly until the sym-
bol appears in the display.
5. Press button 2.
6. Use button 1 to select:
>
The function is deactivated.
> ...
Select the appropriate duration, e.g.
40 seconds.
7. Press button 2.
The setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Daytime running lights
The daytime running lights light up in switch
position 0, 1 and 3. They are less powerful than
the low beams.
The tail lamps may also light up.
Activating/deactivating daytime
running lights
For operating principle, refer to page 82.
1. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 57.
2. Briefly press button 1 in the turn signal/high
beam lever up or down repeatedly until the
symbol appears in the display, accompa-
nied by the word "SET".
3. Press button 2.
4. Briefly press button 1 in the turn signal/high
beam lever down repeatedly until the sym-
bol appears in the display.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
105
Lamps
Controls
5. Press button 2.
6. Use button 1 to select:
>
Daytime running lights activated.
>
Daytime running lights deactivated.
7. Press button 2.
The setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Adaptive Light Control
The concept
Adaptive Light Control is a variable headlamp
control system that enables better illumination
of the road surface. Depending on the steering
angle and other parameters, the light from the
headlamp follows the course of the road.
In tight curves at speeds up to 40 mph/70 km/h,
e.g. on mountainous roads or when turning, an
additional, corner-illuminating lamp is switched
on that lights up the inside area of the curve.
Activating Adaptive Light Control
With the ignition switched on, turn the light
switch to position 3, refer to page 103.
The corner-illuminating lamp is switched on
automatically, depending on the steering wheel
angle or turn signal indicator.
Standstill function: to avoid blinding oncoming
traffic, the Adaptive Light Control directs light
toward the front passenger side when the vehi-
cle is at a standstill.
When you are reversing, only the corner-illumi-
nating lamps are switched on and active on
both sides.
Malfunction
The warning lamp lights up. The
Adaptive Light Control is malfunc-
tioning or failed. Have the system
checked as soon as possible.
High beams/roadside parking
lamps
1 High beams
2 Headlamp flasher
3 Roadside parking lamps
Roadside parking lamps, left or right
There is an additional option of switching on the
lamps on the side of the car facing the road
when parked.
Switching on
After parking the vehicle, press the lever up or
down beyond the pressure point for a longer
period, arrow 3.
The roadside parking lamps drain the bat-
tery. Therefore, do not leave them on for
unduly long periods of time; otherwise, the bat-
tery might not have enough power to start the
engine.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
106
Controls Lamps
Switching off
Press the lever in the opposite direction to the
pressure point, arrow 3.
High-beam Assistant
The concept
This system automatically switches the high
beams on and off. The procedure is controlled
by a sensor on the front of the interior rearview
mirror. The assistant ensures that the high
beams are switched on whenever the traffic sit-
uation allows. It handles this task for you and
gives you the benefit of the best possible view.
You can intervene at any time and switch the
high beams on and off as usual.
Activating the system
1. Turn the light switch to position 3, refer to
page 103.
2. With the low beams switched on, briefly
push the turn signal/high beam lever in the
direction of the high beam.
The indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up when the high beams
are activated. The system automati-
cally switches from high beams to low beams
and vice versa in response to oncoming traffic,
traffic ahead of you, and adequate ambient
lighting, e.g. on city streets.
Switching the high beams on and off
manually
Whenever you wish, or when the situation
requires, you can intervene:
> If the High-beam Assistant switches on the
high beams, but you would like to drive with
the low beams, simply switch off the high
beams using the turn signal/high beam
lever. This deactivates the High-beam
Assistant.
To reactivate the system, briefly push the
turn signal/high beam lever toward the high
beams again.
> If the High-beam Assistant switches on the
low beams, but you would like to drive with
the high beams, switch on the high beams
as usual. This deactivates the system and
the high beams need to be switched off
manually, if necessary.
To reactivate the system, briefly push the
turn signal/high beam lever toward the high
beams again.
> Use the headlamp flasher as usual with the
low beams switched on.
System limitations
The High-beam Assistant cannot serve
as a substitute for the driver's personal
judgment of when to use the high beams.
Therefore, manually switch off the high beams
in situations where this is required to avoid a
safety risk.<
The system is not fully functional in situations
such as the following, and driver intervention
may be necessary:
> In very unfavorable weather conditions,
such as fog or heavy precipitation
> In detecting poorly-lit road users, such as
pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders and
wagons; when driving close to train or ship
traffic; and at animal crossings
> In tight curves, on hilltops or in depressions,
in cross traffic or half-obscured oncoming
traffic on highways
> In poorly lit towns and cities and in the pres-
ence of highly reflective signs
> At low speeds
> When the windshield in front of the interior
rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov-
ered with stickers, etc.
> If the sensor is dirty. Clean the sensor on
the front of the interior rearview mirror using
a cloth moistened with a small amount of
glass cleaner.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
107
Lamps
Controls
Fog lamps
The parking lamps or low beams must
be switched on for the fog lamps to
operate. The green indicator lamp in
the instrument cluster lights up whenever the
fog lamps are on.
The fog lamps are switched off while you acti-
vate the headlamp flasher or switch on the high
beams.
If the automatic headlamp control is acti-
vated, the low beams will come on auto-
matically when you switch on the fog lamps.<
Instrument lighting
You can adjust the brightness of the instrument
lighting only when the parking lamps or the low
beams are switched on.
1. Push button 1 up or down repeatedly until
the appropriate symbol appears in the dis-
play, accompanied by the brightness set-
ting and scale the word "SET".
2. Press button 2.
3. Push button 1 up or down to select the
desired brightness level.
4. Press button 2.
The display again shows the outside tem-
perature and the time.
Interior lamps
The interior lamps, the footwell lamps, entry
lamps, cargo area lamp, and courtesy lamps are
controlled automatically.
The LEDs for the courtesy lamps are set in the
door handles and illuminate the ground in front
of the doors.
To reduce the drain on the battery, a few
minutes after the radio readiness is
switched off, refer to Start/Stop button on
page 57, all lights in the vehicle's passenger
compartment are switched off.<
Switching interior lamps on/off
manually
Interior lamps, front and rear:
To switch on and off, press the button.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
108
Controls Lamps
To switch off the interior lamps, footwell lamps,
entry lamps, and courtesy lamps permanently,
press the button for the front interior lamps for
about 3 seconds.
Reading lamps
There are reading lamps at the front and rear,
next to the interior lights. To switch on and off,
press the button.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
109
Climate
Controls
Climate
Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and
optional equipment that is offered in the model
range is described. For this reason, descrip-
tions will be given of some equipment that may
not be available in a vehicle, for example due to
the special options or national-market version
selected. This also applies to safety related
functions and systems.
Overview
Equipment versions
Depending on the equipment version, your car
has an air conditioner or an automatic climate
control system.
1 Air conditioner 110
2 Automatic climate control 112
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
110
Controls Climate
Air vents
3 Airflow directed toward the windshield and
side windows
4 Air to the upper body area.
The thumbwheels smoothly open and close
the air supply. The levers alter the direction
of the airflow. For further details on draft-
free ventilation, refer to page 115.
5 Air to the footwell
Air conditioner
1 Air distribution
2 Recirculated air mode
3 Air volume
4 Cooling function
5 Temperature
6 Rear window defroster
Air distribution
Direct the flow of air to the
windows , to the upper body
area or to the footwell . Inter-
mediate settings are possible. In
the center position between and , the air
is also deflected at toward the windows.
Recirculated air mode
If the air outside the car has an
unpleasant odor or contains pollut-
ants, shut off the supply to the
interior of the car temporarily. The
system then recirculates the air currently within
the vehicle.
You can also activate/deactivate the recircu-
lated air mode by means of a button on the
steering wheel, refer to page 11.
If the windows fog in recirculated air
mode, switch off the recirculated air
mode and increase the air volume if necessary.
The recirculated air mode should not be used
over an extended period of time; otherwise, the
air quality in the passenger compartment will
deteriorate continuously.<
Air volume
Turn to adjust the air volume. The
higher the volume, the more effec-
tive the heating or cooling will be.
The air flow rate is lowered or
switched off entirely to reduce the drain on the
battery.
Switching the system on/off
Set any desired air volume to switch on the air
conditioner.
Turn the air volume rotary switch to 0. The
blower and air conditioner are completely
switched off and the air supply is cut off.
The outside air supply is blocked when
the air conditioner is switched off. If the air
quality deteriorates or the window fogs over,
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
111
Climate
Controls
switch the system back on and increase the air
volume.<
Switching cooling function on/off
The cooling function cools and
dehumidifies the incoming air
before reheating it according to the
temperature setting. This function
is only available while the engine is running.
The cooling function helps prevent condensa-
tion on the windows or removes it quickly.
The cooling effect can be intensified by activat-
ing recirculated air mode.
Depending on the weather, the windshield may
fog over briefly when the engine is started.
Rear window defroster
The defroster is switched off auto-
matically after a certain time.
Depending on your vehicle's
equipment, the upper wires serve
as an antenna and are not part of the rear win-
dow defroster.
Temperature
To increase the temperature, turn
the rotary switch clockwise
towards red.
For a lower temperature, turn the
rotary switch counterclockwise towards blue.
Defrosting windows and removing
condensation
1. Air distribution 1 in position .
2. Deactivate recirculated air mode 2.
3. Air volume control 3 all the way to the right.
4. Switch on cooling function 4.
5. Temperature 5 to the right, red.
6. Switch on rear window defroster 6 to
defrost the rear window .
Ventilation
1 Use the thumbwheels to smoothly open
and close the air vents
2 Use the levers to change the direction of the
airflow
Ventilation for cooling
Adjust the vent outlets to direct the flow of cool
air in your direction, e.g. if it has become too hot
in the car.
Draft-free ventilation
Adjust the vents to let the air flow past you.
Microfilter
The microfilter removes dust and pollen from
the incoming air. Your BMW center replaces the
microfilter during routine maintenance.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
112
Controls Climate
Automatic climate control
1 Seat heating, left side 48
2 Air distribution, manual
3 Temperature, left side
4 Maximum cooling
5 AUTO program
6 Air volume, manual adjustment; AUTO
intensity
7 Automatic recirculated air control AUC/
Recirculated air mode
8 ALL program
9 Temperature, right side
10 Defrosting windows and removing conden-
sation
11 Switching cooling function on/off manually
12 Rear window defroster
13 Seat heating, right side 48
14 Interior temperature sensor, please keep
clear
Comfortable interior climate
AUTO program 5 offers the ideal air distribution
and air volume for almost all conditions, refer to
AUTO program below. All you need to do is
select an interior temperature which is comfort-
able for you.
The following sections inform you in detail
about how to adjust the settings.
Most settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use, refer also to Personal Profile
settings on page 25.
Adjusting air distribution manually
The air distribution can be
switched on and off manually. The
air is directed to the windshield, to
the upper body area and to the
footwell.
The automatic air distribution can be switched
back on by pressing the AUTO button. The
cooling function is switched on automatically
and the manual air distribution setting is
cleared.
Temperature
Turn to set the desired tempera-
ture.
The automatic climate control
achieves this temperature as
quickly as possible regardless of the season,
using maximum cooling or heating power if nec-
essary, and then maintains it.
Avoid rapid switching between different tem-
perature settings. The automatic climate con-
trol will not have sufficient time to adjust the set
temperature.
Maximum heating power can be obtained with
the highest setting, regardless of the outside
temperature.
The system cools steadily in the lowest setting,
regardless of the outside temperature.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
113
Climate
Controls
Maximum cooling
Press the button.
The system is set to the lowest
temperature, maximum air volume
and recirculated air mode.
Air flows out of the vent outlets for the upper
body region. Open them for this purpose.
Air is cooled as quickly as possible:
> Above an outside temperature of approx.
327/06
> When the engine is running
AUTO program
Press the button.
Air volume, air distribution and
temperature are controlled auto-
matically.
Depending on the selected temperature, AUTO
intensity and outside influences, the air is
directed toward the windshield, the side win-
dows, the upper body and the footwell.
Pressing the AUTO button automatically
switches on the cooling function.
At the same time, a condensation sensor con-
trols the program so as to prevent window con-
densation as much as possible.
The program is switched off when the air distri-
bution is set manually or the button is pressed
again.
Intensity of the AUTO program
With the AUTO program switched on, auto-
matic control of the air volume and air distribu-
tion can be adjusted:
Press the left side of the button to
reduce the intensity. Press the
right side of the button to
increase it.
The selected intensity is shown on the display
of the automatic climate control.
Convertible program
The Convertible program is active when the
hardtop is open. In the Convertible program, the
automatic climate control is optimized for driv-
ing with the hardtop open. In addition, the air
volume is increased as vehicle speed increases.
The effectiveness of the Convertible pro-
gram can be enhanced considerably by
installing the wind deflector.<
Adjusting air volume manually
To be able to manually adjust the air volume,
switch off the AUTO program first.
Press the left side of the button to
reduce the air volume. Press the
right side of the button to
increase it.
The air flow rate is lowered or switched off
entirely to reduce the drain on the battery. The
display remains the same.
Automatic recirculated air control
AUC/Recirculated air mode
You can respond to unpleasant odors or pollut-
ants in the immediate environment by tempo-
rarily suspending the supply of outside air. The
system then recirculates the air currently within
the vehicle.
Press the button repeatedly to
select an operating mode:
> LED off: outside air flows in continuously.
> Left-hand LED on, AUC mode: a sensor
detects pollutants in the outside air and
controls the shut-off automatically.
> Right-hand LED on, recirculated air mode:
the supply of outside air is permanently
shut off. If the windows fog over, switch off
recirculated air mode and increase the air
volume, if necessary. Make sure that air can
flow onto the windshield.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
114
Controls Climate
The recirculated air mode should not be
used over an extended period of time;
otherwise, the air quality inside the car will dete-
riorate continuously.<
Via the button on the steering wheel
You can switch quickly between the recircu-
lated air mode and the previous mode using a
button on the steering wheel, refer to page 11.
ALL program
Press the button.
The current temperature setting
on the driver's side is transferred to
the front passenger side.
If the temperature setting on the driver's side is
changed, the temperature on the front passen-
ger side is changed as well.
The program is switched off when the setting is
adjusted on the front passenger side or the but-
ton is pressed again.
Defrosting windows and removing
condensation
Press the button.
Quickly removes ice and conden-
sation from the windshield and
front side windows.
For this purpose, also switch on the cooling
function.
Switching cooling function on/off
The passenger compartment can only be
cooled while the engine is running.
Press the button.
The air is cooled and dehumidified
and – depending on the tempera-
ture setting – warmed again.
Depending on the weather, the windshield may
fog up briefly when the engine is started.
Pressing the AUTO button automatically
switches on the cooling function.
Rear window defroster
Press the button.
The defroster is switched off auto-
matically after a certain time.
Depending on your vehicle's equipment, the
upper wires serve as an antenna and are not
part of the rear window defroster.
Switching the system on/off
Switching off
With the blower at its lowest set-
ting, press the left side of the but-
ton to switch off the automatic cli-
mate control.
All displays are cleared except for the rear win-
dow defroster if it is switched on.
The outside air supply is blocked when
the automatic climate control is switched
off. If the air quality deteriorates or the window
fogs over, switch the system back on and
increase the air volume.<
Switching on
Press any button except the ALL or the rear
window defroster button to reactivate the auto-
matic climate control.
Ventilation
1 Use the thumbwheels to smoothly open
and close the air vents
2 Use the levers to change the direction of the
airflow
3 Thumbwheel for more or less cool air from
the vents for the upper body area
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
115
Climate
Controls
Ventilation for cooling
Adjust the vent outlets to direct the flow of cool
air in your direction, e.g. if it has become too hot
in the car.
Draft-free ventilation
Set the vent outlets so that the air flows past
you and not straight at you.
Ventilation in the rear
1 Use the thumbwheel to adjust the tempera-
ture:
> Turn toward blue: colder
> Turn toward red: warmer
2 Use the thumbwheel to smoothly open and
close the air vents
3 Use the lever to change the direction of the
airflow
Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter
The microfilter traps dust and pollen in the
incoming air. The activated-charcoal filter pro-
vides additional protection by filtering gaseous
pollutants from the outside air. Your BMW cen-
ter replaces this combined filter during routine
maintenance.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
116
Controls Practical interior accessories
Practical interior accessories
Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and
optional equipment that is offered in the model
range is described. For this reason, descrip-
tions will be given of some equipment that may
not be available in a vehicle, for example due to
the special options or national-market version
selected. This also applies to safety related
functions and systems.
Integrated universal remote
control
The concept
The Integrated universal remote control can be
used to operate up to 3 functions of remote-
controlled devices such as garage door open-
ers or lighting systems. The Integrated univer-
sal remote control thus replaces as many as
three different hand-held transmitters. To oper-
ate them, the buttons on the interior rearview
mirror must be programmed with the desired
functions. Programming requires the hand-held
transmitter for the respective device.
To prevent possible damage or injury,
before programming or using the inte-
grated universal remote control to operate a
device, always inspect the immediate area to
make certain that no people, animals or objects
are within the pivoting or travel range of the
device being operated.
Also follow the safety instructions supplied with
the hand-held transmitter.<
For security reasons, make sure to delete the
stored functions before selling the vehicle, refer
to page 118.
Compatibility
If this symbol appears on the package
or in the instructions supplied with the
device to be operated, you can gener-
ally assume that the device is compatible with
the Integrated universal remote control.
For additional questions, please consult:
> Your BMW center.
> www.homelink.com on the Internet.
HomeLink is a registered trademark of Johnson
Controls, Inc.
Controls on the interior rearview mirror
1 LED
2 Buttons
3 Hand-held transmitter, required for pro-
gramming.
Programming
General information
1. Switch on the ignition.
2. Initial operation:
Simultaneously hold down the right and left
buttons on the inside mirror for approx.
20 seconds until the LED on the inside mir-
ror flashes.
All programs of the buttons on the rearview
mirror are deleted.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
117
Practical interior accessories
Controls
3. Hold the hand-held transmitter of the
device to be controlled approx. 1 in/2.5 cm
to 3 in/8 cm away from the buttons on the
inside mirror.
The required distance depends on the
hand-held transmitter.
4. Simultaneously press and hold the button
of the desired function on the hand-held
transmitter and the button to be pro-
grammed on the inside mirror.
The LED on the inside mirror will flash
slowly at first.
5. As soon as the LED flashes rapidly, release
both buttons. The rapid flashing indicates
that the button on the inside mirror has
been programmed.
If the LED does not flash rapidly within
60 seconds, change the distance between
the inside mirror and the hand-held trans-
mitter and repeat this step. This may
require several attempts. Allow at least
15 seconds between attempts.
6. To program additional functions on the
other buttons of the inside mirror, repeat
steps 3 through 5.
The buttons on the inside mirror can be used to
operate the devices if the ignition is switched
on.
Special procedure with alternating-
code systems
If the device fails to function even after repeated
programming, check whether the device to be
controlled uses an alternating-code system.
To do so, either read the instructions for the
device or hold down the programmed button on
the inside mirror. If the LED on the inside mirror
flashes quickly at first and then remains lit for
2 seconds, the device uses an alternating-code
system. The LED flashes and lights up repeat-
edly for approx. 20 seconds.
In devices with an alternating-code system, the
Integrated universal remote control and the
device must also be synchronized.
For information about synchronizing can also
be found in the operating instructions for the
device to be set.
Programming will be easier with the aid of a
second person.
Synchronizing:
1. Park your vehicle within the range of the
remote-controlled device.
2. Program the Integrated universal remote
control as described above.
3. Locate and press the synchronization but-
ton on the device to be set. You have
approx. 30 seconds to perform the next
step.
4. Hold down the programmed button on the
inside mirror for approx. 3 seconds and then
release it. Repeat this operation, up to three
times if necessary, to complete the syn-
chronization. If the synchronization has
succeeded, the programmed function is
performed.
Reprogramming individual buttons
1. Switch on the ignition.
2. Hold the hand-held transmitter of the
device to be controlled approx. 1 in/2.5 cm
bis 3 in/8 cm away from the buttons on the
inside mirror.
The required distance depends on the
hand-held transmitter.
3. Press the desired button on the inside mir-
ror.
4. If the LED on the inside mirror flashes
slowly after approx. 20 seconds, press the
transmit key of the hand-held transmitter.
5. As soon as the LED flashes rapidly, release
both buttons.
If the LED does not flash rapidly after
approx. 60 seconds, alter the distance and
repeat the step.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
118
Controls Practical interior accessories
Canada: if the LED does not flash rapidly
after approx. 60 seconds, alter the distance
and repeat this step or, if the programming
by means of the hand-held transmitter was
interrupted, hold down the button on the
inside mirror and then press and release the
button on the hand-held transmitter several
times, holding it down for 2 seconds each
time.
Operation
To prevent possible damage or injury,
before programming or using the inte-
grated universal remote control to operate a
device, always inspect the immediate area to
make certain that no people, animals or objects
are within the pivoting or travel range of the
device being operated.
Also follow the safety instructions supplied with
the hand-held transmitter.<
The button on the inside mirror can be used to
operate the device, for example the garage
door, if the engine is running or the ignition is
switched on. To do so, within the reception
range of the device, press the button of the
device until the function is triggered. The LED
on the inside mirror remains lit during transmis-
sion of the radio signal.
Deleting stored functions
Simultaneously hold down the right and left
buttons on the inside mirror for approx. 20 sec-
onds until the LED on the inside mirror flashes
rapidly. All stored functions are deleted. The
functions cannot be deleted individually.
Digital compass
1 Adjustment button
2 Display
The display shows you the main or secondary
compass direction in which you are driving.
Operating principle
You can call up various functions by pressing
the adjustment button with a pointed object
such as a pen or similar item. The following
adjustment options are displayed one after the
other, depending on how long you keep the
adjustment button pressed:
> Press briefly: switch display on/off
> 3 to 6 seconds: set compass zone
> 6 to 9 seconds: calibrate compass
> 9 to 12 seconds: set left-hand/right-hand
steering
> 12 to 15 seconds: set the language
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
119
Practical interior accessories
Controls
Setting compass zones
Set the compass zone corresponding to your
vehicle's geographic location so that the com-
pass can function correctly; refer to the world
map with compass zones.
To set the compass zone, press the adjustment
button for approx. 3-4 seconds. The number of
the compass zone set is shown in the display.
To change the zone setting, briefly press the
adjustment button repeatedly until the display
shows the number of the compass zone corre-
sponding to your current location.
The compass is operational again after approx.
10 seconds.
Calibrating the digital compass
The digital compass must be calibrated in the
following situations:
> An incorrect compass direction is shown.
> The compass direction shown does not
change although the direction of travel
does.
> Not all compass directions are shown.
Procedure
1. Make sure that no large metal objects or
overhead power lines are in the vicinity of
your vehicle and that you have enough
space to drive in a circle.
2. Set the currently valid compass zone.
3. Convertible: ensure that the retractable
hardtop is fully closed.
4. Press the adjustment button for approx.
6-7 seconds to call up C. Then drive in at
least one full circle at a speed of no more
than 4 mph/7 km/h.
If calibration is successful, the display
changes from C to a compass direction.
5. Convertible: open the retractable hardtop
fully and repeat step 4.
Setting right-hand/left-hand steering
Your digital compass is factory-set to right-
hand or left-hand steering, in accordance with
your vehicle.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
120
Controls Practical interior accessories
Set the language
You can set the language of the display:
Press the adjustment button for approx.
12-13 seconds. Press the adjustment button
again briefly to switch between English "E" and
German "O".
The setting is automatically saved after approx.
10 seconds.
Coupe:
Roller sunblinds
Briefly press the button in the center console to
raise or lower the roller sunblind.
Glove compartment
Opening
Pull the handle.
The light in the glove compartment comes on.
To prevent injury in the event of an acci-
dent while the vehicle is being driven,
close the glove compartment immediately after
use.<
Closing
Fold the cover up.
Locking
To lock the glove compartment, use the inte-
grated key of the remote control, refer to
page 24.
Convertible: when you lock the vehicle from the
outside, the glove compartment is locked as
well.
Center armrest
Storage compartment
The center armrest between the front seats
contains either a compartment or the cover for
the snap-in adapter, depending on the equip-
ment version.
Opening
Press the button, see arrow.
Adjustments
Slide the center armrest on the driver's side into
the desired position.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
121
Practical interior accessories
Controls
Connection for external audio device
You can connect an external audio device such
as a CD or MP3 player and play audio tracks
over the vehicle speakers:
> AUX-IN port, refer to page 151
> USB audio interface, refer to page 151.
Storage compartments inside
the vehicle
Depending on your vehicle's equipment, you
will find compartments beside the steering col-
umn, in the front doors and in the center con-
sole.
Nets are provided on the front-seat backrests.
Do not place unsecured objects in them;
otherwise, they could endanger the car's
occupants, e.g. in the event of braking or eva-
sive maneuvers.<
Do not place non-slip pads, e.g. anti-slip
mats, on the dashboard; the materials of
these pads may damage it.<
Storage compartments in the rear
console
Depending on your vehicle's equipment ver-
sion, the following storage compartments can
be found in the rear console:
> Storage tray
> Storage compartment with cover
> Cupholders
Coupe: clothes hooks
Press the upper edge to flip open.
Items of clothing hung from the hooks
must not obstruct the driver's view. Do
not hang heavy objects from the hooks; other-
wise, they could endanger the car's occupants,
e.g. in case of heavy braking or sudden swerv-
ing.<
Cupholders
Use lightweight and shatterproof contain-
ers and do not transport hot beverages;
otherwise, there is an increased risk of injury in
the event of the accident. Do not force contain-
ers that are too large into the cupholders; other-
wise, damage could result.<
Front
Opening
Briefly press the center of the cover.
Closing
Briefly press the cover in the center and push in
the cupholder.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
122
Controls Practical interior accessories
Coupe: rear
There are two additional cupholders in the rear
center armrest.
Press the front of the armrest.
Convertible: rear
There are two additional cupholders in the rear
console.
Press the button to open.
Before folding down the rear seat back-
rest or using the transport bag, remove all
containers from the cupholder and close it. Do
not place objects into the cupholder and use
force to close it. Do not use the cupholder as a
grab handle.<
Ashtray
Opening
Push the ridge on the cover.
Emptying
Lift out the insert.
Lighter
With the engine running or the ignition switched
on, press in the cigarette lighter.
The lighter can be pulled out as soon as it pops
back out.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
123
Practical interior accessories
Controls
Hold or touch the hot cigarette lighter by
the knob only. Holding or touching it in
other areas could result in burns.
When leaving the car, always remove the
remote control so that children cannot operate
the cigarette lighter and burn themselves.<
Connecting electrical
appliances
In your BMW, when the engine is running or the
ignition is switched on, you can use electrical
devices such as a hand lamp, car vacuum
cleaner, etc. if at least one of the following sock-
ets is available.
The total load of all sockets should not exceed
140 watts at 12 volts.
Avoid damaging the sockets by attempting to
insert plugs of unsuitable shape or size.
Do not connect battery chargers to the
sockets built into the vehicle at the plant;
doing so may damage the vehicle.<
Cigarette lighter socket
To access the socket: take the cigarette lighter
out of the socket.
Socket in the front passenger footwell
A socket is located under the glove compart-
ment on the left.
Socket in the center armrest
External audio device, refer to page 121.
Coupe: socket in cargo area
Open the cap.
Coupe:
Through-loading system
Opening
1. To release the rear seat backrest, pull the
corresponding lever in the cargo area.
2. The unlocked rear seat backrest moves for-
ward slightly. Fold the backrest forward by
the head restraint.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
124
Controls Practical interior accessories
Closing
Return the rear seat backrest to its upright posi-
tion and engage it.
When returning the backrest to its seating
position, make sure that the seat's lock-
ing mechanism engages properly. Otherwise,
cargo could be thrown around in the event of
sharp braking or swerving and endanger the
occupants.<
The lashing eyes in the cargo area provide you
with a way to attach cargo area nets or draw
straps for securing suitcases and luggage, refer
to page 137.
Convertible:
Cargo loading
Enlarging the cargo area
When the hardtop is closed you can enlarge the
cargo area:
To do so, push the cargo area partition upward.
Before opening the hardtop, push the cargo
area partition down until it engages on both
sides.
Before moving the hardtop, ensure that
there are no objects on or next to the
cargo area partition; otherwise, parts of the
hardtop may be damaged. Do not exceed the
maximum loading height; refer to the sticker in
the cargo area showing a line indicating the
maximum height. Do not use force to push
down the cargo area partition.<
The retractable hardtop can only be
opened if the cargo area partition is in its
lowermost position and engaged on both
sides.<
Folding down the rear seat backrest
Opening
You can fold down the rear seat backrest to
transport light objects in the rear without dam-
aging the seats. Depending on the vehicle
equipment, the mounting points for the cargo
area net are found on the rear panel of the back-
rest. To unlock the rear seat backrest: press the
button on the driver's or the opposite side.
Closing
Return the rear seat backrest to the upright
seating position and engage it.
When returning the backrest to its seating
position, make sure that the seat's lock-
ing mechanism engages properly. Otherwise,
cargo could be thrown around in the event of
sharp braking or swerving and endanger the
occupants.<
Bag holder
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
125
Practical interior accessories
Controls
When the rear seat backrest is folded down, you
will find two bag holders on the cargo area wall:
1. Fold open the holder by pressing the but-
ton.
2. Press the handles of the bag onto the
holder from above.
Only hang light shopping bags or other
suitable objects from the holders; other-
wise, braking maneuvers and swerving, for
example, may lead to a safety hazard due to
objects flying about the passenger compart-
ment. Only transport heavy luggage in the
cargo area if it has been appropriately
secured.<
For more information on loading the vehicle,
refer to page 135.
Storage compartment behind the rear
seat backrest
A storage compartment is located behind the
rear seat backrest. To access the storage com-
partment: remove the insert or fold down the
rear seat backrest.
When the rear seat backrest is folded
down or the insert has been removed,
only transport small light objects in the storage
compartment; otherwise, braking maneuvers
and swerving, for example, may lead to a safety
hazard due to objects flying about the passen-
ger compartment. Only transport heavy lug-
gage in the cargo area if it has been appropri-
ately secured.<
Storage compartments inside
the cargo area
Coupe
Depending on your vehicle's equipment, the
following storage spaces can be found in the
cargo area:
> Left storage compartment, e.g. for storing a
box of cleaning tissues or up to 12 CD jack-
ets, depending on vehicle equipment ver-
sion
> Net for securing smaller objects, to be
attached to the mounts on the floor panel
> Hooks for hanging up, e.g., shopping bags
or tote bags
> Rubber strap on the left trim panel for
securing small objects such as a folding
umbrella
> Net for small objects on the right trim panel
of the cargo area
Convertible
Depending on your vehicle's equipment, the
following storage spaces can be found in the
cargo area:
> Storage compartment on the left side of the
cargo area. To open turn handle by 90°
> Net for securing smaller objects, to be
attached to the mounts on the floor panel
> Rubber strap for subdividing the cargo area;
can be hooked onto the lateral lashing eyes
> Stowage compartment under the floor
panel
Folding up the floor panel
Do not exceed the maximum permissible
load of 55 lbs./25 kg for the storage com-
partment under the floor panel; otherwise, dam-
age may result.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
126
Controls Practical interior accessories
Coupe
Press the floor panel up and secure it with the
catch.
Convertible
To lift, grab hold of the floor panel at the open-
ing at the rear of the panel.
Lashing eyes
You will find lashing eyelets in the cargo area for
securing luggage items with nets or tensioning
straps, refer to page 137.
Coupe: ski bag
The ski bag is designed for safe, clean transport
of up to 4 pairs of standard skis or up to
2snowboards.
With the ski bag you can stow skis with a length
of up to 6.9 ft 10 in/2.10 m. When skis of 6.9 ft
10 in/2.10 m length are loaded, the overall
capacity of the ski bag is reduced due to its
tapered design.
Loading
1. Fold down the center armrest.
2. Press the button, reach into the recess and
fold down the cover.
3. Open the Velcro fastener, spread the ski
bag between the front seats and insert the
skis or snowboards.
4. Clip the hooks of the ski bag retaining strap
into the eyelet.
Only place clean skis in the ski bag. Wrap sharp
edges to prevent damage.
Securing cargo
After loading, secure the ski bag and its con-
tents. Tighten the retaining strap on the ten-
sioning buckle for this purpose.
Secure the ski bag in the manner
described; otherwise, it could endanger
the car's occupants, e.g. in case of heavy brak-
ing or sudden swerving.<
To store the ski bag, perform the steps
described for loading in reverse order.
Removing the ski bag
The ski bag can be completely removed, e.g. for
faster drying or to allow you to use other inserts.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
127
Practical interior accessories
Controls
1. Fold down the center panel in the rear seat
backrest.
2. Pull the handle, arrow 1.
3. Pull out the insert, arrow 2.
For more information on the various
inserts available, contact your BMW cen-
ter.<
Convertible: through-loading
opening with integrated
transport bag
The transport bag is designed for safe, clean
transport of up to 4 pairs of standard skis or up
to 2 snowboards.
When the rear seat backrest is folded up, you
can remove the insert and use the transport bag
with the regular through-loading opening. To
transport larger objects, you can fold down the
rear seat backrest to create an expanded
through-loading opening.
With the transport bag you can stow skis with a
length of up to 6.2 ft/1.90 m. When skis of 6.2 ft/
1.90 m length are loaded, the overall capacity of
the transport bag is reduced due to its tapered
design.
Loading
1. For loading using the regular through-load-
ing opening:
Press the button down and remove the
insert from the front.
For loading with the through-loading open-
ing expanded:
Fold down the rear seat backrest, refer to
page 124.
2. Front cover: press the two recesses
together and fold the cover down until it
engages.
3. In the cargo area: press the two recesses
together and fold down the cover.
4. Undo the Velcro fastener and spread out
the transport bag between the front seats.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
128
Controls Practical interior accessories
5. Insert the latch plate of the retaining strap
into the belt buckle under the transport bag.
6. Load the transport bag. The zipper eases
access to the stored items.
Only place clean skis in the transport bag. Wrap
sharp edges to prevent damage.
You can use the snaps to shorten the transport
bag if you do not need its full length.
Securing cargo
After loading, secure the transport bag and its
contents. Tighten the retaining strap on the
tensioning buckle for this purpose.
Secure the transport bag in the manner
described; otherwise, it could endanger
the car's occupants, e.g. in case of heavy brak-
ing or sudden swerving.<
To store the transport bag, perform the steps
described for loading in reverse order.
Removing the front cover
You can remove the front cover to use the full
height of the through-loading opening. With the
cover folded down, pull the handle, see arrow,
and remove the cover toward the front. To
replace, insert the cover at an angle from above
and let it snap it into place.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
129
Practical interior accessories
Controls
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
This section provides you with information
useful in dealing with specific driving and
operating conditions.
Driving tips
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
132
Driving tips Things to remember when driving
Things to remember when driving
Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and
optional equipment that is offered in the model
range is described. As a result, some equip-
ment described may not be available in a partic-
ular vehicle, for example due to the options or
national-market version selected. This also
applies to safety related functions and systems.
Break-in period
Moving parts need breaking-in time to adjust to
each other. Please follow the instructions below
in order to achieve the optimal service life and
economy of operation for your vehicle.
Engine and differential
Always obey all official speed limits.
Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km
Drive at varying engine and road speeds, but do
not exceed an engine speed of 4,500 rpm or a
road speed of 100 mph/160 km/h.
Avoid full-throttle operation and use of the
transmission's kickdown mode.
After driving 1,200 miles/2,000 km
Engine and vehicle speeds can be gradually
increased.
Tires
Due to technical factors associated with their
manufacture, tires do not achieve their full trac-
tion potential until after an initial break-in
period. Therefore, drive cautiously during the
first 200 miles/300 km.
Brake system
Brakes require an initial break-in period of
approx. 300 miles/500 km to achieve optimized
contact and wear patterns between brake pads
and rotors. Drive cautiously during this break-in
period.
Clutch
The function of the clutch reaches its optimal
level only after a distance driven of approx.
500 km. During this break-in period, engage the
clutch gently.
Following part replacement
The same break-in procedures should be
observed if any of the components mentioned
above have to be renewed in the course of the
vehicle's operating life.
Saving fuel
The fuel consumption of your vehicle depends
on several factors. You can lower fuel consump-
tion and the environmental impact by taking
certain measures, adjusting your driving style
and having the vehicle serviced regularly.
Remove any unneeded cargo
Additional weight increases fuel consumption.
Remove any mounted parts after you
have finished using them
Remove unneeded additional mirrors, the roof
rack and the rear luggage rack after use.
Mounted parts affect the vehicle's aerodynam-
ics and increase fuel consumption.
Close the windows and glass roof
An open glass roof or window causes higher air
resistance and thus increases fuel consump-
tion.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
133
Things to remember when driving
Driving tips
Check tire inflation pressure regularly
Check the tire inflation pressure at least twice a
month and before embarking on a long journey,
and correct it if necessary.
Low tire inflation pressure causes higher rolling
resistance and thus increases fuel consumption
and tire wear.
Set off immediately
Do not let the engine warm up while the car is
still standing, but set off immediately at moder-
ate engine speed. This is the fastest way for the
cold engine to reach its operating temperature.
Drive defensively
Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking
maneuvers. To do so, keep an adequate dis-
tance between you and the vehicle in front of
you. A defensive and smooth driving style
keeps fuel consumption down.
Avoid high engine speeds
Only use first gear when setting off. In second
and higher gears, accelerate without hesitation
or pauses. When accelerating, shift up before
reaching high engine speeds.
When you reach the desired speed, shift into
the highest applicable gear and drive with the
engine speed as low as possible and at a con-
stant speed.
As a rule: driving at low engine speeds lowers
fuel consumption and reduces wear.
Coasting
When approaching a red light, take your foot off
the accelerator and coast to a stop in the high-
est applicable gear.
On a downhill slope, take your foot off the accel-
erator and coast in a suitable gear.
The fuel supply is interrupted when coasting.
Switch off the engine during lengthy
stops
Switch off the engine when stopping for lengthy
periods, e.g. at traffic lights, railroad crossings
or in traffic congestions. You achieve fuel sav-
ings even if standing time is as short as approx.
4seconds.
Switch off functions you do not need at
the moment
Functions such as the air conditioner, seat
heating or rear window defroster draw large
amounts of power and consume additional fuel.
Especially in city traffic and in stop-and-go driv-
ing they have a considerable impact. Therefore,
switch these functions off when they are not
really needed.
Have the vehicle serviced
Have the vehicle serviced regularly to achieve
good economy and a long vehicle life. BMW
recommends having the vehicle serviced at
your BMW center. Also note the BMW service
system, refer to page 202.
General driving notes
Close the trunk lid
Only drive with the trunk closed. Failure to
do so may endanger passengers or other
road users or may damage the vehicle in the
event of an accident or a braking and evasive
maneuver. In addition, exhaust gas may flow
into the passenger compartment.<
If special circumstances make it absolutely nec-
essary to drive with the trunk open:
1. Close all windows and the glass roof.
2. Greatly increase the air volume of the air
conditioner or automatic climate control
system, refer to page 110 or 113.
3. Drive cautiously.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
134
Driving tips Things to remember when driving
Hot exhaust system
In all vehicles, extremely high tempera-
tures are generated in the exhaust sys-
tem. Do not remove the heat shields installed
adjacent to various sections of the exhaust sys-
tem, and never apply undercoating to them.
When driving, standing at idle and while park-
ing, take care to avoid possible contact
between the hot exhaust system and any highly
flammable materials such as hay, leaves, grass,
etc. Such contact could lead to a fire, with the
risk of serious personal injuries and property
damage. Do not touch hot exhaust tail pipes.
Otherwise, there is a risk of burns.<
Mobile phones in the vehicle
It is not advisable to use wireless devices
such as mobile phones inside the vehicle
without a direct connection to an external aerial.
Otherwise, it is not possible to exclude the pos-
sibility of a reciprocal interference occurring
between the vehicle electronics and the wire-
less device. Otherwise, there is no assurance
that the radiation generated by the radio trans-
mission will be conveyed out of the passenger
compartment.<
Hydroplaning
When driving on wet or slushy roads,
reduce road speed. If you do not, a wedge
of water can form between tires and road sur-
face. This situation, known as hydroplaning,
means that the tire can completely lose contact
with the road surface, so that neither the car can
be steered nor the brake be properly applied.<
The risk of hydroplaning increases with declin-
ing tread depth on the tires, refer also to Mini-
mum tread depth on page 194.
Driving through water
Drive through water on the road only if it is
not deeper than 1 ft/30 cm, and then only
at walking speed at the most. Otherwise, the
vehicle's engine, the electrical systems and the
transmission may be damaged.<
Use the parking brake on inclines
On inclines, do not hold the vehicle for a
lengthy period using the clutch; use the
parking brake instead. Otherwise, greater
clutch wear will result.<
For more information about the drive-off assis-
tant, refer to page 93.
Braking safely
Your BMW is equipped with ABS as a standard
feature. Applying the brakes fully is the most
effective way of braking in situations in which
this is necessary. Since the vehicle maintains
steering responsiveness, you can still avoid
possible obstacles with a minimum of steering
effort.
Pulsation of the brake pedal, combined with
sounds from the hydraulic circuits, indicate that
ABS is in its active mode.
Objects in the movement range of the
pedals
Keep floor mats, carpet, and other objects
out of the movement range of the pedals;
otherwise, they may inhibit the function of the
pedals during driving.
Do not place additional floor mats onto an exist-
ing one or onto other objects.
Only use floor mats that have been approved for
the vehicle and can be appropriately fastened.
Make sure that the floor mats are securely fas-
tened again after they have been removed, e.g.
for cleaning.<
Driving in wet conditions
When roads are wet or there is heavy rain,
briefly exert gentle pressure on the brake pedal
every few miles. Monitor traffic conditions to
ensure that this maneuver does not endanger
other road users. The heat generated in this
process helps dry the pads and rotors to ensure
that full braking efficiency will then be available
when you need it.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
135
Things to remember when driving
Driving tips
Hills
To prevent overheating and the resulting
reduced efficiency of the brake system,
drive long or steep downhill gradients in the
gear in which the least braking is required. Even
light but consistent brake pressure can lead to
high temperatures, brake wear and possibly
even brake failure.<
You can increase the engine's braking effect by
shifting down, all the way to first gear if neces-
sary. This strategy helps you avoid placing
excessive loads on the brake system. Down-
shifting in manual mode of the automatic trans-
mission, refer to page 61.
Sport automatic transmission with double
clutch: never drive with the transmission
in neutral or with the engine switched off; other-
wise, there will be no engine braking action and
no power assistance to the brakes and steering.
Manual transmission: never drive with the
clutch held down, with the transmission in neu-
tral or with the engine switched off; otherwise,
there will be no engine braking action and no
power assistance to the brakes and steering.
Never allow floor mats, carpets or any other
objects to protrude into the area around the
pedals; otherwise, pedal function could be
impaired.<
Corrosion on brake rotors
When the vehicle is driven only occasionally,
during extended periods when the vehicle is not
used at all, and in operating conditions where
brake applications are less frequent, there is an
increased tendency for corrosion to form on
rotors, while contaminants accumulate on the
brake pads. This occurs because the minimum
pressure which must be exerted by the pads
during brake applications to clean the rotors is
not reached.
Should corrosion form on the brake rotors, the
brakes will tend to respond with a pulsating
effect that even extended application will fail to
cure.
When the vehicle is parked
Condensation forms while the automatic cli-
mate control is in operation, and then exits
under the vehicle. Traces of condensed water
under the vehicle are therefore normal.
Cargo loading
To avoid loading the tires beyond their
approved carrying capacity, never over-
load the vehicle. Overloading can lead to over-
heating and increases the rate at which damage
develops inside the tires. In some situations,
this can result in sudden loss of tire pressure.<
Make sure that no liquids are spilled or
leak from their containers in the cargo
area, as this could result in damage to the vehi-
cle.<
Determining loading limit
1. Locate the following statement on your
vehicle's placard:
The combined weight of occupants
and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or YYY lbs. Otherwise, damage to
the vehicle and unstable driving conditions
may result.<
2. Determine the combined weight of the
driver and passengers that will be riding in
your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kilograms or YYY
pounds.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
136
Driving tips Things to remember when driving
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the YYY amount equals
1,400 lbs. and there will be five 150-lbs.
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs.:
1,400 lbs. minus 750 lbs. = 650 lbs.
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity calculated
in step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, part of
the load from your trailer will be transferred
to your vehicle. Consult the manual for
transporting a trailer to determine how this
may reduce the available cargo and luggage
load capacity of your vehicle.
Load
The permissible load is the total of the weight of
occupants and cargo/luggage. The greater the
weight of the occupants, the less cargo/lug-
gage can be transported.
Stowing cargo
> Position heavy objects as low and as far for-
ward as possible, ideally directly behind the
respective seat backrests.
> Cover sharp edges and corners.
> For very heavy cargo when the rear seat is
not occupied, secure each safety belt in the
opposite buckle.
Coupe
Convertible
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
137
Things to remember when driving
Driving tips
Securing cargo
Coupe
Convertible
> Secure smaller and lighter items using
retaining straps, a cargo area net, or draw
straps.
> Heavy-duty cargo straps for securing larger
and heavier objects are available at your
BMW center. Four lashing eyes are pro-
vided for attaching the cargo straps. Two
are located on the side walls of the cargo
area 1, two additional ones are located on
the inside wall of the cargo area 2.
Please note the information supplied with
the cargo straps.
Convertible: before opening the hardtop,
fold down the cargo area partition. Make
sure the cargo area is loaded correctly; other-
wise parts of the hardtop can be damaged, refer
to page 124.<
Always position and secure the cargo as
described above, so that it cannot endan-
ger the car's occupants, for example if sudden
braking or swerving is necessary.
Never exceed either the approved gross vehicle
weight or either of the approved axle loads, refer
to page 237; otherwise, excessive loads can
pose a safety hazard and may also place you in
violation of traffic safety laws.
Heavy or hard objects should not be carried
loose inside the car, since they could be thrown
around, for example as a result of heavy braking,
sudden swerves, etc., and endanger the occu-
pants.
Only attach the cargo straps using the lashing
eyes shown in the illustration. Do not secure
cargo with the anchors for tether straps, refer to
page 55; otherwise, these could be damaged.<
Coupe: roof-mounted
luggage rack
A special rack system is available as an option
for your BMW. Comply with the directions given
in the installation instructions.
Mounting points
The mounting points are located in the roof.
Loading roof-mounted luggage rack
Because roof racks raise the vehicle's center of
gravity when loaded, they have a major effect on
vehicle handling and steering response.
You should therefore always remember not to
exceed the approved roof load capacity, the
approved gross vehicle weight or the axle loads
when loading the rack.
You can find the applicable data under Weights
on page 237.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
138
Driving tips Things to remember when driving
The roof load must be distributed uniformly and
should not be too large in area. Heavy items
should always be placed at the bottom. Be sure
that adequate clearance is maintained for tilting
the glass roof, and that objects do not project
into the opening path of the trunk lid.
Fasten roof-mounted cargo correctly and
securely to prevent it from shifting or falling off
during the trip.
Drive smoothly. Avoid sudden acceleration and
braking maneuvers. Take corners gently.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
139
Things to remember when driving
Driving tips
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Operation of the radio, CD equipment and
external audio devices as well as their tone
settings are described in this chapter.
Entertainment
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
142
Entertainment BMW Professional radio
BMW Professional radio
Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and
optional equipment that is offered in the model
range is described. Equipment is also described
that is not available because of, for example,
selected options or country version. This also
applies to safety related functions and systems.
Switching radio on/off
Press the knob on the left. The radio selects the
last set audio source: Radio, HD Radio, Satellite
radio, CD, CD changer, external audio device, or
USB audio interface.
Listening to the radio when the ignition
is switched off
When radio readiness or the ignition is switched
off, the radio functions are available for approx.
20 minutes. To do so, switch the radio on again.
To spare the battery, ensure that the
radio is switched off when leaving the
vehicle.<
Adjusting volume
Turn the knob on the left. The setting is stored
for the remote control in use.
The audio sources are automatically
muted when you make a phone call using
the hands-free system.<
Setting the volume for the PDC and
gong
You can raise or lower the audio signals for the
PDC or gong with respect to the volume of the
audio sources.
The audio signals have a set minimum and max-
imum volume, below which they can not fall and
above which they can not go.
Set the audio source to a high volume to
be able to better set the volume of the
audio signals.<
1. Press the button.
2.
Press the button if necessary.
3.
or press the button.
4. Set the desired volume and press the knob
on the right.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
143
BMW Professional radio
Entertainment
Setting the speed-dependent volume
The speed-dependent volume controls auto-
matically increases the volume as the speed of
the vehicle increases. You can set different lev-
els for increasing the volume.
1. Press the button.
2.
Press the button if necessary.
3.
Press the button.
4. Set the desired volume and press the knob
on the right.
Setting the volume for external audio
devices
You can use the AUX-IN port in the center con-
sole to connect an external audio device such
as an MP3 player and play audio recordings
over the vehicle speakers.
The volume of the external audio device can be
adjusted to the radio.
1. Press the button.
2.
Press the button.
3.
Press the button.
4. Set the desired volume and press the knob
on the right.
Setting tone controls
You can select among the following settings:
> Bass: bass adjustment
> Treble: treble adjustment
> Balance: left/right volume distribution
> Fader: front/rear volume distribution
> "ROOM"
> "LOGIC7"
> Equalizer
The tone settings are set for all audio sources at
once.
Setting the bass, treble and balance
1. Press the button.
2. Highlight the desired tone setting and press
the knob on the right.
3. Select the desired volume and press the
knob on the right.
Switching on the surround sound
function
You can select from among the following sound
patterns:
> "ROOM"
> "LOGIC7"
To select a sound pattern:
1. Press the button.
2.
Press the button.
3. Press the desired sound pattern button, for
example:
Equalizer
1.
Press the button.
2. Press the desired frequency band.
3. Adjust the settings and press the knob on
the right.
To reset the settings:
1. Press the button.
2. Turn the knob on the right.
3.
Press the button.
4.
Press the button.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
144
Entertainment BMW Professional radio
Resetting tone settings
The tone settings are reset to the middle val-
ues.
1. Press the button.
2.
Press the button.
Time
When the ignition or radio readiness is switched
off, you can display the time for a few seconds.
Displaying the time
Press the button.
Setting the time, date and time format
You can set the time, date, and time format,
refer to page 86.
Radio
Your radio is designed for receiving FM and AM
signals.
Listening to the radio
1. Switch on the radio, refer to page 142.
2. Press the button if necessary.
3.
Press the button.
4.
Press the corresponding button as
often as necessary until the desired wave-
length band is selected.
> AM: AM and AMA
> FM: FM1/FM2 and FMA
Selecting a station
The setting is stored for the remote control in
use.
Next station
Press the button.
The next available station is selected.
Selecting stations by changing the
frequency
1. Press the button.
2. Press the respective function button to
enter the desired frequency.
Or, by using the knob on the right:
1. Press the button.
2. Turn the knob on the right until the desired
frequency is reached.
Automatically updating strongest
stations
Radio stations are stored in order of their signal
strength in the memory levels FMA and AMA. If
the AUTOSTORE function is not used, then six
stations can be manually stored in each of the
memory levels FMA and AMA.
Press and hold the relevant button until
the following display appears.
"AUTOSTORE"
It may take several seconds before the stations
are stored and you can listen to one of them.
Sampling and selecting radio stations
Press the button. Samples are
played of all the stations in reception range.
To interrupt the function and select a station:
Press the button.
Storing and recalling stations
Memory presets
Your radio can store 30 stations:
> FM1, FM2: six stations each.
> AM: six stations each of your choice
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
145
BMW Professional radio
Entertainment
> FMA/AMA: the six stations with the stron-
gest reception are automatically stored or
six stations can be manually stored.
Storing stations
1.
Press the corresponding button as
often as necessary until the desired fre-
quency range is selected
2. Select station.
3.
… Press and hold the
desired button until the station starts to play
again after a brief interruption.
The memory level and the selected button
are shown on the display.
Recalling stored stations
1.
Press the corresponding button as
often as necessary until the desired wave-
length band is selected.
2.
… Press the desired but-
ton.
Using the knob on the right:
Turn the knob on the right until the desired sta-
tion is reached.
RDS – Radio Data System
RDS uses the FM waveband to broadcast addi-
tional information, for example the station
names or possibly text messages. When a sta-
tion has several frequencies, the radio will auto-
matically switch to the frequency with the best
reception quality.
Over RDS, some stations transmit the type of
the received program, PTY. At the option of the
station, this can be shown briefly on the display,
e.g., messages, NEWS. Using PTY, warnings
regarding catastrophies can also be displayed,
e.g., "ALARM". The warning is then played over
the speakers.
Switching RDS on/off
1.
Press the button.
2.
Press the button.
When RDS is switched off, the PTY function is
also switched off.
Switching program type display on/off
1.
Press the button.
2.
Press the button.
HD Radio™ reception
Many radio stations transmit analog and digital
signals.
License conditions
HD Radio™ technology is manufactured under
U.S. and Foreign Patents licensed from iBiquity
Digital Corp. HD Radio™ and the HD and HD
Radio logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiq-
uity Digital Corp.
Activating/deactivating digital radio
reception
1. Press the button.
2.
Press the button.
3.
Press the button.
4.
Press the button.
"HD": a station is received digitally.
"(HD)": a station is broadcasting digital signals;
digital radio reception is, however, switched off.
In areas in which the station is not continuously
received in digital mode, playback switches
between analog and digital reception. In this
case, switch off digital radio reception.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
146
Entertainment BMW Professional radio
Selecting programs from a digital
station
Some stations broadcast several programs. To
select one of these programs:
1. Press the button repeatedly until the
desired digital station is displayed.
If a station broadcasts several programs,
then, e.g., "HD1" is displayed.
2.
Press the button.
3. Select the desired program.
Up to eight programs per station can be
selected, "HD1" to "HD8".
Displaying additional information
For digital stations, additional information about
the current track is displayed, e.g., the name of
the artist.
Press the button.
The information is displayed.
Operation indicators
> "Acquiring": a search for digital stations is
being conducted.
> "No signal": there are no digital stations
within range.
Satellite radio
You can receive more than 100 different chan-
nels of high audio quality. The channels are
offered in fixed packages and have to be acti-
vated.
You may experience signal drops and
muting events related to this new tech-
nology.<
Activating or deactivating channels
1. Press the button.
2.
Press the button.
3.
Press the button.
4. Select the desired category.
The channels are displayed.
This symbol indicates the current channel.
Activating
1. Turn the knob on the right to select a chan-
nel that is not yet activated.
2. Press the knob on the right to confirm a
channel.
A phone number and the electronic serial
number, ESN, are displayed. When activat-
ing, the electronic serial number is required.
3. To activate the channels:
Dial the phone number.
Deactivating
1. Press the button.
2.
Press the button.
3.
Press the button for a longer
period.
A phone number and the electronic serial
number, ESN, are displayed. For deactivat-
ing, the electronic serial number is required.
4. To deactivate channels:
Dial the phone number.
Selecting and storing a channel
1. Press the button.
2.
Press the button.
3.
Press the button.
4. Select the desired category.
5. Select desired channel.
To display all the channels:
Press the button.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
147
BMW Professional radio
Entertainment
To store a channel:
1.
Press the button.
2.
Press the button as often as
necessary until the desired memory level,
SAT 1 or SAT 2, is reached.
3.
... Press and hold the
desired button until the channel starts to
play again after a brief interruption.
Changing to the current channel
Press the button.
Additional information
The name of the channel and additional infor-
mation about the current track is displayed, e.g.,
the name of the artist.
1. Select the desired channel.
2.
Press the button.
Changing channels using buttons
Press the button for the corresponding
direction. The next activated channel is
recalled.
Search function
1. Press and hold the button for the
corresponding direction. The activated
channels are shown, one after another, on
the display.
2. Release the button to select the displayed
channel.
Notes
When there is a signal blockage or the transmis-
sion is suspended momentarily for more than
4 seconds, a message appears on the Control
Display.
Service may be interrupted or unavailable
for specific reasons such as environmen-
tal or topographic conditions and others that
Satellite Radio cannot directly control. Signals
may not be available under tunnels, in parking
garages, next to tall buildings, nearby trees with
dense foliage, nearby mountains or other possi-
ble strong sources of radio interference. Ser-
vice should resume normally after the source of
signal unavailability has been cleared.<
CD player and CD changer
Starting the CD player
It may take a moment for the CD player to start.
1. Switch on the radio, refer to page 142.
2. Insert the CD with the printed side up into
the CD slot.
If there is already a CD in the CD slot:
1. Switch on the radio, if necessary.
2. Press the button.
3.
Press the button.
Starting CD changer
It may take a moment for the CD changer to
start.
1. Switch on the radio, refer to page 142.
2. Fill the CD magazine and insert it, refer to
page 149.
3. Press the button.
4.
Press the button.
Selecting a CD
Press the button for the desired CD number.
The corresponding CD number will appear on
the display. At the end of the last track, the next
CD is selected and played.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
148
Entertainment BMW Professional radio
Changing the music track
Skipping tracks
Press the button as often as necessary
until the desired track is played.
Using the knob on the right:
Turn the knob on the right until the desired
track is played.
Fast forward/reverse
1. Press and hold the button.
Tracks can be heard but are distorted.
2. To cancel the fast forward/reverse, release
the button.
Random order
Press the button.
To terminate the random generator:
Press the button.
Sampling and selecting tracks
Press the button. Samples of all of
the tracks are briefly played one after another.
To interrupt the function and select a track:
Press the button.
Compressed audio files
The CD player and CD changer can also play
CDs with compressed audio data: MP3 and
WMA.
Selecting a track
1.
Press the button.
2. Use the knob on the right to select the
desired directory.
> : press the knob on the right to open a
directory.
> : press the knob on the right to close
a directory.
3. Select additional directories if desired.
4. Highlight the desired track and press the
knob on the right.
You can browse through the directories during
playback.
To change to the current track:
Press the button.
Track display
If information about the current track has been
stored, it can be displayed.
1.
Press the button.
2.
Press the button.
Ejecting the CD out of the CD player
Press the button.
The CD is partially ejected from the CD slot.
Installation location of CD changer
At the rear left of the cargo area.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
149
BMW Professional radio
Entertainment
Coupe
Convertible
Removing/inserting CD magazine
Removing CD magazine
To insert or remove CDs from the CD magazine,
you must first remove it from the CD changer.
1. Push the cover to one side, arrow 1.
2. Press the button, arrow 2.
The CD magazine will be ejected.
Push the magazine back in after at least
2 seconds have passed so that the inserted
CDs can be read in again.
Inserting/removing CDs from the
CD magazine
When loading CDs into or removing them from
the CD magazine, always hold them at their
edges and do not touch the reflective side of the
CD.
> Inserting CDs:
Pull out the desired compartment and insert
the CD with the printed side up.
> Removing CDs:
Pull out the desired compartment and take
out the CD.
Inserting the CD magazine
1. Insert the CD magazine all the way in the
direction of arrow 1.
2. Close the cover, arrow 2.
The CD changer automatically reads in the
loaded CDs and is then ready for operation.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
150
Entertainment BMW Professional radio
Operation indicators
CD player
> "Insert CD"
The CD slot is empty.
> "Error CD"
The CD can not be read or is defective.
> "Temp. CD"
The operating temperature is too high.
CD changer
> "Insert CD"
The CD has been inserted incorrectly or the
magazine is empty.
> "Insert MAG"
No magazine is inserted.
> "Load MAG"
The CD contents are currently being read
in.
> "Temp. CDC"
The operating temperature is too high.
Notes
BMW CD players and CD changers are
Class 1 laser products. Do not operate if
the cover is damaged; otherwise, serious eye
injury may result.
Do not use CDs with after-market labels; other-
wise, the labels can loosen as a result of the
heat generated during playback and possibly
cause irreparable damage to the system.
Only use round CDs with a standard diameter of
4.7 in/12 cm and do not play CDs with adapters,
e.g. single CDs; otherwise, the CDs or adapters
may jam and it may not be possible to eject
them.
Do not use a combined CD/DVD, e.g. DVD
Plus
;
otherwise, the CD/DVD can jam and will no
longer eject.<
General malfunctions
BMW CD players and CD changers are opti-
mized for operation in the vehicle. They may be
more sensitive to defective CDs than players for
stationary use.
If a CD can not be played, first check if the CD is
properly inserted.
Humidity
If there is high humidity, the CD or the focusing
lens for the laser beam may fog up, making it
temporarily impossible to play the CD.
Malfunctions with individual CDs
If there are malfunctions with individual CDs,
then they may be due to the following causes.
CDs that you burned yourself
Potential problems with home-burned CDs are,
for example, inconsistent data generation and
burning processes, as well as low quality or
excessive aging of the blanks that are used.
Only write on the upper surface of CDs with a
writing instrument that is suitable for the pur-
pose.
Damaged CDs
Avoid leaving fingerprints, as well as dust,
scratches or moisture on the CDs/DVDs.
Store CDs in sleeves.
Do not expose CDs to a temperature greater
than 50 6/122 7, elevated humidity, or direct
sunlight.
CDs with copy protection
CDs are often provided with copy protection
from the manufacturer. This can result in CDs
not playing or playing back in only a limited
fashion.
Care
If necessary, clean the reflecting side of the CD
with a commercially available cleaning cloth by
wiping in a straight line from the center out-
wards.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
151
BMW Professional radio
Entertainment
AUX-IN port
Overview
> It is possible to connect audio devices, e.g.
MP3 players. Sound is output over the vehi-
cle speakers.
> Recommended settings: mid-level tone and
volume settings on the audio device. Tone
may depend on the quality of the audio files.
Connecting
Lift up the center armrest.
The AUX-In connection is in the center armrest.
Connect the headphone connection or line-out
connection of the device to the AUX-IN port.
Playback
1. Connect the audio device, switch it on, and
using the audio device, select a track.
2. Press the button.
3.
Press the button.
Volume
The volume of the sound output depends on
the audio device. If this volume differs markedly
from the volume of the other audio sources, it is
advisable to adjust the volumes.
Adjusting volume
1. Press the button.
2.
Press the button.
3.
Press the button.
4. Select the desired volume and press the
knob on the right.
USB audio interface
Overview
It is possible to connect external audio devices.
Sound is output over the vehicle speakers.
Options for connecting external
devices
> Connection via USB audio interface: Apple
iPod/iPhone, USB devices, e.g. MP3 player,
USB flash drive, or mobile phones that are
supported by the USB audio interface.
> Connection via the snap-in adapter, when
equipped with extended connectivity of the
music player in the mobile phone: Apple
iPhone or mobile phones. Playback may
only be possible when no device is con-
nected to the AUX-IN port.
Because of the large number of audio devices
on the market, there is no way to ensure that
every audio device can be properly operated via
the vehicle.
Ask your BMW center for suitable audio
devices/mobile phones.
Audio files
Playback of standard audio files is possible:
> MP3
> WMA
> WAV (PCM)
> AAC, M4A
> Playback lists: M3U, WPL, PLS
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
152
Entertainment BMW Professional radio
File systems
Popular file systems for USB devices are sup-
ported. The format FAT 32 is recommended.
Connecting
1 Connection for audio playback:
TRS connector 1/8"/3.5 mm
2 USB interface
Apple iPod/iPhone
Use the special cable adapter for Apple iPods/
iPhones to produce the connection. You can
obtain further information from your BMW cen-
ter or on the Internet: www.bmw.com
To play audio tracks over the vehicle's speaker
system, connect the iPod/iPhone to ports 1
and 2.
The iPod/iPhone's menu structure is supported
by the USB audio interface.
USB device
To protect the USB interface and USB
device from mechanical damage, connect
them with the flexible adapter cable.<
To play audio tracks over the car's speaker sys-
tem, connect the USB device to port 2.
After initial connection
Information about all tracks, e.g. artist or music
style, and the playlists of the USB device are
imported into the vehicle. This process can take
some time. The time required is dependent on
the USB device and on the number of tracks.
Number of tracks
The data from up to four USB devices or for
approx. 20,000 tracks can be stored in the vehi-
cle. If a fifth device is connected or if more than
20,000 tracks are stored, then the data of exist-
ing tracks may be deleted.
Copy protection
Music tracks with integrated Digital
Rights Management (DRM) cannot be
played.<
Starting audio playback
iPod
1. Press the button.
2.
Press the button.
USB device
1. Press the button.
2.
Press the button.
Changing music tracks
Skipping tracks
It is possible to skip tracks in the selected direc-
tory.
Press the button as often as necessary
until the desired track is played.
Using the knob on the right:
Turn the knob on the right until the desired
track is played.
Fast forward/reverse
1. Press and hold the button.
The track can be heard but is distorted.
2. To cancel the fast forward/reverse, release
the button.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
153
BMW Professional radio
Entertainment
Random order
Press the button.
The current track is played to the end.
Then the tracks in the current directory are
played back in random order.
To terminate the random generator:
Press the button.
Selecting a track
Select the desired list, e.g., "LIST":
1.
Press the button.
2. If necessary, use the knob on the right to
select the desired directory.
> : press the knob on the right to open a
directory.
> : press the knob on the right to close
a directory.
3. Select additional directories if desired.
4. Highlight the desired track and press the
knob on the right.
You can browse through the directories during
playback.
To change to the current track:
Press the button.
Track display
If information about the currently selected track
has been stored, it can be displayed.
Press the button.
Adjusting volume
The volume of the sound output depends on
the audio device. If this volume differs markedly
from the volume of the other audio sources, it is
advisable to adjust the volumes.
1.
Press the button.
2. Turn the knob on the right until the desired
volume is set and then press the knob.
Displaying the file structure of the USB
device
The entire file structure of the USB device can
be displayed, for example directories without
music files.
Press the button.
Notes
Do not expose the audio device to extreme
environmental conditions, e.g. very high tem-
peratures, refer to the operating instructions of
the audio device.
Depending on the configuration of the audio
files, for example bit rates higher than
256 Kbit/s, it is not always possible to ensure
proper playback in every case.
Information on connection
> The connected audio device is supplied
with a max. power of 500 mA if supported
by the device. For this reason, do not addi-
tionally connect the device to a charging
socket in the vehicle; otherwise, it may not
be possible to ensure proper playback.
> Do not use force when plugging the con-
nector into the USB interface.
> Do not connect devices such as fans or
lamps to the USB audio interface.
> Do not connect USB hard drives.
> Do not use the USB audio interface to
recharge external devices.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
This chapter describes how to use
the telephone, BMW Assist and
BMW TeleServices.
Communications
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
156
Communications Te l e p h o n e
Telephone
Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and
optional equipment that is offered in the model
range is described. Equipment is also described
that is not available because of, for example,
selected options or country version. This also
applies to safety related functions and systems.
Overview
Note
Your BMW is equipped with a full preparation
package mobile phone or hands-free system.
The concept
Mobile phones can be connected to the vehicle
through Bluetooth.
After a suitable mobile phone is paired with the
vehicle once, the mobile phone can be con-
trolled via the radio, the buttons on the steering
wheel, and by voice.
Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of Blue-
tooth® SIG, Inc.
Only make entries when traffic conditions
permit. Do not hold the mobile phone in
your hand while you are driving; use the hands-
free system instead. If you do not observe this
precaution, your being distracted can endanger
vehicle occupants and other road users.<
Snap-in adapter
The snap-in adapter, refer to page 165, makes
it possible to:
> Accommodate the mobile phone.
> Recharge its battery.
> Connect it to an external antenna of the
vehicle.
This assures a better network connection
and constant sound quality.
A mobile phone that is connected to the vehicle
should not be operated via the mobile phone
keypad; otherwise, malfunctions may occur.
Suitable mobile phones
For precise information about which mobile
phones with a Bluetooth interface are sup-
ported by the complete mobile phone prepara-
tion package, go to www.bmwusa.com/
bluetooth.
Notes
At high temperatures, the charging function of
the mobile phone may be limited and some
functions may no longer be carried out.
When using the mobile phone via the vehicle,
follow the instructions given in the owner's
manual for the mobile phone.
Controls
1 Volume control ON/OFF.
> Press: switching radio on/off
> Turn: adjusting volume 160
2 Display
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
157
Tel e p h o n e
Communications
3 Highlighting/selecting a menu item.
> Turn: highlighting the menu item in the
display or setting a value.
> Press: selecting a highlighted menu item
or storing a setting.
4 Open the main menu
5 Redialing, answering a call, starting to dial,
ending a call, and switching to the phone
menu.
6 Function buttons for selecting the menu
items situated directly above them on the
display.
Presentation in the Owner's Manual
"…" identifies radio display texts used to select
individual functions.
Symbols on the display
Pairing/unpairing mobile
phone
Overview
The pairing data of four mobile phones can be
stored simultaneously in the vehicle. When the
engine is running or the ignition is switched on,
each paired mobile phone is automatically
detected as soon as it is present in the passen-
ger compartment. If a fifth mobile phone is
paired, then the pairing data of one mobile
phone must be deleted, refer to Mobile phone
unpairing, page 159.
Requirements
> Suitable mobile phone, refer to page 156.
> The mobile phone is ready to operate.
> Bluetooth activated in vehicle, refer to
page 157, and in the mobile phone.
> Depending on the mobile phone type, it
may be necessary to make certain settings
on the mobile phone, e.g. via the following
menu items:
> Bluetooth switched on
> Connection not confirmed
> Reconnection
> Depending on the mobile phone type, the
power-saving mode setting, for example,
may result in a paired mobile phone not
being detected by the vehicle.
> A number with at least 4 and at most
16 digits has been established as the Blue-
tooth passkey. Only required once for pair-
ing.
> The ignition is switched on.
Activating/deactivating Bluetooth link
Bluetooth is not permitted everywhere. Comply
with all safety guidelines and regulations.
To deactivate the Bluetooth connection:
1. Switch on radio readiness or ignition.
2. Press the button.
3.
Press the button.
4.
Press the button.
5.
Press the button.
6.
Press the button.
Symbol Function
Function is selected
Exit menu, go back one menu
Show other menu items
Scroll display, list contains more
than 2 entries
Reception of the mobile phone
network: display depends upon
signal strength.
Making a call with the hands-free
system.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
158
Communications Te l e p h o n e
To reactivate the Bluetooth connection:
1.
Press the button.
2.
Press the button.
Pairing and connecting
Only pair the mobile phone when the
vehicle is stopped; otherwise, inattention
may lead to endangerment of passengers or
other road users.<
1. Switch on radio readiness or ignition.
2. Press the button.
3.
Press the button.
4.
Press the button.
5.
Press the button.
Turn the right rotary knob to display the Blue-
tooth name of the vehicle on the display.
6. Additional operations must be carried out
on the mobile phone, refer to the owner's
manual for the mobile phone, for example
look under Bluetooth device, connecting or
pairing/
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears
on the mobile phone display.
7. Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle on
the mobile phone display.
The mobile phone or the radio display will
prompt you to enter the same Bluetooth
passkey.
8. Enter and confirm the Bluetooth passkey
using the number buttons of the mobile
phone.
9.
Press the button to enter the Blue-
tooth passkey using the radio.
10. Using the function buttons 0-9, enter the
same Bluetooth passkey that was entered
into the mobile phone.
To delete the last digit:
Press the button.
11.
Press the button to confirm the
Bluetooth passkey.
12.
Press the button if necessary.
If the pairing succeeded, the mobile phone will
appear on the radio display.
Four mobile phones can be paired with the
vehicle simultaneously.
If the pairing was not successful: what to do if…,
refer to page 159.
Repeating the pairing procedure/help
If the coupling did not succeed:
1.
Press the button.
2. Repeat steps 7 through 12.
If the pairing has been repeatedly unsuccessful,
please contact Customer Relations.
To display the Customer Relations phone num-
ber:
Press the button.
Rotate the knob on the right to display the Cus-
tomer Relations phone number and the infor-
mation required for the pairing.
Following the initial pairing
> The mobile phone is detected/connected in
the vehicle within a short period of time
when the engine is running or the ignition is
switched on.
> After identification, phone book entries are
imported from the mobile phone and/or SIM
card, depending on the mobile phone.
> Four devices can be paired.
> Some mobile phones may require certain
settings, for example authorization or a
secure connection, refer to the owner's
manual for the mobile phone.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
159
Tel e p h o n e
Communications
Connecting a particular mobile phone
If more than one mobile phone is detected by
the vehicle, the mobile phone at the top of the
list is connected. It is possible that another
detected mobile phone is linked to the vehicle.
A different mobile phone can be connected by
selecting it.
The connected mobile phone is denoted with
the following symbol in the radio display:
To change the sequence of mobile phones in
the list:
1. Switch on radio readiness or ignition.
2. Press the button.
3.
Press the button.
4.
Press the button.
5. Turn the knob on the right until the display
shows the mobile phone whose position in
the list is to be changed.
6.
Press the button repeatedly until
the desired position is reached.
Mobile phone unpairing
1. Switch on radio readiness or ignition.
2. Press the button.
3.
Press the button.
4.
Press the button.
5. Turn the right knob to show the desired
mobile phone on the radio display.
6.
Press the button.
7.
Press the button to acknowledge
the message displayed.
What to do if…
For information on suitable mobile phones,
refer to page 156.
The mobile phone could not be paired or con-
nected.
> Is Bluetooth activated in the vehicle and in
the mobile phone? Activate Bluetooth in the
vehicle and in the mobile phone.
> Do the Bluetooth passkeys on the mobile
phone and the vehicle match? Enter the
same passkey on the mobile phone and via
the radio.
> Is the passkey input taking longer than
30 seconds? Repeat the pairing procedure.
> Are too many Bluetooth devices connected
to the mobile phone? If so, delete the con-
nections with other devices on the mobile
phone.
> Is the mobile phone in power economy
mode or does it only have a small amount of
battery charge remaining? Charge the
mobile phone in the snap-in adapter or via a
charging cable.
> Depending on the mobile phone, it may only
be possible to connect one device to the
vehicle. Unpair the connected device from
the vehicle and only pair and connect one
device.
> Delete connection to the mobile phone and,
if necessary, to the radio and try again.
Is the mobile phone no longer responding?
> Switch the mobile phone off and back on
again. Repeat the pairing procedure.
> Is the ambient temperature too high or too
low? Do not subject your mobile phone to
extreme ambient temperatures.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
160
Communications Te l e p h o n e
Phone book entries are not displayed, not all of
them are displayed, or they are displayed
incompletely.
> The transfer of phone book entries has not
yet completed.
> In some cases, only the phone book entries
of the mobile phone or the SIM card will be
transferred.
> It may not be possible to display phone
book entries with special characters.
> The number of phone book entries to be
stored is too high.
> The data volume of the phone book entry is
too great, e.g. due to additionally stored
information such as notes? Reduce the data
volume.
The telephone connection quality is low.
> Depending on the mobile phone, it is possi-
ble to adjust the strength of the Bluetooth
signal.
> Insert the mobile phone into the snap-in
adapter or place it in the vicinity of the cen-
ter console.
> Adjust the volume of the microphone and
speaker separately.
If you have gone through all items in the list and
still cannot activate the desired function, please
contact Customer Relations or your BMW cen-
ter.
Operation
The following functions can be operated using
the radio:
> Accepting/refusing a call
> Dialing phone numbers
> Dialing a phone number from the phone
book
> Dialing a stored number, e.g., from a list of
accepted calls
> In connection with the preparation for
mobile phone Business: BMW Assist, refer
to page 167
When the ignition is switched off and radio
readiness switched on, e.g. after removal of the
infrared remote control, an ongoing conversa-
tion can be continued for a maximum of
25 minutes using the hands-free system.
Adjusting volume
Turn the knob until the desired volume is
reached. The setting is stored for the remote
control currently in use.
The vehicle automatically adjusts the volume of
the microphone on the phone and the volume of
the person with whom you are talking. Depend-
ing on the mobile phone, it may be necessary to
adjust the volumes. The settings can only be
made during a call and must be made sepa-
rately for each phone. The settings are deleted
as soon as the phone is unpaired.
Receiving calls
If the number of the caller is stored in the phone
book and the phone number is transmitted by
the network, then the name of the contact will
be displayed. Otherwise, only the phone num-
ber will be displayed.
Accepting a call
Press the button on the steering wheel or on
the radio.
Alternative:
Press the button.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
161
Tel e p h o n e
Communications
Rejecting a call
Press the button.
Calling
Dialing phone numbers
1. Switch on radio readiness or ignition.
2. Press the button.
3.
Press the button.
4.
Press the button.
5. Enter the desired phone number using the
0-9 buttons.
To delete the last digit:
Press the button.
6. Press the button on the steering wheel
or on the radio.
Alternative:
Press the knob on the right to dial the phone
number.
In order for your phone number to be displayed
to the person you are talking to, the display of
phone numbers must be enabled by your pro-
vider.
Ending a call
Press the button on the steering wheel or on
the radio.
Alternative:
Press the button.
Dialing a phone number from the phone
book or from phone numbers stored in a
list
Phone numbers dialed, incoming calls, and
phone book entries are stored in lists when the
mobile phone is connected to the vehicle via
Bluetooth. If the caller is entered in the phone
book, then the name of the entry is displayed
instead of the phone number.
Select the desired name from the list and estab-
lish the connection.
There are five available lists:
> "A-Z"
The entries of the phone book, the SIM
card, or the mobile phone, composed of a
name and phone number, are sorted alpha-
betically.
> "TOP8"
The Top 8 list automatically stores the eight
phone numbers of the phone book that are
dialed the most frequently.
> "LAST8"
The eight phone numbers dialed last are
stored. The phone number dialed last
appears at the top of the list.
> "CALLS"
The phone numbers of the last eight
accepted calls are stored. This requires the
phone number of the caller to have been
transmitted.
> "MISSED"
The phone numbers of the last eight calls
that were not accepted are stored. This
requires the phone number of the caller to
have been transmitted.
Dialing a phone number from the phone
book
The A-Z list is available for phone book entries.
If entries with different names, but the same
phone number are transferred from the mobile
phone to the vehicle, only one entry is dis-
played.
The displays of the phone book entries on the
radio display can differ from the displays on the
mobile phone display, e.g. sequence of the first
and last names.
1. Switch on radio readiness or ignition.
2. Press the button.
3.
Press the button.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
162
Communications Te l e p h o n e
4.
Press the button.
The arrows indicate that
additional letters can be displayed.
Turn the knob on the right to display addi-
tional letters.
5. Turn the knob on the right to select the first
letters of the desired entry.
6.
Press the button if so desired.
The phone number is dialed.
To display all entries:
1. Turn the knob on the right to select the first
letters of the desired entry and press the
knob.
2. Turn the knob on the right to select the
desired entry and press the knob on the
right.
The phone number is dialed.
The phone number can also be dialed using the
buttons on the steering wheel or radio:
Press the button.
Editing and dialing a phone number
from the phone book
The phone number of an entry can be edited
before a call. This change is not stored in the
phone book.
1. Select an entry.
2.
Press the button.
3.
Press the button to delete a
digit.
4. Enter additional digits using the 0-9 but-
tons.
5. Press the knob on the right to dial the phone
number.
Dialing a phone number from the phone
book using buttons on the steering
wheel
1. Press and hold the button to display the
telephone menu.
2. Use the arrow buttons on the steering
wheel to scroll through the phone book.
3. Press and hold the button to dial the
phone number.
Dialing a phone number stored in a list
To select an entry and establish a connection:
1. Switch on radio readiness or ignition.
2. Press the button.
3.
Press the button.
4.
Press the desired button to select
one of the four lists.
5. Turn the knob on the right to select an entry
and press the knob to dial the phone num-
ber.
Deleting an individual entry
1. Select the desired entry from the list.
2.
Press the button.
Keypad dialing
Use the multi-frequency dialing system to
access network services or to control devices,
for example to remotely access an answering
machine. This requires the DTMF code.
This function is available if a connection has
been established and the call is being made
using the hands-free system.
1.
Press the button.
2. Enter the desired code using the 0-9 but-
tons.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
163
Tel e p h o n e
Communications
3.
If needed, press and hold the but-
ton on the right or left side to enter special
characters.
Displaying call duration
To display the duration during a call:
Press the button.
Hands-free system
General information
Calls being conducted using the hands-free
system can be continued using the mobile
phone and vice versa.
From the mobile phone to the
hands-free system
Calls that have been initiated from outside the
Bluetooth range of the vehicle can be continued
using the hands-free system if the ignition is
switched on.
Depending on the mobile phone, the call is
automatically switched to hands-free mode.
If the switch does not occur automatically, then
follow the instructions that appear on the dis-
play of the mobile phone, also refer to the
owner's manual for the mobile phone.
From hands-free system to mobile
phone
Calls being conducted using the hands-free
system can also be continued using the mobile
phone if so desired, depending on the mobile
phone.
At this point, follow the instructions that appear
on the display of the mobile phone, also refer to
the owner's manual for the mobile phone.
Operation by voice
The concept
The mobile phone can be operated without
removing your hand from the steering wheel. In
many cases, the entry process is supported by
means of announcements or questions.
Symbols in the Owner's Manual
Voice commands
Activating voice activation system
1. Press the button on the steering wheel.
2. Say the command.
Deactivating voice activation system
Press the button on the steering wheel
or
Possible commands
Having possible commands read aloud
The system understands default commands
that must be spoken word for word.
Possible commands are read aloud.
Digits from zero to nine are recognized.
Each digit can be spoken individually or com-
bined into a sequence to accelerate the entry
process.
Using alternative commands
There are often a number of commands to run a
function, e.g.:
{...} Say the specified commands word for
word.
{{...}} Indicates responses of the voice acti-
vation system.
{Cancel}.
{Help}.
{Dial name} or {Name}.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
164
Communications Te l e p h o n e
Important for voice commands
When issuing voice commands, make sure to:
> Pronounce the commands smoothly and at
normal volume, avoiding excessive empha-
ses and pauses.
> Keep the doors, windows and glass roof
closed to prevent interference from outside
noise.
> Avoid ambient noise in the vehicle while
speaking.
Example: dialing phone numbers
1. Press the button on the steering wheel.
2. {Dial number}
The system replies: {{Please say the num-
ber}}.
3. For example: {123 456 7890}
The system replies: {{123 456 7890. Con-
tinue ?}}
4. {Dial}
The system replies: {{Dialing number}}
Calling
Dialing phone numbers
The connection to the desired subscriber is
established.
Correcting phone number
After the last spoken sequence of digits has
been repeated by the system, you can delete
this sequence of digits.
The command {Correct number} can be
repeated as often as you like.
Deleting phone number
All digits entered up to this point are deleted.
Voice phone book
A separate voice phone book is needed for
operation using voice commands. Names and
phone numbers of the voice phone book are
independent from the mobile phone memory or
the SIM card memory of the mobile phone. In
this case, phone numbers stored in the mobile
phone or on the SIM card cannot be accessed
by voice or stored in them by voice.
Storing the entry
An entry always consists of a name and a phone
number.
Selecting a phone number of an entry
Having entries read aloud
Redialing
To redial the phone number dialed last:
1. {Dial number}.
2. Say the phone number.
3. {Dial}.
{Correct number}.
The sequence of digits is deleted.
{Delete}.
1. {Save name}.
2. Say the name aloud.
Saying the name for the voice phone
book should not take longer than
approx. 2 seconds.
3. Say the phone number after being
prompted to do so by the system.
4. {Save}.
1. {Dial name}.
2. Say the name when prompted by the
system.
3. Confirm request: {Yes}
1. {Read phonebook}.
The dialog for reading phone book is
opened.
2. Say {Dial number} after the desired
entry is read.
{Redial}.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
165
Tel e p h o n e
Communications
Deleting an entry from the voice phone
book
You can delete any entry from the voice phone
book.
Deleting all entries from the voice
phone book
Adjusting volume
Turn the knob on the left during the announce-
ment.
> The volume remains the same, even if the
volume of other audio sources is changed.
> The volume is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
BMW phone numbers
It is possible to store phone numbers for several
BMW services without having BMW Assist acti-
vated. As soon as BMW Assist is activated, the
services of BMW Assist are available, refer to
page 167.
> "Road Assist": BMW Group Mobile Service,
if you require assistance in the event of a
breakdown.
> "Service": your BMW center, for example
when you wish to schedule a service
appointment.
> "Customer Relations": Customer Relations,
for information about your vehicle.
Displaying phone numbers
1. Switch on radio readiness or ignition.
2. Press the button.
3.
Press the button.
4. Turn the knob on the right until the desired
phone number is displayed.
Snap-in adapter
General information
Detailed information on snap-in adapters that
compatibly support mobile phone functions can
be found at your BMW center.
Notes
At high temperatures, the charging function of
the mobile phone may be limited and some
functions may no longer be carried out.
When using the mobile phone via the vehicle,
follow the instructions given in the owner's
manual for the mobile phone.
1. {Delete name}.
2. Say the name when prompted by the
system.
3. Confirm request: {Yes}
1. {Delete phonebook}.
The dialog for deleting phone book is
opened.
2. Confirm request: {Yes}
3. Confirm request again: {Yes}
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
166
Communications Te l e p h o n e
Inserting/removing snap-in adapter
1. Press button 1 and remove the cover.
2. Insert the snap-in adapter at the front,
arrow 1, and press downward, arrow 2, until
it clicks into place.
3. To remove the snap-in adapter, press the
button 1.
Inserting/removing mobile phone
1. Depending on the mobile phone, remove
the protective cap from the mobile phone's
antenna connector so that the mobile
phone can engage in the snap-in adapter.
2. Push the mobile phone with the buttons
facing upward toward the electrical connec-
tions and press down until it engages.
With the vehicle in radio readiness and above,
the battery is charged, refer to charging symbol
on the mobile phone.
To remove the mobile phone:
Press the button.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
167
ConnectedDrive
Communications
ConnectedDrive
Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and
optional equipment that is offered in the model
range is described. Equipment is also described
that is not available because of, for example,
selected options or country version. This also
applies to safety related functions and systems.
BMW Assist
General information
BMW Assist provides a number of different ser-
vices. For example, the position data of the
vehicle can be transmitted to the BMW Assist
Response Center when an Emergency Request
is sent.
Many BMW Assist services depend on the con-
tract individually agreed upon.
After the contract has expired, the BMW Assist
system will be deactivated by the BMW Assist
Response Center without you having to visit a
BMW center. After the BMW Assist system has
been deactivated, no BMW Assist services will
be available. The BMW Assist system can be
reactivated by a BMW center after a new con-
tract has been signed.
Requirements
> The installed BMW Assist system is logged
into a mobile phone network. This network
must be capable of transmitting the ser-
vices.
> To transmit position data, the vehicle must
be able to determine its current position.
> The BMW Assist was ordered at your BMW
center or the BMW Assist Response Center
and the service contract was signed. The
service must have been fully enabled.
> BMW Assist is activated.
Services offered
The following services are available through
BMW Assist:
> Emergency Request:
When you press the SOS button, a connec-
tion to the BMW Assist Response Center is
established. The BMW Assist Response
Center then speaks with you and takes fur-
ther steps to help you.
> Automatic Emergency Request:
Under certain conditions, a connection to
the BMW Assist Response Center is estab-
lished immediately after a serious accident.
If possible, the BMW Assist Response Cen-
ter then speaks with you and takes further
steps to help you.
> Enhanced Roadside Assistance:
BMW Roadside Assistance can be con-
tacted if assistance is needed in the event of
a breakdown. If possible, the vehicle data
and position data are transmitted during
this call.
> Customer Relations:
connection to Customer Relations for infor-
mation on all aspects of your vehicle.
> TeleServices:
data on your vehicle's service status or
required inspections are transmitted to your
BMW center, either automatically before a
service due date or when you request a
BMW service appointment.
> Remote Door Unlock:
the BMW Assist Response Center provides
assistance if, for example, the remote con-
trol is not available and the vehicle needs to
be opened.
> Stolen Vehicle Recovery:
after you report to the police that your vehi-
cle was stolen, the BMW Assist Response
Center can determine its position.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
168
Communications ConnectedDrive
> In addition, the optional Convenience Plan
offers Concierge service and information on
route planning, the traffic situation and
weather. Using Critical Calling, a limited
number of calls can be made via the BMW
Assist Response Center, for example if the
mobile phone is not available or discharged.
Press the SOS button to contact the
BMW Assist Response Center.
BMW TeleServices
General information
TeleServices supports communication with
your BMW center.
> Data on the vehicle's service requirements
can be sent directly to the BMW center. In
this way, the BMW center can plan its work
in advance. This shortens the duration of
the service appointment.
> In the event of a breakdown, data on the
vehicle's condition can be sent directly to
Roadside Assistance. It may be possible to
correct some malfunctions immediately.
> The service varies by country.
> Connection may incur charges.
> Services may be restricted abroad.
Requirements
> Vehicle is equipped with the preparation for
mobile phone Business.
> BMW Assist is activated.
If BMW Assist is not activated, then a
mobile phone that is recommended by
BMW for TeleServices and is configured for
mobile data communication must be con-
nected to the vehicle.
> SIM card is enabled for toll-free service
phone numbers.
> Wireless reception is available.
> Ignition switched on.
Using BMW TeleServices
BMW TeleService is generally activated in the
vehicle.
If TeleService is not activated, it is still possible
to establish a voice contact to the BMW Group
Mobile Service.
For additional uses or to deactivate the ser-
vices, consult your BMW center or contact Cus-
tomer Relations.
Activating or updating BMW
TeleService or BMW Assist
BMW TeleService or BMW Assist must be acti-
vated before their services can be used.
1. Switch on radio readiness or ignition.
2. Press the button.
3.
Press the button.
4.
Press the button.
5.
Press the button.
6.
Press the button.
BMW TeleService and where appropriate
BMW Assist are activated and the data
exchange with BMW Service begins. The
activation process takes a few minutes. The
respective status appears on the display.
Concierge service
The Concierge service of BMW Assist will
inform you, for example, about upcoming
events, filling station, or hotels and supplies you
with their phone numbers and addresses. Many
hotels can be booked directly through the BMW
Assist Concierge service. Use of the Concierge
service requires an additional activation by the
BMW Assist Response Center.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
169
ConnectedDrive
Communications
Starting the Concierge service
1. Switch on radio readiness or ignition.
2. Press the button.
3.
Press the button.
4.
Press the button.
5. Press the knob on the right to call the con-
cierge service.
Reading message
The message has not been read yet.
Dialing transmitted phone number
1. Select concierge and press the knob.
2. Select phone number and press the knob.
Deleting message
1. Select message and press the knob.
2.
Press the button.
Roadside Assistance
BMW Roadside Assistance can be contacted if
assistance is needed in the event of a break-
down. In a vehicle with TeleService, assistance
is first offered through the TeleService Diagno-
sis and then if necessary, through the TeleSer-
vice Help.
1. Switch on radio readiness or ignition.
2. Press the button.
3.
Press the button.
4.
Press the button.
Vehicle data that are required for the diag-
nosis by the BMW TeleService are trans-
mitted. The contact with BMW Roadside
Assistance is established. BMW Roadside
Assistance performs in-depth diagnosis of
the vehicle.
5.
After completion of each help task
by BMW Roadside Assistance, press the
button.
Automatic Service
Notification
The data regarding the maintenance status of
your vehicle or legally mandated inspections of
the vehicle are automatically transmitted prior
to a service due date.
Manual Service Notification
1. Switch on radio readiness or ignition.
2. Press the button.
3.
Press the button.
4.
Press the button.
The data relevant for the service are transmit-
ted. The service will contact you to arrange a
service appointment.
Customer Relations
Contact Customer Relations for information on
all aspects of your vehicle.
1. Switch on radio readiness or ignition.
2. Press the button.
3.
Press the button.
4.
Press the button.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
170
Communications ConnectedDrive
My Info
With this service, text messages associated
with phone numbers can be sent via the BMW
Assist Internet portal and displayed in the vehi-
cle.
1. Switch on radio readiness or ignition.
2. Press the button.
3.
Press the button.
4.
Press the button.
The messages sent are automatically dis-
played.
5. To display an existing message:
Select message and press the knob.
It is possible to display a maximum of ten mes-
sages. If additional messages are received,
existing messages are automatically deleted.
Reading message
The message has not been read yet.
Dialing transmitted phone number
If you have received a message with a phone
number, you can forward it to your phone and
dial the phone number.
1. Select message and press the knob.
2.
Press the button.
Deleting message
1. Select message and press the knob.
2.
Press the button.
Service status
Displaying services
1. Switch on radio readiness or ignition.
2. Press the button.
3.
Press the button.
4.
Press the button.
5.
Press the button.
6. Turn the knob on the right to display the
activated services.
Displaying vehicle data
With BMW TeleService or BMW Assist acti-
vated, you can have the vehicle identification
number of your vehicle displayed.
1. Switch on radio readiness or ignition.
2. Press the button.
3.
Press the button.
4.
Press the button.
5.
Press the button.
The BMW Assist profile of the vehicle is dis-
played.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
171
ConnectedDrive
Communications
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
This section helps you maintain your car's
mobility by supplying important information
on vital topics including fuels and lubricants,
wheels and tires, service, maintenance and
Roadside Assistance.
Mobility
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
174
Mobility Refueling
Refueling
Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and
optional equipment that is offered in the model
range is described. For this reason, descrip-
tions will be given of some equipment that may
not be available in a vehicle, for example due to
the special options or national-market version
selected. This also applies to safety related
functions and systems.
General information
Always switch off the engine before refu-
eling; otherwise, fuel cannot be added to
the tank and a message will be displayed.<
Take all precautionary measures and
observe all applicable regulations when
handling fuel. Do not carry any spare fuel con-
tainers in your vehicle. They can develop a leak
and cause an explosion or cause a fire in the
event of an accident.<
Fuel filler flap
Opening
1. Open the fuel filler flap. To do so, lightly
press the rear edge.
2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise.
3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket attached to
the fuel filler flap.
Closing
Fit the cap and turn it clockwise until you clearly
hear a click.
Do not pinch the band attached to the
cap; otherwise, the cap cannot be closed
properly and fuel vapors can escape.<
Manually releasing the fuel filler flap
In the event of a malfunction, you can release
the fuel filler flap manually:
Coupe
1. Remove the cover from the right-hand side-
wall of the cargo area.
2. Pull the knob with the fuel pump symbol.
The fuel filler flap is released.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
175
Refueling
Mobility
Convertible
1. Loosen the right-hand cargo area trim panel
by turning the screws by 90°, see arrow.
2. Slightly lift the top section of the panel. It is
not necessary to remove the entire panel.
3. Pull the knob with the fuel pump symbol.
The fuel filler flap is released.
Observe the following when refueling
When handling fuels, follow the safety
instructions provided at filling stations;
otherwise, there is a risk of personal injury or
property damage.<
When refueling, insert the filler nozzle com-
pletely into the filler pipe. Avoid lifting the filler
nozzle while filling the tank, as that would lead
to
> Premature pump shutoff
> Reduced efficiency of the fuel-vapor recov-
ery system.
The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks
off the first time.
Fuel tank capacity
Approx. 16.1 US gal/61 liters, including the
reserve capacity of 2.1 US gal/8 liters.
Refuel as soon as possible once your
cruising range falls below 30 miles/
50 km; otherwise, engine functions are not
ensured and damage can occur.<
Fuel specifications
Gasoline engine: required fuel
Never use fuels labeled at the fuel pump as
metal-containing.
Do not use leaded gasoline or gasoline
with metal-containing additives doing so
can cause permanent damage to the catalytic
converter or other components.<
Do not fill the tank with E85, i.e. fuel con-
taining 85Ξ ethanol, nor with FlexFuel.
Otherwise, the engine and fuel supply system
will be damaged.<
Super Premium Gasoline/AKI 91
BMW recommends AKI 91.
Gasoline with lower AKI
The minimum AKI Rating is:
> 328i/xDrive: 87
> 335i, 335i/xDrive: 89.
If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rat-
ing, the engine may produce knocking sounds
when starting at high outside temperatures.
This has no effect on the engine life.
Do not use any gasoline below the speci-
fied minimum fuel grade. Otherwise, the
engine could be damaged.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
176
Mobility Refueling
Use high-quality brands
Field experience has indicated significant dif-
ferences in fuel quality: volatility, composition,
additives, etc., among gasolines offered for sale
in the United States and Canada. Fuels contain-
ing up to and including 10Ξ ethanol or other
oxygenates with up to 2.8Ξ oxygen by weight,
that is, 15Ξ MTBE or 3Ξ methanol plus an
equivalent amount of cosolvent, will not void the
applicable warranties with respect to defects in
materials or workmanship.
The use of poor-quality fuels may result in
drivability, starting and stalling problems
especially under certain environmental condi-
tions such as high ambient temperature and
high altitude.
Should you encounter drivability problems
which you suspect could be related to the fuel
you are using, we recommend that you respond
by switching to a recognized high-quality brand
such as gasoline that is advertised as Top Tier
Detergent Gasoline.
Failure to comply with these recommendations
may also result in unscheduled maintenance.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
177
Wheels and tires
Mobility
Wheels and tires
Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and
optional equipment that is offered in the model
range is described. For this reason, descrip-
tions will be given of some equipment that may
not be available in a vehicle, for example due to
the special options or national-market version
selected. This also applies to safety related
functions and systems.
Tire inflation pressures
Information for your safety
It is not merely the tires' service life, but also
driving comfort and, to a great extent, driving
safety that depend on the condition of the tires
and the maintenance of the specified tire pres-
sure.
Check the tire inflation pressure regularly
and correct it, if necessary: at least twice a
month and before starting long trips. If you fail
to observe this precaution you may be driving
on tires with incorrect tire pressures, a condi-
tion that can not only compromise your vehi-
cle's driving stability, but also lead to tire dam-
age and the risk of an accident. Do not drive
with deflated, i.e. flat tires, except when using
run-flat tires. A flat tire will seriously impair your
vehicle's handling and braking response.
Attempts to drive on a flat tire can lead to loss of
control over the vehicle.<
Checking pressure
Only check tire inflation pressure when the
tires are cold. This means after a maximum of
1.25 miles/2 km driving or when the vehicle has
been parked for at least 2 hours. When tires are
warm, the tire inflation pressure is higher.
After correcting the tire inflation pressure,
reset the Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to
page 95, or reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor,
refer to page 93.<
Inflation pressure specifications
The tables below provide all the correct inflation
pressures for the specified tire sizes at ambient
temperature.
The inflation pressures apply to the tire
sizes approved and tire brands recom-
mended by BMW; a list of these is available
from your BMW center.<
For correct identification of the right tire infla-
tion pressures, observe the following:
> Tire sizes for your vehicle
> Maximum allowable driving speed
Tire inflation pressures for driving up to
100 mph or 160 km/h
For normal driving up to 100 mph or 160 km/h
and to achieve optimum driving comfort, adjust
pressures to the respective tire inflation pres-
sures listed on the following pages in the col-
umns for traveling speeds up to a maximum of
100 mph or 160 km/h.
These tire inflation pressures can also be found
on the driver's side door pillar when the driver's
door is open.
The maximum permissible speed for
these tire pressures is 100 mph or
160 km/h. Do not exceed this speed; otherwise,
tire damage and accidents could occur.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
178
Mobility Wheels and tires
Tire inflation pressures for driving
above 100 mph or 160 km/h
In order to drive at maximum speeds in
excess of 100 mph or 160 km/h, adjust
pressures to the respective tire inflation pres-
sures listed on the following pages in the col-
umns for traveling speeds including those
exceeding 100 mph or 160 km/h. Otherwise,
tire damage and accidents could occur.<
Observe all national and local maximum speed
limits; otherwise, violations of the laws could
occur.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
179
Wheels and tires
Mobility
Coupe: tire inflation pressures for the 328i
Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI
Traveling speeds up
to a max. of
100 mph/160 km/h
Traveling speeds
including those
exceeding
100 mph/160 km/h
All pressure specifications in the table are
indicated in bar/PSI with cold tires.
Cold = ambient temperature
Without Sport Package:
205/55 R 16 91 H M+S RSC
225/50 R 16 92 H M+S RSC
225/45 R 17 91 H M+S A/S RSC
225/45 R 17 91 H M+S RSC
225/45 R 17 91 V RSC
2.2/32 2.6/38 2.5/36 3.0/44
225/45 R 17 94 V M+S XL 2.2/32 2.7/39 2.5/36 3.0/44
Front: 225/45 R 17 91 V 2.2/32 - 2.5/36 -
Rear: 255/40 R 17 94 V - 2.4/35 - 2.7/39
Front: 225/40 R 18 88 W RSC 2.2/32 - 2.5/36 -
Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 W RSC - 2.7/39 - 2.9/42
Front: 225/35 R 19 88 Y XL 2.5/36 - 2.5/36 -
Rear: 255/30 R 19 91 Y XL - 3.0/44 - 3.0/44
Compact spare wheel:
T 125/80 R 17 99 M
Traveling speeds up to a max. of 50 mph/80 km/h
4.2/60
With Sport Package:
205/55 R 16 91 H M+S
225/50 R 16 92 H M+S
225/45 R 17 91 H M+S
2.2/32 2.6/38 2.5/36 3.0/44
225/45 R 17 91 V 2.2/32 2.6/38 2.9/42 3.4/49
225/45 R 17 94 V M+S XL 2.2/32 2.7/39 2.9/42 3.4/49
Front: 225/45 R 17 91 V 2.2/32 - 2.9/42 -
Rear: 255/40 R 17 94 V - 2.4/35 - 3.0/44
Front: 225/40 R 18 88 W RSC 2.2/32 - 2.7/39 -
Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 W RSC - 2.7/39 - 3.2/46
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
180
Mobility Wheels and tires
Front: 225/35 R 19 88 Y XL 2.5/36 - 2.7/39 -
Rear: 255/30 R 19 91 Y XL - 3.0/44 - 3.2/46
Compact spare wheel:
T 125/80 R 17 99 M
Traveling speeds up to a max. of 50 mph/80 km/h
4.2/60
Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI
Traveling speeds up
to a max. of
100 mph/160 km/h
Traveling speeds
including those
exceeding
100 mph/160 km/h
All pressure specifications in the table are
indicated in bar/PSI with cold tires.
Cold = ambient temperature
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
181
Wheels and tires
Mobility
Coupe: tire inflation pressures for the 328xi
Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI
Traveling speeds up
to a max. of
100 mph/160 km/h
Traveling speeds
including those
exceeding
100 mph/160 km/h
All pressure specifications in the table are
indicated in bar/PSI with cold tires.
Cold = ambient temperature
Without Sport Package:
205/55 R 16 91 H M+S RSC
225/50 R 16 92 H M+S RSC
225/45 R 17 91 H M+S A/S RSC
225/45 R 17 91 H M+S RSC
225/45 R 17 91 V RSC
2.2/32 2.6/38 2.4/35 2.9/42
225/45 R 17 94 V M+S XL 2.2/32 2.7/39 2.5/36 3.0/44
Front: 225/45 R 17 91 V 2.2/32 - 2.3/33 -
Rear: 255/40 R 17 94 V - 2.3/33 - 2.7/39
Front: 225/40 R 18 88 W RSC 2.3/33 - 2.5/36 -
Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 W RSC - 2.6/38 - 2.9/42
Front: 225/35 R 19 88 Y XL 2.7/39 - 2.7/39 -
Rear: 255/30 R 19 91 Y XL - 3.0/44 - 3.0/44
Compact spare wheel:
T 125/80 R 17 99 M
Traveling speeds up to a max. of 50 mph/80 km/h
4.2/60
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
182
Mobility Wheels and tires
With Sport Package:
205/55 R 16 91 H M+S
225/50 R 16 92 H M+S
225/45 R 17 91 H M+S
2.2/32 2.6/38 2.4/35 2.9/42
225/45 R 17 91 V 2.2/32 2.6/38 2.8/41 3.3/48
225/45 R 17 94 V M+S XL 2.2/32 2.7/39 2.8/41 3.3/48
Front: 225/45 R 17 91 V 2.2/32 - 2.8/41 -
Rear: 255/40 R 17 94 V - 2.3/33 - 2.9/42
Front: 225/40 R 18 88 W RSC 2.3/33 - 2.7/39 -
Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 W RSC - 2.6/38 - 3.2/46
Front: 225/35 R 19 88 Y XL 2.7/39 - 2.8/41 -
Rear: 255/30 R 19 91 Y XL - 3.0/44 - 3.2/46
Compact spare wheel:
T 125/80 R 17 99 M
Traveling speeds up to a max. of 50 mph/80 km/h
4.2/60
Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI
Traveling speeds up
to a max. of
100 mph/160 km/h
Traveling speeds
including those
exceeding
100 mph/160 km/h
All pressure specifications in the table are
indicated in bar/PSI with cold tires.
Cold = ambient temperature
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
183
Wheels and tires
Mobility
Coupe: tire inflation pressures for the 335i
Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI
Traveling speeds up
to a max. of
100 mph/160 km/h
Traveling speeds
including those
exceeding
100 mph/160 km/h
All pressure specifications in the table are
indicated in bar/PSI with cold tires.
Cold = ambient temperature
Without Sport Package:
225/45 R 17 91 H M+S
225/45 R 17 91 H M+S
2.2/32 2.7/39 2.6/38 3.1/45
225/45 R 17 94 V M+S XL 2.3/33 2.8/41 2.6/38 3.1/45
Front: 225/45 R 17 91 V 2.2/32 - 2.6/38 -
Rear: 255/40 R 17 94 V - 2.4/35 - 2.8/41
Front: 225/40 R 18 88 W RSC 2.2/32 - 2.6/38 -
Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 W RSC - 2.7/39 - 3.1/45
Front: 225/40 R 18 88 Y 2.2/32 - 2.4/35 -
Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 Y - 2.7/39 - 2.8/41
Front: 225/35 R 19 88 Y XL 2.6/38 - 2.6/38 -
Rear: 255/30 R 19 91 Y XL - 3.1/45 - 3.1/45
Compact spare wheel:
T 125/80 R 17 99 M
Traveling speeds up to a max. of 50 mph/80 km/h
4.2/60
With Sport Package:
225/45 R 17 91 H M+S 2.2/32 2.7/39 2.6/38 3.1/45
225/45 R 17 94 V M+S XL 2.3/33 2.8/41 2.9/42 3.4/49
Front: 225/45 R 17 91 V 2.2/32 - 2.6/38 -
Rear: 255/40 R 17 94 V - 2.4/35 - 3.0/44
Front: 225/40 R 18 88 W RSC 2.2/32 - 2.8/41 -
Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 W RSC - 2.7/39 - 3.3/48
Front: 225/40 R 18 88 Y 2.2/32 - 2.5/36 -
Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 Y - 2.7/39 - 3.0/44
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
184
Mobility Wheels and tires
Front: 225/35 R 19 88 Y XL 2.6/38 - 2.8/41 -
Rear: 255/30 R 19 91 Y XL - 3.1/45 - 3.3/48
Compact spare wheel:
T 125/80 R 17 99 M
Traveling speeds up to a max. of 50 mph/80 km/h
4.2/60
Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI
Traveling speeds up
to a max. of
100 mph/160 km/h
Traveling speeds
including those
exceeding
100 mph/160 km/h
All pressure specifications in the table are
indicated in bar/PSI with cold tires.
Cold = ambient temperature
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
185
Wheels and tires
Mobility
Coupe: tire inflation pressures for the 335xi
Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI
Traveling speeds up
to a max. of
100 mph/160 km/h
Traveling speeds
including those
exceeding
100 mph/160 km/h
All pressure specifications in the table are
indicated in bar/PSI with cold tires.
Cold = ambient temperature
Without Sport Package:
225/45 R 17 91 H M+S
225/45 R 17 91 H M+S
2.2/32 2.7/39 2.7/39 3.1/45
225/45 R 17 94 V M+S XL 2.3/33 2.8/41 2.7/39 3.1/45
Front: 225/45 R 17 91 V 2.2/32 - 2.7/39 -
Rear: 255/40 R 17 94 V - 2.4/35 - 2.7/39
Front: 225/40 R 18 88 W RSC 2.4/35 - 2.6/38 -
Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 W RSC - 2.7/39 - 2.9/42
Front: 225/40 R 18 88 Y 2.4/35 - 2.4/35 -
Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 Y - 2.7/39 - 2.7/39
Front: 225/35 R 19 88 Y XL 2.7/39 - 2.7/39 -
Rear: 255/30 R 19 91 Y XL - 3.1/45 - 3.1/45
Compact spare wheel:
T 125/80 R 17 99 M
Traveling speeds up to a max. of 50 mph/80 km/h
4.2/60
With Sport Package:
225/45 R 17 91 H M+S 2.2/32 2.7/39 2.7/39 3.1/45
225/45 R 17 94 V M+S XL 2.3/33 2.8/41 2.9/42 3.4/49
Front: 225/45 R 17 91 V 2.2/32 - 2.7/39 -
Rear: 255/40 R 17 94 V - 2.4/35 - 3.0/44
Front: 225/40 R 18 88 W RSC 2.4/35 - 2.9/42 -
Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 W RSC - 2.7/39 - 3.3/48
Front: 225/40 R 18 88 Y 2.4/35 - 2.7/39 -
Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 Y - 2.7/39 - 2.9/42
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
186
Mobility Wheels and tires
Front: 225/35 R 19 88 Y XL 2.7/39 - 2.9/42 -
Rear: 255/30 R 19 91 Y XL - 3.1/45 - 3.3/48
Compact spare wheel:
T 125/80 R 17 99 M
Traveling speeds up to a max. of 50 mph/80 km/h
4.2/60
Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI
Traveling speeds up
to a max. of
100 mph/160 km/h
Traveling speeds
including those
exceeding
100 mph/160 km/h
All pressure specifications in the table are
indicated in bar/PSI with cold tires.
Cold = ambient temperature
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
187
Wheels and tires
Mobility
Coupe: inflation pressures 335is
Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI
Traveling speeds up
to a max. of
100 mph/160 km/h
Traveling speeds
including those
exceeding
100 mph/160 km/h
All pressure specifications in the table are
indicated in bar/PSI with cold tires.
Cold = ambient temperature
225/45 R 17 91 H M+S 2.2/32 2.7/39 2.6/38 3.1/45
225/45 R 17 94 V M+S XL 2.4/35 2.9/42 3.0/44 3.4/49
Front: 225/40 R 18 88 W RSC 2.3/33 - 2.9/42 -
Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 W RSC - 2.8/41 - 3.4/49
Front: 225/40 R 18 88 Y 2.3/33 - 2.6/38 -
Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 Y - 2.8/41 - 3.1/45
Front: 225/35 R 19 88 Y XL 2.7/39 - 2.9/42 -
Rear: 255/30 R 19 91 Y XL - 3.2/46 - 3.4/49
Compact spare wheel:
T 125/80 R 17 99 M
Traveling speeds up to a max. of 50 mph/80 km/h
4.2/60
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
188
Mobility Wheels and tires
Convertible: tire inflation pressures for the 328i
Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI
Traveling speeds up
to a max. of
100 mph/160 km/h
Traveling speeds
including those
exceeding
100 mph/160 km/h
All pressure specifications in the table are
indicated in bar/PSI with cold tires.
Cold = ambient temperature
Without Sport Package:
205/55 R 16 91 H M+S
225/50 R 16 92 H M+S
2.3/33 2.8/41 2.5/36 3.0/44
225/45 R 17 91 H M+S
225/45 R 17 91 H M+S
2.3/33 2.8/41 2.7/39 3.2/46
225/45 R 17 91 W RSC 2.3/33 2.8/41 2.5/36 3.0/44
225/45 R 17 94 V M+S XL 2.4/35 2.9/42 2.7/39 3.2/46
Front: 225/45 R 17 91 V 2.2/32 - 2.5/36 -
Rear: 255/40 R 17 94 V - 2.5/36 - 2.9/42
Front: 225/40 R 18 88 W RSC 2.4/35 - 2.6/38 -
Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 W RSC - 2.9/42 - 3.1/45
Front: 225/40 R 18 88 Y 2.4/35 - 2.4/35 -
Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 Y - 2.9/42 - 2.9/42
Front: 225/35 R 19 88 Y XL 2.7/39 - 2.7/39 -
Rear: 255/30 R 19 91 Y XL - 3.2/46 - 3.2/46
Compact spare wheel:
T 125/80 R 17 99 M
Traveling speeds up to a max. of 50 mph/80 km/h
4.2/60
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
189
Wheels and tires
Mobility
With Sport Package:
205/55 R 16 91 H M+S
225/50 R 16 92 H M+S
2.3/33 2.8/41 2.5/36 3.0/44
225/45 R 17 91 H M+S RSC
225/45 R 17 91 W RSC
2.3/33 2.8/41 2.8/41 3.3/48
225/45 R 17 94 V M+S XL 2.4/35 2.9/42 2.9/42 3.4/49
Front: 225/45 R 17 91 V 2.2/32 - 2.8/41 -
Rear: 255/40 R 17 94 V - 2.5/36 - 3.1/45
Front: 225/40 R 18 88 W RSC 2.4/35 - 2.9/42 -
Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 W RSC - 2.9/42 - 3.4/49
Front: 225/40 R 18 88 Y 2.4/35 - 2.6/38 -
Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 Y - 2.9/42 - 3.1/45
Front: 225/35 R 19 88 Y XL 2.7/39 - 2.9/42 -
Rear: 255/30 R 19 91 Y XL - 3.2/46 - 3.4/49
Compact spare wheel:
T 125/80 R 17 99 M
Traveling speeds up to a max. of 50 mph/80 km/h
4.2/60
Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI
Traveling speeds up
to a max. of
100 mph/160 km/h
Traveling speeds
including those
exceeding
100 mph/160 km/h
All pressure specifications in the table are
indicated in bar/PSI with cold tires.
Cold = ambient temperature
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
190
Mobility Wheels and tires
Convertible: tire inflation pressures for the 335i
Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI
Traveling speeds up
to a max. of
100 mph/160 km/h
Traveling speeds
including those
exceeding
100 mph/160 km/h
All pressure specifications in the table are
indicated in bar/PSI with cold tires.
Cold = ambient temperature
Without Sport Package:
225/45 R 17 91 H M+S
225/45 R 17 91 H M+S
2.3/33 2.8/41 2.7/39 3.2/46
225/45 R 17 94 V M+S XL 2.4/35 2.9/42 2.7/39 3.2/46
Front: 225/45 R 17 91 V 2.2/32 - 2.5/36 -
Rear: 255/40 R 17 94 V - 2.5/36 - 2.9/42
Front: 225/40 R 18 88 W RSC 2.4/35 - 2.6/38 -
Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 W RSC - 2.9/42 - 3.1/45
Front: 225/40 R 18 88 Y 2.4/35 - 2.4/35 -
Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 Y - 2.9/42 - 2.9/42
Front: 225/35 R 19 88 Y XL 2.7/39 - 2.7/39 -
Rear: 255/30 R 19 91 Y XL - 3.2/46 - 3.2/46
Compact spare wheel:
T 125/80 R 17 99 M
Traveling speeds up to a max. of 50 mph/80 km/h
4.2/60
With Sport Package:
225/45 R 17 91 H M+S 2.3/33 2.8/41 2.7/39 3.2/46
225/45 R 17 94 V M+S XL 2.4/35 2.9/42 2.9/42 3.4/49
Front: 225/45 R 17 91 V 2.2/32 - 2.8/41 -
Rear: 255/40 R 17 94 V - 2.5/36 - 3.1/45
Front: 225/40 R 18 88 W RSC 2.4/35 - 2.9/42 -
Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 W RSC - 2.9/42 - 3.4/49
Front: 225/40 R 18 88 Y 2.4/35 - 2.6/38 -
Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 Y - 2.9/42 - 3.1/45
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
191
Wheels and tires
Mobility
Front: 225/35 R 19 88 Y XL 2.7/39 - 2.9/42 -
Rear: 255/30 R 19 91 Y XL - 3.2/46 - 3.4/49
Compact spare wheel:
T 125/80 R 17 99 M
Traveling speeds up to a max. of 50 mph/80 km/h
4.2/60
Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI
Traveling speeds up
to a max. of
100 mph/160 km/h
Traveling speeds
including those
exceeding
100 mph/160 km/h
All pressure specifications in the table are
indicated in bar/PSI with cold tires.
Cold = ambient temperature
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
192
Mobility Wheels and tires
Convertible: inflation pressures 335is
Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI
Traveling speeds up
to a max. of
100 mph/160 km/h
Traveling speeds
including those
exceeding
100 mph/160 km/h
All pressure specifications in the table are
indicated in bar/PSI with cold tires.
Cold = ambient temperature
225/45 R 17 91 H M+S 2.3/33 2.8/41 2.7/39 3.2/46
225/45 R 17 94 V M+S XL 2.4/35 2.9/42 2.9/42 3.4/49
Front: 225/40 R 18 88 W RSC 2.4/35 - 2.9/42 -
Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 W RSC - 2.9/42 - 3.4/49
Front: 225/40 R 18 88 Y 2.4/35 - 2.6/38 -
Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 Y - 2.9/42 - 3.1/45
Front: 225/35 R 19 88 Y XL 2.7/39 - 2.9/42 -
Rear: 255/30 R 19 91 Y XL - 3.2/46 - 3.4/49
Compact spare wheel:
T 125/80 R 17 99 M
Traveling speeds up to a max. of 50 mph/80 km/h
4.2/60
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
193
Wheels and tires
Mobility
Tire identification marks
Knowledge of the labeling on the side of the tire
makes it easier to identify and choose the right
tires.
Tire size
Speed code letter
Q = up to 100 mph or 160 km/h
T = up to 118 mph or 190 km/h
H = up to 131 mph or 210 km/h
V = up to 150 mph or 240 km/h
W = up to 167 mph or 270 km/h
Y = up to 186 mph or 300 km/h
Tire Identification Number
Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of
the US Department of Transportation.
DOT code:
Tire age
The manufacturing date of tires is contained in
the tire coding: DOT … 1011 means that the
tire was manufactured in week 10 of 2011.
BMW recommends that you replace all tires
after 6 years at most, even if some tires may last
for 10 years.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applicable
on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For example:
Tread wear 200 Traction AA
Temperature A
DOT Quality Grades
Tread wear
Traction AA A B C
Temperature A B C
All passenger car tires must conform to
Federal Safety Requirements in addition
to these grades.<
Tread wear
The tread wear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified gov-
ernment test course. For example, a tire graded
150 would wear one and one-half (1γ) times as
well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use, how-
ever, and may depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving habits, service
practices and differences in road characteris-
tics and climate.
Traction
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
AA, A, B, and C.
Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop
on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test sur-
faces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C
may have poor traction performance.
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration, cor-
nering, hydroplaning, or peak traction charac-
teristics.<
e.g.
Nominal width in mm
Aspect ratio in Ξ
Radial belt construction
Rim diameter in inches
Load rating, not on ZR tires
Speed code letter, in
front of the R on ZR tires
225/45 R 1791 V
e.g.
Manufacturer's
code for tire make
Tire size and tire design
Tire age
DOT xxxx xxx 1011
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
194
Mobility Wheels and tires
Temperature
The temperature grades are A, the highest, B,
and C, representing the tire's resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce
tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to
a level of performance which all passenger car
tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehi-
cle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel than the minimum
required by law.
The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly
inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading, either sep-
arately or in combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.<
RSC – run-flat tires
You will recognize run-flat tires by a circular
symbol containing the letters RSC on the side
of the tire, refer to page 195.
M+S
Winter and all-season tires.
These have better winter properties than sum-
mer tires.
XL
Designation for specially reinforced tires.
Tire condition
Inspect your tires frequently for tread wear,
signs of damage and for foreign objects lodged
in the tread. Check the tread depth.
Minimum tread depth
The tread depth should not drop below 0.12 in/
3 mm, although, for example, European legisla-
tion only specifies a minimum tread depth of
0.063 in/1.6 mm. At tread depths below 0.12 in/
3 mm there is an increased risk of high-speed
hydroplaning, even when only small amounts of
water are present on the road surface.
When winter tires wear down past a tread depth
of 0.16 in/4 mm, they become perceptibly less
suitable for winter conditions. In the interest of
safety, new tires should be installed.
Wear indicators in the base of the tread groove
are distributed around the tire's circumference;
the letters TWI, for Tread Wear Indicator, on the
tire's sidewalls identify tires that incorporate
these wear indicators. Once the tire tread has
worn down to the wear indicators, the tire has
worn to a depth of 0.063 in/1.6 mm.
Wheel/tire damage
Driving over rough or damaged road surfaces,
as well as debris, curbs and other obstacles can
cause serious damage to wheels, tires, and sus-
pension parts. This is more likely to occur with
low-profile tires, which provide less cushioning
between the wheel and the road. Be careful to
avoid road hazards and reduce your speed,
especially if your vehicle is equipped with low-
profile tires.
Unusual vibrations encountered during normal
vehicle operation can indicate tire failure or
some other vehicle defect. This can, for exam-
ple, be caused by driving over curbs. The same
applies to any other abnormal road behavior,
such as pulling severely to the right or left.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
195
Wheels and tires
Mobility
In these cases, reduce speed immedi-
ately and have wheels and tires thor-
oughly checked. To do so, drive carefully to the
nearest BMW center or tire dealer. If necessary,
have the vehicle towed there.
Otherwise, tire damage can pose a lethal hazard
to vehicle occupants and other road users.<
Tire age
For various reasons, such as the development
of brittleness, BMW recommends tire replace-
ment after no more than 6 years, regardless of
the actual wear of the tires.
The manufacturing date of tires is contained in
the tire coding:
DOT... 3010 means that the tire was manufac-
tured in week 30 of 2010.
New wheels and tires
Have new wheels and tires mounted only
by your BMW center or by a tire dealer. If
this work is not carried out properly, there is a
danger of subsequent damage and related
safety hazards. Make sure that the new wheels
are balanced.<
Retreaded tires
BMW recommends that you do not use
retreaded tires, since driving safety may
be impaired. The causes for this include poten-
tially different tire casing structures and often
wide variations in tire age, which can result in a
limited service life.<
Correct wheels and tires
When mounting new tires or changing over
from summer to winter tires and vice versa,
mount run-flat tires for your own safety. In the
event of a flat, no spare wheel is available. Your
BMW center will be glad to advise you.
BMW recommends that you use only
wheel and tire combinations that BMW
has tested and approved for your particular
vehicle. Variations in factors such as manufac-
turing tolerances mean that even wheels and
tires with identical official size ratings could
actually have different dimensions, which could
lead to body contact and thus to severe acci-
dents. If non-approved wheels and tires are
used, BMW cannot evaluate their suitability,
and therefore cannot guarantee their driving
safety.<
You can inquire about the right wheel/tire com-
bination at your BMW center.
The correct combination of wheels and tires is
also necessary to ensure reliable operation of
various vehicle systems such as ABS, DSC or
FTM.
To maintain good handling and vehicle
response, use only tires of a single brand and
tread configuration. After a tire has been dam-
aged, mount the previous wheel and tire combi-
nation again as soon as possible.
Wheels with Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM electronics
When mounting new tires or changing over
from summer to winter tires, or vice versa, only
use wheels with TPM electronics; otherwise,
the Tire Pressure Monitor may not be able to
detect a puncture, refer to page 95. Your BMW
center will be glad to advise you.
Recommended tire brands
Certain makes of tire are recommended by
BMW for each tire size. They are marked with a
clearly visible BMW designation on the sidewall
of the tire.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
196
Mobility Wheels and tires
When properly used, these tires meet the high-
est standards in terms of safety and handling
characteristics.
Special characteristics of winter tires
BMW recommends winter tires for driving on
winter roads or at temperatures below +457/
+76. Although all-season M+S tires provide
better winter traction than summer tires, they
generally fail to provide the same levels of cold-
weather performance as winter tires.
Pay attention to speed
Always comply with the speed limit for the
winter tires mounted on your car; failure
to do so could result in tire damage and acci-
dents.<
If the car is capable of speeds higher than that
permitted for the winter tires, a label stating the
maximum permitted speed for the mounted
tires must be displayed in your field of view.
Specialist tire dealers and your BMW center
can supply these labels.
Storage
Always store wheels and tires in a cool, dry
place with as little exposure to light as possible.
Always protect tires against all contact with oil,
grease and fuels. Do not exceed the maximum
tire inflation pressure indicated on the sidewall
of the tire.
Swapping wheels between axles
BMW advises against swapping wheels
between the front and rear axles, even if all tires
have the same size, as this could impair driving
characteristics. If the tires are of mixed sizes,
swapping wheels between the axles is not per-
missible.
Run-flat tires
The symbol identifying run-flat tires is a circle
with the letters RSC on the sidewall.
Run-flat tires comprise a conditionally self-sup-
porting tire and a special rim. The reinforce-
ment in the sidewalls ensures that the tire can
continue to be used subject to certain restric-
tions, even if depressurized.
For information on continuing to drive with a flat
tire, refer to Indication of a flat tire, page 94.
Snow chains
Only certain fine-link snow chains have been
tested by BMW, classified as safe for use and
recommended. Consult your BMW center for
more information.
Snow chains must be mounted in pairs and on
the rear wheels only. Observe the manufac-
turer's instructions when mounting snow
chains. Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph or
50 km/h.
Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor if
snow chains are mounted; otherwise, the
instrument might issue an incorrect reading.
When driving with snow chains, you may find it
helpful to activate DTC temporarily, refer to
page 91.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
197
Engine compartment
Mobility
Engine compartment
Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and
optional equipment that is offered in the model
range is described. For this reason, descrip-
tions will be given of some equipment that may
not be available in a vehicle, for example due to
the special options or national-market version
selected. This also applies to safety related
functions and systems.
Important parts of the engine compartment
1 Expansion tank for coolant, refer to
page 200
2 Washer fluid filler neck for headlamp clean-
ing system and window washer system,
refer to page 69
3 Jump-starting connection, refer to
page 216
4 Filler neck for engine oil, refer to Adding
engine oil
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
198
Mobility Engine compartment
Hood
Do not work on the car unless you pos-
sess the necessary technical knowledge.
If you are not familiar with the regulations to be
followed, have the necessary work on the vehi-
cle carried out only by your BMW center; if this
work is not carried out properly, there is a dan-
ger of subsequent damage and related safety
hazards.<
Releasing
Pull the lever.
Opening
In order to avoid damage, make sure that
the wiper arms are against the windshield
before you open the hood. Do not open the
engine hood before the engine has cooled
down; otherwise, injuries may result.<
Press the release handle and open the hood.
Closing
Let the hood drop from a height of approx. 10 in/
25 cm. It must be clearly heard to engage.
Make sure that the closing path of the
hood is clear; otherwise, injuries may
result.
If you see any signs while driving your vehicle
that the hood is not completely closed, stop at
once and close it securely.<
Engine oil
The engine oil consumption is dependent on
driving style and driving conditions.
Checking oil level
Your car is equipped with an electronic oil-level
monitor.
For a precise measurement and display of the
oil level, it is necessary that the engine be at
operating temperature, i.e. after uninterrupted
driving for at least approx. 6.2 miles/10 km. You
can have the oil level displayed while you are
driving, or while the vehicle is at a standstill on a
level surface and the engine is running.
You can have the oil level reading displayed in
the instrument cluster.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
199
Engine compartment
Mobility
1. Push button 1 in the turn signal/high beam
lever up or down repeatedly until the appro-
priate symbol is shown in the display,
accompanied by the word "OIL".
2. Press button 2 in the turn signal/high beam
lever.
The oil level is checked and the reading dis-
played.
Possible displays
1 Oil level OK
2 Oil level is being checked.
This can take about 3 minutes if the car is at
a standstill on a level surface, or about
5 minutes while the car is on the move.
3 Oil level down to minimum:
Add engine oil as soon as possible, but no
more than 1 US quart/1 liter, refer also to
Adding engine oil on page 199.
4 Oil level is too high.
Too much oil will harm the engine.
Have the vehicle checked without
delay.<
5 The oil level sensor is defective.
Do not add engine oil. You can continue
your journey. Note the newly calculated dis-
tance remaining to the next oil service, refer
to page 84. Have the system checked as
soon as possible.
Adding engine oil
Do not add 1 US quart/1 liter of engine oil until
the following warning lamp lights up in the
instrument cluster, or until the oil level monitor
shows "+1qt" or "+1l".
Add oil within the next 125 miles/200 km;
otherwise, the engine could be dam-
aged.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
200
Mobility Engine compartment
If the engine oil is too high, have the vehi-
cle checked immediately; failure to do so
may result in engine damage.<
Keep oils, greases, etc. out of the reach of
children and comply with the relevant
warnings on the containers. Otherwise, health
hazards may result.<
Oil grades to add
Do not use oil additives as this could
result in engine damage.<
When selecting an engine oil, make sure
to use one from the SAE viscosity classes
0W-40, 0W-30, 5W-40 or 5W-30; failure to do
so may result in malfunctions or engine dam-
age.<
The engine oil quality is critical for the life of the
engine.
Some oil grades may not be available in all
countries.
Approved oil grades
Additional information about approved oil
grades is available at your BMW center.
Alternative oil types
If approved oils are not available, you can add
quantities of up to 1 US quart/1 liter of another
oil with the following specifications:
Oil change
Oil changes should only be performed by a
BMW center.
Coolant
Coolant consists of half water and half additive.
Not all commercially available additives are suit-
able for your BMW. Ask your BMW center about
suitable additives.
Only use suitable additives; otherwise,
engine damage may result. Because
additives are harmful to your health, it is impor-
tant to follow the instructions on the contain-
ers.<
Comply with the appropriate environ-
mental protection regulations when dis-
posing of coolant additives.<
Coolant temperature
If the coolant and therefore the engine over-
heats, a warning lamp lights up, refer to
page 220.
Gasoline engine
BMW High Performance SAE 5W-30
BMW Longlife-01
BMW Longlife-01 FE
Diesel engine
BMW Longlife-04
Gasoline engine
API SM or higher
Diesel engine
API ILSAC GF-5
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
201
Engine compartment
Mobility
Checking coolant level
Do not add coolant to the cooling system
when the engine is hot. Escaping coolant
can cause burns.<
1. Do not open the engine hood before the
engine has cooled down.
2. Turn the cap of the expansion tank a little
counterclockwise to allow any accumulated
pressure to escape, then continue turning
to open.
3. The coolant level is correct if it is between
the maximum and minimum marks in the
filler neck, refer also to the diagram next to
the filler neck.
4. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up to
the specified level; do not overfill.
5. Turn the cap until there is an audible click.
6. Have the reason for the coolant loss elimi-
nated as soon as possible.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
202
Mobility Maintenance
Maintenance
Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and
optional equipment that is offered in the model
range is described. For this reason, descrip-
tions will be given of some equipment that may
not be available in a vehicle, for example due to
the special options or national-market version
selected. This also applies to safety related
functions and systems.
BMW Maintenance System
The BMW maintenance system advises you of
necessary maintenance measures and helps
you maintain the traffic and operating safety of
the vehicle.
Condition Based Service CBS
Sensors and special algorithms take the differ-
ent driving conditions of your BMW into
account. Condition Based Service uses this to
determine the current and future service
requirements. By letting you define a service
and maintenance regimen that reflects your
own individual requirements, the system builds
the basis for trouble-free driving.
In the instrument cluster, you can have the
remaining times or distances for selected main-
tenance tasks and any legally prescribed dates
displayed, refer to page 84:
> Engine oil
> Brake pads: separately for front and rear
> Brake fluid
> Vehicle check
> Legally mandated inspections depending
on local regulations
Service data in the remote control
Your vehicle continuously stores service-
requirement information in the remote control
while you are driving. Your dealership Service
Advisor can read out this data from the remote
control unit, and propose an optimized mainte-
nance approach. Whenever you take your car in
for servicing you should therefore give your
dealership Service Advisor the remote control
unit that you last used.
Make sure that the date in the instrument
cluster is always set correctly, refer to
page 86; otherwise, the effectiveness of Condi-
tion Based Service CBS is not assured.<
Service and Warranty Information
Booklet for US models and Warranty
and Service Guide Booklet for
Canadian models
Please consult your Service and Warranty Infor-
mation Booklet for US models and Warranty
and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models
for additional information on service require-
ments.
BMW recommends that you have service
and repair operations performed at your
BMW center.
Take the time to ensure that these service pro-
cedures are confirmed by entries in your vehi-
cle's Service and Warranty Information Booklet
for US models and Warranty and Service Guide
Booklet for Canadian models. These entries
verify that your vehicle has received the speci-
fied regular maintenance.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
203
Maintenance
Mobility
Socket for Onboard
Diagnosis OBD
On the driver's side is an OBD socket for check-
ing components relevant to the composition of
the vehicle's emissions.
Emissions
The warning lamp lights up:
The vehicle is producing higher emis-
sions. The trip can be continued. Have
the car checked as soon as possible.
Canadian models display this warning
lamp.
The lamp flashes under certain conditions. This
indicates excessive misfiring in the engine. If
this happens, you should reduce your speed
and visit your nearest BMW center as soon as
possible. Severe engine misfiring can quickly
lead to serious damage of emissions-related
components, especially the catalytic converter.
The warning lamp lights up if the fuel
cap is not properly tightened and the
OBD system assumes that fuel vapor
is escaping. Make sure that the fuel cap is cor-
rectly positioned and close it until it audibly
clicks.
Data memory
Your vehicle records data about the operation,
faults, and user settings. These data are stored
in the vehicle and in extract form, in the remote
control, and can be read out using suitable
devices at your BMW center. The data that are
read out are used to support service proce-
dures and repairs or to optimize and expand
vehicle functions. If you have a BMW Assist
contract, certain vehicle data can also be trans-
mitted directly from the vehicle in order to
enable the desired services.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
204
Mobility Care
Care
Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and
optional equipment that is offered in the model
range is described. For this reason, descrip-
tions will be given of some equipment that may
not be available in a vehicle, for example due to
the special options or national-market version
selected. This also applies to safety related
functions and systems.
Care products
Regular cleaning and care contributes signifi-
cantly to the value retention of your BMW.
BMW recommends cleaning and caring for your
vehicle with products that are approved by
BMW for this purpose.
Your BMW center will be happy to advise you on
the products and services available for cleaning
and caring for your BMW.
Original BMW CareProducts have been
material-tested, laboratory-checked and
proven in the field, and offer optimal care and
protection for your vehicle.<
Do not use cleaners that contain alcohol
or solvents as these may result in dam-
age.<
Cleaning agents can contain substances
that are dangerous or hazardous to your
health. Therefore, follow the warning and safety
instructions on the packaging. When cleaning
inside the vehicle, always open the doors or
windows of the vehicle. In enclosed areas, pro-
vide for sufficient ventilation. Only use products
designed for cleaning vehicles.<
Exterior care
Washing the vehicle
Especially during the winter months,
ensure that the vehicle is washed more
frequently. Heavy soiling and road salt can lead
to vehicle damage.<
After washing the vehicle, apply the
brakes briefly to dry them; otherwise,
water can reduce braking efficiency over the
short term and the brake discs can corrode.<
Automatic car washes
Give preference to car washes that use cloth or
soft brushes in order to avoid paint damage.
Do not use high-pressure car washes;
otherwise, water may drip into the vehicle
around the windows.<
Before driving into a car wash, ensure that it is
suitable for your BMW. Check the following:
> Dimensions of your vehicle, refer to
page 235.
> If necessary: fold in the exterior mirrors,
refer to page 50.
> Maximum permissible tire width.
Avoid car washes with guide rail heights
over 4 in/10 cm; otherwise, there is the
danger of damaging chassis parts.<
Preparations before driving into an automatic
car wash:
> Unscrew the rod antenna.
> Deactivate the rain sensor to prevent
undesired wiper operation.
> Remove additional add-on parts, e.g. spoil-
ers or phone antennas, if they could be
damaged.
> Leave the remote control in the ignition
lock.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
205
Care
Mobility
Automatic transmission
Before driving into an automatic car wash, per-
form the following steps to ensure that the vehi-
cle can roll:
1. Insert the remote control into the ignition
lock, even with Comfort Access.
2. Move the selector lever to position N.
3. Release the parking brake.
4. Switch off the engine.
5. Leave the remote control in the ignition lock
so that the vehicle can roll.
Sport automatic transmission with
double clutch
Before driving into an automatic car wash, per-
form the following steps to ensure that the vehi-
cle can roll:
1. Insert the remote control into the ignition
lock, even with Comfort Access.
2. Engage transmission position N.
3. Release the parking brake.
4. Switch off the engine.
5. Leave the remote control in the ignition lock
so that the vehicle can roll.
The transmission is switched into position P:
> Automatically after approx. 30 minutes
> If you remove the infrared remote control
from the ignition lock
Steam jets/high-pressure washers
When using steam jets or high-pressure
washers, make sure to maintain sufficient
distance from the vehicle and do not exceed a
temperature of 1407/606.
Insufficient clearance or excessive pressure or
temperature can lead to component damage or
water penetration. Follow the operating instruc-
tions of the high-pressure washer.<
When using high-pressure washers, do
not spray the sensors, e.g. of the Park
Distance Control, for an extended period and
maintain a distance of at least 1 ft/30 cm from
them.<
Manual car wash
When washing the vehicle by hand, use large
quantities of water and car shampoo if neces-
sary. Clean the vehicle with a sponge or wash-
ing brush, applying light pressure only.
Before cleaning the windshield, deacti-
vate the rain sensor or switch off the igni-
tion to prevent unintentional activation of the
wipers.<
Observe local regulations pertaining to
washing vehicles by hand.<
Headlamps
Do not rub them dry and do not use abrasive or
corrosive cleaning agents.
Loosen dirt, e.g. insects, with shampoo or
insect remover and wash away with copious
quantities of water.
Thaw ice with a windshield deicer and do not
use an ice scraper.
Windows
Clean the inside and outside surfaces of the
windows and the mirrors with window cleaner.
Do not clean the mirrors with cleaners
containing quartz.<
Convertible: retractable hardtop
Proceed as you would in a normal car wash.
When you open a wet hardtop, water
drops may run into the cargo area. If nec-
essary, remove items from the cargo area
beforehand to avoid water stains or soiling.<
Paintwork care
Regular care contributes to value retention and
protects the paintwork against the long-term
effects of damaging substances.
Region-specific environmental influences can
damage the vehicle paintwork. Therefore, it is
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
206
Mobility Care
important to adapt the frequency and scope of
car care accordingly.
Immediately remove aggressive materials such
as spilled fuel, oil, grease, brake fluid, tree sap or
bird droppings to prevent damage to the paint-
work.
Repairing paintwork damage
Immediately repair scratches or similar
damage, such as that caused by stones
hitting the vehicle, where necessary to prevent
rusting.<
BMW recommends having paintwork damage
repaired by a professional paint repair work-
shop according to BMW specifications using
original BMW paint materials.
Preservation
A preservation treatment is necessary when
water no longer beads off the clean paintwork
surface. Only use products for paintwork pres-
ervation that contain carnauba or synthetic
waxes.
Rubber seals
Treat only with water or rubber care products.
Do not use silicon-containing care prod-
ucts on rubber seals; otherwise, noise
and damage could occur.<
Chrome parts
Carefully clean vehicle parts such as the radia-
tor grill, door handles or window frames with
copious quantities of water and a shampoo
additive, especially when roads are treated with
deicing salt. For additional treatment, use a
chrome polish.
Light-alloy wheels
For technical reasons, dust is generated during
braking that is deposited on the light-alloy
wheels. Remove the dust regularly using acid-
free rim cleaner.
Do not use aggressive, acidic, strongly
alkaline, or abrasive cleaning agents and
do not use steam jets hotter than of 140 7/
606; otherwise, damage may occur.<
Outside sensors/cameras
Keep the sensors and cameras on the
outside of the vehicle, e.g. those for Park
Distance Control, clean and free of ice to ensure
that they remain fully functional.<
Interior care
Upholstery fabrics/cloth trims/
Alcantara fabrics
Vacuum regularly with a vacuum cleaner to
remove superficial dirt.
To remove severe spots such as stains from
beverages, use a soft sponge or lint-free
microfiber cloth and suitable interior cleaners.
Follow the instructions on the packaging.
Clean the upholstery down to the seams
using a sweeping motion. Avoid strong
rubbing.<
Opened Velcro fasteners on pants or
other articles of clothing can damage the
seat covers. Ensure that Velcro fasteners are
closed.<
Leather/leather trim
The leather used by BMW is a high quality
natural product. Slight irregularities in the
leather are a typical characteristic of natural
leather.<
Dust and road grit in the pores and folds of the
leather have an abrasive effect, leading to
increased wear and causing the leather surface
to become brittle prematurely. Therefore, fre-
quently clean the leather of dust using a cloth or
vacuum cleaner.
Clean light-colored leather more frequently as
dust and dirt are more noticeable.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
207
Care
Mobility
Treat the leather at least once every two
months using a leather lotion as dirt and grease
will gradually attack the leather's protective
layer.
Carpet and floor mats
Keep floor mats, carpet, and other objects
out of the movement range of the pedals;
otherwise, they may inhibit the function of the
pedals during driving.
Do not place additional floor mats onto an exist-
ing one or onto other objects.
Only use floor mats that have been approved for
the vehicle and can be appropriately fastened.
Make sure that the floor mats are securely fas-
tened again after they have been removed, e.g.
for cleaning.<
Interior plastic parts
> Imitation leather surfaces
> Lamp glasses
> Display pane of instrument cluster
> Matte parts
Clean with water and solvent-free plastic
cleaner if necessary.
Fine wood parts
Clean fine wood trim and fine wood parts with a
damp cloth. Wipe dry with a soft cloth.
Safety belts
Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and
thus have a negative impact on safety.
Do not clean chemically, as this may
destroy the webbing.<
Interior sensors/cameras
To clean interior sensors and cameras, use a
lint-free cloth moistened with glass cleaner.
Displays
To clean displays, e.g. of the radio or instrument
cluster, use a cleaning cloth for displays or a
soft, non-abrasive, lint-free cloth.
Avoid applying excessive pressure when
cleaning the displays; otherwise, damage
may occur.<
Do not use chemical or abrasive house-
hold cleaning agents. Keep all types of
fluid away from the device. Otherwise, surfaces
or electrical components may be corroded or
damaged.<
CD/DVD drives
Do not use a cleaning CD, as it may dam-
age parts of the drive.<
Vehicle storage
If you plan to park your vehicle for longer than
three months, your BMW center will be happy
to advise you.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
208
Mobility Replacing components
Replacing components
Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and
optional equipment that is offered in the model
range is described. For this reason, descrip-
tions will be given of some equipment that may
not be available in a vehicle, for example due to
the special options or national-market version
selected. This also applies to safety related
functions and systems.
Onboard vehicle tool kit
Coupe
The onboard vehicle tool kit is stored in a com-
partment on the right-hand side of the cargo
area. Remove the cover.
Convertible
The onboard vehicle tool kit is stored in a pouch
under the cargo area floor panel.
Wiper blades
1. Fold out the wiper arm and hold it.
2. Press together the locking spring, arrows 1,
and fold out the wiper blade, arrow 2.
3. Take the wiper blade out of the catch mech-
anism, pulling the blade toward the front.
To avoid damage, make sure that the
wiper arms are against the windshield
before you open the hood.<
Lamps and bulbs
Lamps and bulbs make an essential contribu-
tion to vehicle safety. They should, therefore,
be handled carefully. BMW recommends hav-
ing your BMW center perform any work that you
do not feel competent to perform yourself or
that is not described here.
Never touch the glass of new bulbs with
your bare fingers, as even minute
amounts of contamination will burn into the
bulb's surface and reduce its service life. Use a
clean tissue, cloth or something similar, or hold
the bulb by its base.<
Replacement bulb sets are available at your
BMW center.
Only change bulbs while they are cool to
the touch; otherwise, you could suffer
burns.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
209
Replacing components
Mobility
When working on electrical systems,
always begin by switching off the con-
sumer in question; otherwise, short-circuits
could result. To avoid possible injury or equip-
ment damage when replacing bulbs, observe
any instructions provided by the bulb manufac-
turer.<
For care of the headlamps, please follow the
instructions in the chapter entitled 'Care'.
To replace lamps not described here,
please contact your BMW center.<
Light-emitting diodes LED
Light-emitting diodes installed behind translu-
cent lenses serve as the light source for many of
the controls, displays, and equipment in your
vehicle. These light-emitting diodes, which
operate using a concept similar to that applied
in conventional lasers, are officially designated
as Class 1 light-emitting diodes.
Do not remove the covers or expose the
eyes directly to the unfiltered light source
for several hours; otherwise, this could cause
irritation of the retina.<
Headlight lenses
In cool or humid weather, condensation may
form on the interior of outside lamps. The con-
densation will disappear after a short time when
driving with the headlamps switched on. The
headlamp glasses do not need to be changed.
If the headlamps do not defrost despite driving
with the headlamps switched on, and additional
moisture builds up, for example water droplets
in the lamps, have them checked by your BMW
center.
Xenon lamps
These bulbs have a very long service life and are
highly unlikely to fail. If a xenon lamp fails never-
theless, switch on the fog lamps and continue
the journey with great care, provided that local
legislation does not prohibit this.
Have all work on the xenon lamp system,
including bulb replacements, performed
only by your BMW center. Due to high voltage,
there is a risk of fatal injury if work on the xenon
lamps is carried out improperly.<
Access to the lamps
1. Switch off the lamps and take the remote
control out of the ignition lock.
2. Remove the upper cover from the head-
lamp. To do so, use a screwdriver to press
the catches towards the rear, see arrows,
and pull the cover forward and out.
Follow the same steps in reverse order to reat-
tach the cover.
Be careful when installing the cover; oth-
erwise, leaks could occur and cause dam-
age to the headlamp system.<
Parking lamps and roadside parking
lamps, daytime running lights
These lamps use LED technology for operation.
If they malfunction, please contact your BMW
center.
Corner-illuminating lamps
H3 bulb, 55 watts
1. Switch off the lamps and take the remote
control out of the ignition lock.
2. Remove the cover, refer to Access to the
lamps.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
210
Mobility Replacing components
3. Push the wire bracket out of the anchor
towards the right and fold it up.
4. Disconnect the plug, change the bulb and
reconnect the plug.
5. Insert the bulb.
6. Fold the wire bracket down and engage it.
7. Reattach the cover.
Turn signals, front
These lamps use LED technology for operation.
If they malfunction, please contact your BMW
center.
Side turn signals
W5W bulb, 5 watts
1. Press the front edge of the lamp toward the
rear with your fingertip, arrow 1 and pivot it
out, arrow 2.
2. While simultaneously lifting the retaining
tab, rotate bulb holder to the left and
remove.
3. Remove lamp and replace it.
To install, insert rear end of the lamp and press
into place at the front.
Tail lamps
Coupe: overview
The tail lamps are divided in two parts. One part
is in the trunk lid, the other is in the fender.
1 Backup lamp
2 Brake lamp
3 Parking/tail lamps
4 Turn signal
5 Brake Force Display lamp
6 Parking/tail lamps
Convertible: overview
The tail lamps are divided in two parts. One part
is in the trunk lid, the other is in the fender.
1 Backup lamp
2 Brake lamp
3 Parking/tail lamps
4 Turn signal
5 Brake Force Display lamp
6 Parking/tail lamps
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
211
Replacing components
Mobility
Backup lamp
If these lamps malfunction, please contact your
BMW center.
Turn signal, brake, license plate,
parking, and tail lamps
These lamps use LED technology for operation.
If they malfunction, please contact your BMW
center.
Coupe: Brake Force Display lamp in the
trunk lid
H21W bulb, 21 watts
1. Pry out the plastic plugs in the trim of the
trunk lid using a screwdriver and remove the
trim.
2. Release the bulb holder, see arrow, and
remove.
3. Apply gentle pressure to the bulb while
turning it to the left for removal and replace-
ment.
4. Attach the bulb holder.
5. Attach trunk lid trim.
Convertible: Brake Force Display lamp
in the trunk lid
H21W bulb, 21 watts
1. Take the warning triangle out of its holder,
refer to page 215. Unscrew the holder using
the screwdriver from the onboard vehicle
tool kit.
2. Pry out the plastic plugs in the trim of the
trunk lid using a screwdriver and remove the
trim.
3. Release the bulb holder, see arrow, and
remove.
4. Apply gentle pressure to the bulb while
turning it to the left for removal and replace-
ment.
5. Attach the bulb holder.
6. Reattach the trim of the trunk lid and the
holder for the warning triangle.
Changing wheels
Your BMW is equipped with run-flat tires as
standard. This eliminates the need to change a
wheel immediately in the event of a puncture.
For information on continuing to drive with a
damaged tire, refer to Indication of a flat tire on
page 94.
The symbol identifying run-flat tires is a circle
with the letters RSC on the sidewall, refer to
Run-flat tires, page 195.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
212
Mobility Replacing components
When mounting new tires or changing over
from summer to winter tires and vice versa,
mount run-flat tires for your own safety. In the
event of a flat, no spare wheel is available. Your
BMW center will be glad to advise you. Refer
also to New wheels and tires, page 195.
The tools for changing wheels are avail-
able as optional accessories from your
BMW center.<
Jack mounting points
The jacking points are at the positions shown in
the illustration.
Vehicle battery
Battery care
The battery is 100% maintenance-free, the
electrolyte will last for the life of the battery
when the vehicle is operated in a temperate cli-
mate. Your BMW center will be glad to advise in
all matters concerning the battery.
Battery replacing
Only use vehicle batteries that have been
approved for your vehicle by the manu-
facturer; otherwise, the vehicle could be dam-
aged and systems or functions may not be fully
available.<
After a battery replacement, have the battery
registered on the vehicle by your service center
to ensure that all comfort functions are fully
available.
Charging the battery
Note
Do not connect battery chargers to the
sockets built into the vehicle at the plant;
doing so may damage the vehicle.<
Jump-starting terminals
Only charge the battery in the vehicle via the
terminals in the engine compartment with the
engine off. Connections, refer to Jump-starting
on page 216.
Power failure
After a temporary power loss, the functioning of
some equipment may be limited and require
reinitialization. Individual settings may likewise
have been lost and will have to be programmed:
> Time and date
These values must be updated, refer to
page 86.
> Radio
In some cases, stations may have to be
stored again, refer to page 144.
> Glass roof
It may happen that the roof can only be
tilted. The system must be initialized.
Please contact your BMW center.
> Seat and mirror memory
The positions must be stored again, refer to
page 48.
> Inside rearview mirror with digital compass
The system must be calibrated, refer to
page 119.
> Active steering
The system automatically initializes itself
briefly during a trip. The system is deacti-
vated during this time, refer to page 97.
> xDrive
The system automatically initializes itself
during a trip. Indicator lamps light up during
this time. If the lamps do not go out during
the current trip, have the system checked.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
213
Replacing components
Mobility
Disposal of old battery
Have old batteries disposed of by your
BMW center or bring them to a collection
point. Maintain the battery in an upright position
for transport and storage. Always secure the
battery against tipping over during transport.<
Fuses
Never attempt to repair a blown fuse and
do not replace a defective fuse with a sub-
stitute of another color or amperage rating; oth-
erwise, this could lead to a circuit overload, ulti-
mately resulting in a fire in the vehicle.<
Open the cover in the glove compartment and
remove it.
Plastic tweezers are located on the distributor
box.
See the rear of the cover for information on fuse
assignment.
Spare fuses are available at your BMW center.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
214
Mobility Giving and receiving assistance
Giving and receiving assistance
Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and
optional equipment that is offered in the model
range is described. For this reason, descrip-
tions will be given of some equipment that may
not be available in a vehicle, for example due to
the special options or national-market version
selected. This also applies to safety related
functions and systems.
Emergency Request
Requirements
> Full preparation package mobile phone: this
equipment makes it possible to send an
Emergency Request even if no mobile
phone is paired with the vehicle.
> BMW Assist is activated.
> Radio readiness is switched on.
> The BMW Assist system is logged into a
mobile phone network that is supported by
BMW Assist.
> The Emergency Request system is opera-
ble.
Only press the SOS button in an emergency.
For technical reasons, the Emergency
Request service cannot be guaranteed
for the most unfavorable conditions.<
Subscriber contract
Upon expiration of the subscriber contract with
BMW Assist, the BMW Assist system can be
deactivated by a BMW center without a work-
shop visit.
After the system is deactivated, it is no longer
possible to make Emergency Requests.
It may be possible for a BMW center to reacti-
vate the system after a new contract has been
signed.
Sending an Emergency Request
1. Briefly press the cover flap to open.
2. Press the SOS button until the LED in the
button comes on.
> The LED comes on: the Emergency
Request has been triggered.
If the circumstances allow, remain in the
vehicle until the voice contact has been
established.
> The LED flashes when the connection to
the BMW Assist Response Center has been
established.
Once the BMW Assist Response Center
has received your Emergency Request, the
BMW Assist Response Center contacts
you and takes further steps to help you.
Even if you are unable to respond, the
BMW Assist Response Center will be able
to initiate further steps to assist you under
certain conditions.
Data for determining the necessary rescue
measures are transmitted to the
BMW Assist Response Center, e.g. the cur-
rent position of your vehicle, if it can be
determined.
> If the LED is flashing but the BMW Assist
Response Center cannot be heard over the
hands-free system, it is possible that the
hands-free system is malfunctioning. The
BMW Assist Response Center may still be
able to hear you, however.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
215
Giving and receiving assistance
Mobility
Automatically triggering an Emergency
Request
Under certain conditions, an Emergency
Request is sent automatically immediately after
a severe accident. An automatic Emergency
Request is not affected by pressing the SOS
button.
Roadside Assistance
BMW Roadside Assistance is available by
phone around the clock in many countries. You
can obtain support there in the event of a break-
down.
First aid pouch
Some of the articles contained in the first aid
pouch have a limited service life. Therefore,
check the expiration dates of the contents reg-
ularly and replace any items in good time, if nec-
essary.
Coupe
The first aid pouch is located on the right-hand
side of the cargo area in a storage area.
Convertible
The first aid pouch is located in a compartment
under the front passenger seat.
To open: press the button and fold the cover
down.
To close: fold the cover back up and press it into
the catch.
Warning triangle
Coupe
The warning triangle is located on the left-hand
side of the cargo area. Press the tab to take it
out.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
216
Mobility Giving and receiving assistance
Convertible
The warning triangle is located in a holder in the
trunk lid. Press the tabs to take it out.
Jump-starting
If the car's own battery is flat, your BMW's
engine can be started by connecting two
jumper cables to another vehicle's battery. You
can also use the same method to help start
another vehicle. Only use jumper cables with
fully-insulated clamp handles.
Do not touch any electrically live parts
when the engine is running, or a fatal acci-
dent may occur. Carefully adhere to the follow-
ing sequence, both to prevent damage to one or
both vehicles, and to guard against possible
personal injuries.<
Preparation
1. Check whether the battery of the other
vehicle has a voltage of 12 volts and
approximately the same capacitance in Ah.
This information can be found on the bat-
tery.
2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehi-
cle.
3. Switch off any consumers in both vehicles.
There must not be any contact between
the bodies of the two vehicles; otherwise,
there is a danger of shorting.<
Connecting jumper cables
Connect the jumper cables in the correct
order, so that no sparks which could
cause injury occur.<
Your BMW has a jump-starting connection in
the engine compartment which acts as the bat-
tery's positive terminal, refer also to the Engine
compartment overview on page 197. The cap is
marked with +.
1. Pull the cap of the BMW jump-starting con-
nection up to remove.
2. Attach one terminal clamp of the plus/+
jumper cable to the positive terminal of the
battery or a starting-aid terminal of the vehi-
cle providing assistance.
3. Attach the second terminal clamp of the
plus/+ jumper cable to the positive terminal
of the battery or a starting-aid terminal of
the vehicle to be started.
4. Attach one terminal clamp of the minus/–
jumper cable to the negative terminal of the
battery or to an engine or body ground of
the assisting vehicle.
Your BMW has a special nut as body ground
or negative pole.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
217
Giving and receiving assistance
Mobility
5. Attach the second terminal clamp of the
minus/– jumper cable to the negative termi-
nal of the battery or to the engine or body
ground of the vehicle to be started.
Starting the engine
1. Start the engine of the donor vehicle and
allow it to run for a few minutes at slightly
increased idle speed.
2. Start the engine on the other vehicle in the
usual way.
If the first start attempt is not successful,
wait a few minutes before another attempt
in order to allow the discharged battery to
recharge.
3. Let the engines run for a few minutes.
4. Disconnect the jumper cables by reversing
the above connecting sequence.
If necessary, have the battery checked and
recharged.
Never use spray fluids to start the
engine.<
Tow-starting, towing away
Observe the applicable laws and regula-
tions for tow-starting and towing vehi-
cles.<
Do not transport any passengers other
than the driver in a vehicle that is being
towed.<
Using a tow fitting
The screw-in tow fitting must always be carried
in the car. It can be screwed in at the front or
rear of the BMW.
Coupe: it is stored in the onboard vehicle tool kit
underneath the cover on the right-hand side of
the cargo area, refer to page 208.
Convertible: it is stored in the onboard vehicle
tool kit underneath the cargo area floor, refer to
page 208.
Use only the tow fitting provided with the
vehicle and screw it all the way in. Use the
tow fitting for towing on paved roads only. Avoid
lateral loading of the tow fitting, e.g. do not lift
the vehicle by the tow fitting. Otherwise, the
tow fitting and the vehicle could be damaged.<
Access to screw thread
Release the cover panel in the bumper:
Press on the upper part of the cover panel.
Front
Rear
Being towed
Make sure that the ignition is switched on,
refer to page 57; otherwise, the low-beam
headlamps, tail lamps, turn signal indicators and
windshield wipers may be unavailable.
Power steering assistance is not available when
the engine is not running. Thus, braking and
steering will require increased effort. Active
steering is not active and it will be necessary to
turn the steering wheel further.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
218
Mobility Giving and receiving assistance
Manual transmission
Gearshift lever in neutral position.
Automatic transmission
Selector lever in position N.
Changing selector lever positions, refer to
page 60.
Do not exceed a towing speed of 45 mph
or 70 km/h and a towing distance of
90 miles/150 km; otherwise, the automatic
transmission may be damaged.<
Sport automatic transmission with
double clutch
Make sure that the parking lock P is not
engaged; otherwise, the rear wheels are
immobilized.
When using the car wash function, refer to
page 205, note that the parking lock P is
engaged automatically after approx.
30 minutes, blocking the rear wheels.
In the event of an electrical malfunction or if the
vehicle must be towed for more than approx.
20 minutes, unlock the parking lock manually,
refer to page 65.<
When towing, do not exceed a maximum
speed of 30 mph or 50 km/h and a maxi-
mum distance traveled of 30 miles/50 km; oth-
erwise, the transmission may be damaged.<
Towing methods
Do not lift the vehicle by a tow fitting or
body and chassis parts; otherwise, dam-
age may result.<
With a tow bar
The towing vehicle must not be lighter
than the towed vehicle; otherwise, it may
be impossible to maintain control.<
The tow fittings used should be on the same
side on both vehicles. Should it prove impossi-
ble to avoid mounting the tow bar at an angle,
please observe the following:
> Clearance and maneuvering capability will
be sharply limited during cornering.
> The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it is
attached offset.
Attach the tow bar to the tow fittings only,
as attaching it to other parts of the vehicle
could result in damage.<
With a tow rope
When starting off in the towing vehicle, make
sure that the tow rope is taut.
To avoid jerking and the associated
stresses on vehicle components when
towing, always use nylon ropes or nylon straps.
Attach the tow rope to the tow fittings only, as
attaching it to other parts of the vehicle could
result in damage.<
With a tow truck: vehicle without xDrive
Manual and automatic transmission:
Sport automatic transmission with double
clutch:
Have the BMW transported with a tow truck
with a so-called lift bar, or on a flatbed.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
219
Giving and receiving assistance
Mobility
Do not tow the vehicle with just the rear axle
raised as this may cause the steering to turn.
With a tow truck: vehicle with xDrive
Do not tow a BMW with xDrive with just
the front or rear axle raised; otherwise, the
wheels could lock up and the transfer case
could be damaged.<
Have the BMW transported on a flatbed surface
only.
Tow-starting
Avoid tow-starting the vehicle whenever possi-
ble; instead, jump-start the engine, refer to
page 216Vehicles with a catalytic converter
should only be tow-started when the engine is
cold; vehicles with an automatic transmission or
Sport automatic transmission with double
clutch cannot be tow-started at all.
1. Switch on hazard warning flashers, comply
with local regulations.
2. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 57.
3. Shift into 3rd gear.
4. Have the vehicle tow-started with the clutch
depressed and slowly release the clutch.
After the engine starts, immediately
depress the clutch completely again.
5. Stop at a suitable location, remove the tow
bar or rope and switch off the hazard warn-
ing flashers.
6. Have the vehicle checked.
With xDrive: do not activate Hill Descent
Control HDC when the vehicle is being
tow-started, page 92.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
220
Mobility Indicator and warning lamps
Indicator and warning lamps
Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and
optional equipment that is offered in the model
range is described. For this reason, descrip-
tions will be given of some equipment that may
not be available in a vehicle, for example due to
the special options or national-market version
selected. This also applies to safety related
functions and systems.
The concept
Indicator and warning lamps can light up in a
variety of combinations and colors. See the
table for information on causes and how to
react. Note whether a lamp lights up alone or in
combination with another. Some lamps can
light up in different colors. Corresponding dis-
tinctions are made in the text.
1 2 Cause What to do
Turn signals
High beams/headlamp flasher
switched on
Fog lamps switched on
Fasten safety belts Fasten your safety belt, also refer to
page 49.
Indication in US models
Parking brake applied while driving Release the parking brake.
Indication in Canadian models
Parking brake applied while driving Release the parking brake.
Outside temperature warning Drive cautiously, also refer to page 78.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
221
Indicator and warning lamps
Mobility
Lights up briefly:
Approx. 2.1 US gal/8 liters of fuel
remain in the tank
Remains on:
Remaining operating range is no more
than 30 miles/50 km, refer to page 79
Engine refuses to start Depress the brake or clutch in order to
start the engine, refer to page 58.
Ignition switched on and driver's door
open
Switch off the ignition, refer to page 57,
or close the driver's door.
The desired function cannot currently
be carried out
Parking lamps still on Switch off the parking lamps, refer to
page 103.
Roadside parking lamps still on Switch off the roadside parking lamps,
refer to page 105.
Door open
Engine compartment lid open
Lights up in red:
Backrest of driver's seat or front pas-
senger seat not locked
Lock the backrest; otherwise, the safety
belt will not provide protection in the
event of an accident.
Lights up in yellow:
Seat backrest monitor malfunctioning Engage the seat backrest. Have it
checked by your nearest BMW center.
1 2 Cause What to do
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
222
Mobility Indicator and warning lamps
Lights up in red:
Roof activation system failure Roof cannot be moved. If the retract-
able hardtop does not lock, contact
your nearest BMW center.
Roof activation system malfunctioning Roof movement incomplete. Please
check if the roof is blocked, then press
or pull the switch again.
Lights up in yellow:
Roof drive overheated Roof activation temporarily limited to
closing only.
Cargo area partition not in lowermost
position
Press down the cargo area partition
until it engages on both sides.
Vehicle not level, roof activation not
possible
Move the vehicle to a level surface.
Rollover protection system malfunc-
tioning
Have the rollover protection system
checked by the nearest BMW center.
Trunk lid open
Fuel cap is open Make sure that the fuel cap is correctly
positioned and close it until it audibly
clicks. Do not jam the strap between the
fuel cap and the vehicle.
Windshield washer fluid level too low Add washer fluid as soon as possible,
refer to page 69.
Lights up in red:
Service due Arrange a service appointment.
Check service requirements, refer to
page 84.
Lights up in yellow:
The engine will start the next time the
Start/Stop button is briefly pressed,
possibly without the brake or clutch
being depressed
Remote control malfunctioning or, in
cars with Comfort Access, not
detected
The engine cannot be started. Have the
remote control checked, if necessary.
Battery in remote control discharged Use the remote control for a longer jour-
ney or, in cars with Comfort Access,
replace the battery.
1 2 Cause What to do
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
223
Indicator and warning lamps
Mobility
Belt tensioners and/or airbag system
failed
Have the system checked immediately.
Active steering defective You can continue your journey.
Steering characteristics are modified
and steering wheel could be off-center.
Steer carefully.
Have the system checked as soon as
possible.
Steering assistance failed Markedly different steering response.
You can continue your journey, but
moderate your speed and exercise due
caution.
Have the system checked as soon as
possible.
Lights up:
Emergency Request system has failed
or is malfunctioning
Have the system checked as soon as
possible.
Lights up in red:
Engine malfunction Stop the car and switch off the engine.
You cannot continue your journey. Con-
tact your BMW center.
Lights up in yellow:
Full engine power is no longer available You can continue your journey, but
moderate your speed and exercise due
caution. Have the engine checked as
soon as possible.
Indication in US models:
Warning lamp flashes:
Engine malfunction under high load.
High engine load will result in damage
to the catalytic converter
You can continue your journey, but
moderate your speed and exercise due
caution. Have the vehicle checked with-
out delay.
Warning lamp lights up:
Engine malfunction with adverse effect
on emissions
Have the car checked as soon as possi-
ble.
1 2 Cause What to do
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
224
Mobility Indicator and warning lamps
Indication in Canadian models:
Warning lamp flashes:
Engine malfunction under high load.
High engine load will result in damage
to the catalytic converter
You can continue your journey, but
moderate your speed and exercise due
caution. Have the vehicle checked with-
out delay.
Warning lamp lights up:
Engine malfunction with adverse effect
on emissions
Have the car checked as soon as possi-
ble.
Lights up in red:
Engine overheating Carefully bring the car to a stop, switch
off the engine and allow it to cool down.
Do not open the hood; otherwise, there
is a risk of injury from scalding. Contact
your BMW center.
Lights up in yellow:
Engine too hot Continue driving at more moderate
speed so that the engine can cool
down. Have the engine checked with-
out delay if the situation reoccurs.
Lights up in red:
Battery is no longer being charged.
Alternator malfunction
Switch off all unnecessary electrical
consumers. Have the power supply
system checked without delay.
Lights up in yellow:
Battery charge level very low, battery
aged or not securely connected
Have the battery checked as soon as
possible.
Indication in US models
Parking brake applied
Indication in Canadian models
Parking brake applied
Indication in US models
Lights up in red:
Brake fluid level too low Braking action is reduced, stop with
care. Contact your BMW center.
1 2 Cause What to do
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
225
Indicator and warning lamps
Mobility
Indication in Canadian models
Lights up in red:
Brake fluid level too low Braking action is reduced, stop with
care. Contact your BMW center.
Indication in US models
Brake pads worn Have the condition of the brake pads
checked without delay.
Indication in Canadian models
Brake pads worn Have the condition of the brake pads
checked without delay.
Lights up in red: Have the system in question checked
without delay.
> Starter failed or The engine cannot be restarted.
> Ignition malfunctioning. Engine
restart only possible when brake is
depressed or
> Lighting system failed. Low beams/
tail lamps and brake lamps still
operational. All other lamps failed
Depress the brake to restart the engine.
Lights up in yellow:
> Control of the brake lamps failed or
> Fuel supply malfunctioningDrive
unit malfunction
You can continue your journey, but
moderate your speed and exercise due
caution. Have the system in question
checked without delay.
Flashing:
Dynamic Stability Control DSC or
Dynamic Traction Control DTC is con-
trolling drive and braking forces, also
refer to page 91
Dynamic Traction Control DTC acti-
vated, also refer to page 91
Dynamic Stability Control DSC and
Dynamic Traction Control DTC deacti-
vated, also refer to page 91
Driving stability limited during accelera-
tion and cornering.
Driving style must be readjusted.
Suspension control system failed, also
refer to page 90
Driving stability limited during accelera-
tion and cornering.
You can continue your journey, but
moderate your speed and exercise due
caution. Have the system checked as
soon as possible.
1 2 Cause What to do
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
226
Mobility Indicator and warning lamps
xDrive has failed, also refer to page 92 You can continue your journey. Drive
cautiously and think well ahead. Avoid
driving on rough tracks, full-throttle
operation and use of the transmission's
kickdown mode. Have the system
checked immediately.
xDrive and DSC have failed, also refer
to page 92
You can continue your journey. Drive
cautiously and think well ahead. Avoid
driving on rough tracks, full-throttle
operation and use of the transmission's
kickdown mode. Have the system
checked immediately.
Indication in US models
The driving stability control systems,
including ABS and the Tire Pressure
Monitor, have failed, also refer to
page 90
You can continue your journey.
Reduced braking and driving stability.
Drive at moderate speeds, avoiding
abrupt braking maneuvers. Have the
system checked as soon as possible.
Indication in Canadian models
The driving stability control systems,
including ABS and the Flat Tire Moni-
tor, or Tire Pressure Monitor have
failed, also refer to page 90
You can continue your journey.
Reduced braking and driving stability.
Drive at moderate speeds, avoiding
abrupt braking maneuvers. Have the
system checked as soon as possible.
Indication in Canadian models
The driving stability control systems,
including ABS and the Flat Tire Moni-
tor, or Tire Pressure Monitor have
failed, also refer to page 90
You can continue your journey.
Reduced braking and driving stability.
Drive at moderate speeds, avoiding
abrupt braking maneuvers. Have the
system checked as soon as possible.
Indication in US models
The driving stability control systems,
including ABS, xDrive and the Flat Tire
Monitor, have failed
You can continue your journey.
Reduced braking and driving stability.
Drive at moderate speeds, avoiding
abrupt braking maneuvers. Avoid driv-
ing on rough tracks, full-throttle opera-
tion and use of the transmission's kick-
down mode. Have the system checked
immediately.
1 2 Cause What to do
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
227
Indicator and warning lamps
Mobility
Indication in Canadian models
The driving stability control systems,
including ABS, xDrive and the Flat Tire
Monitor, have failed
You can continue your journey.
Reduced braking and driving stability.
Drive at moderate speeds, avoiding
abrupt braking maneuvers. Avoid driv-
ing on rough tracks, full-throttle opera-
tion and use of the transmission's kick-
down mode. Have the system checked
immediately.
Indication in Canadian models
The driving stability control systems,
including ABS, xDrive and the Flat Tire
Monitor, have failed
You can continue your journey.
Reduced braking and driving stability.
Drive at moderate speeds, avoiding
abrupt braking maneuvers. Avoid driv-
ing on rough tracks, full-throttle opera-
tion and use of the transmission's kick-
down mode. Have the system checked
immediately.
Indication in US models
Vehicle electronics failed You cannot continue your journey. Con-
tact your BMW center.
Indication in Canadian models
Vehicle electronics failed You cannot continue your journey. Con-
tact your BMW center.
Indication in Canadian models
Vehicle electronics failed You cannot continue your journey. Con-
tact your BMW center.
1 2 Cause What to do
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
228
Mobility Indicator and warning lamps
Vehicles with Flat Tire Monitor
Light up in yellow and red:
> Tire is deflated Carefully bring the car to a stop. Comply
with the additional information starting
on page 93.
> Flat Tire Monitor not initialized Initialize Flat Tire Monitor, refer to
page 93.
Light up in yellow:
Flat Tire Monitor failed. Punctures are
not indicated
Have the system checked.
Vehicles with Tire Pressure Monitor
Light up in yellow and red:
There is a flat tire or substantial loss of
tire pressure in the indicated wheel
Carefully bring the car to a stop. Comply
with the additional information starting
on page 95.
Vehicles with Tire Pressure Monitor
Light up in yellow:
> Tire Pressure Monitor not initialized Check the inflation pressure and reset
the system, refer to page 95
The small lamp flashes in yellow and
then lights up continuously; the larger
lamp lights up in yellow:
> Tire Pressure Monitor has failed.
Punctures are not indicated
Have the system checked.
> Interference from systems or
devices that use the same radio fre-
quency. The system automatically
reactivates once it is outside of the
field of interference
Vehicles with Tire Pressure Monitor:
The small lamp flashes in yellow and
then lights up continuously; the larger
lamp lights up in yellow:
> Tire Pressure Monitor has failed.
Punctures are not indicated
Have the system checked.
> A wheel without TPM electronics
has been mounted
1 2 Cause What to do
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
229
Indicator and warning lamps
Mobility
Lights up in red:
> Transmission limp-home program
active with restricted range of
gears, possibly with reduced accel-
eration
You can continue your journey, but
moderate your speed and exercise due
caution. Have the system checked
without delay.
> Gears can be engaged without
depressing the brake
Always depress the brake to engage a
gear.
Lights up in yellow:
> Transmission limp-home program
active with restricted range of gears
You can continue your journey, but
moderate your speed and exercise due
caution. Have the system checked
without delay.
> Automatic selector lever locked:
Selector lever locked in position P
with engine running or ignition
switched on and brake depressed
Overriding selector lever lock, refer to
page 62.
> Selector lever position P malfunc-
tioning:
Selector lever locked in position P
with engine running or ignition
switched on and brake depressed
Release parking lock, refer to page 65.
Have the system checked as soon as
possible.
> Brake signal malfunctioning: gear
can be engaged without depress-
ing the brake
To engage a gear while the vehicle is at
a standstill, always step on the brake.
Before leaving the vehicle, engage P
and switch off the engine.
Lights up in red:
Transmission overheating Bring the car to a stop and engage P.
Allow the transmission to cool down.
You can continue your journey, but
moderate your speed and exercise due
caution. Have the system checked if the
situation reoccurs.
Lights up in yellow:
Transmission too hot Avoid high engine loads. You can con-
tinue your journey, but moderate your
speed and exercise due caution.
P is not engaged. Vehicle not pre-
vented from rolling
1 2 Cause What to do
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
230
Mobility Indicator and warning lamps
Selector lever position P not engaged.
Ignition cannot be switched off
Engage selector lever position P when
you wish to switch off the ignition, refer
to page 57.
Selector lever malfunctioning You can continue your journey. Shift
again if necessary. Have the system
checked if the situation reoccurs.
Brake signal malfunctioning: gear can
be engaged without depressing the
brake
To engage a gear while the vehicle is at
a standstill, always step on the brake.
Switch off the engine before leaving the
vehicle. Have the system checked as
soon as possible.
Pinch protection system of the power
windows malfunctioning
Have the system checked.
Pinch protection system of the electric
glass roof malfunctioning
Have the system checked.
Cruise control deactivated:
> Driving stability control systems are
active or
> parking brake is applied or
> the vehicle has not achieved a
speed of 20 mph or 30 km/h or
> engaged gear is not suitable for the
speed being driven
Cruise control system failed You can continue your journey. Have
the system checked.
Active Cruise Control deactivated:
> Driving stability control systems are
active or
> parking brake is applied or
> the vehicle has not achieved a
speed of 20 mph or 30 km/h or
> engaged gear is not suitable for the
speed being driven or
Keep a safe distance.
> Radar sensor dirty Clean the radar sensor, refer to
page 75.
Active Cruise Control failed Keep a safe distance.
Have the system checked.
1 2 Cause What to do
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
231
Indicator and warning lamps
Mobility
Park Distance Control failed Have the system checked.
> High-beam Assistant inactive Clean the sensor field on the front of the
interior rearview mirror, refer to
page 106.
> High-beam Assistant malfunction-
ing
Have the system checked by the near-
est BMW center.
> Sensitivity of the High-beam Assis-
tant has been changed
There is a risk that oncoming traffic may
be blinded. Have the system checked
by the nearest BMW center.
Bulb of exterior lighting system failed Have the exterior lighting checked as
soon as possible.
Low-beam headlamp or fog lamp failed Have the low beams checked as soon
as possible.
High-beam headlamp failed Have the high-beam headlamps
checked.
Adaptive Light Control failed
Coolant level too low Add coolant immediately, refer to
page 200.
Engine oil pressure too low Stop immediately and switch off the
engine. You cannot continue your jour-
ney. Contact your BMW center.
Engine oil level too low Add engine oil immediately; refer to
page 198 for more information.
Lights up in red:
Service appointment overdue Arrange a service appointment.
Check service requirements, refer to
page 84.
Lights up in yellow:
Service due Arrange a service appointment.
Check service requirements, refer to
page 84.
No service due Check service requirements, refer to
page 84.
Time and date no longer correct Set the time and date, refer to page 86.
1 2 Cause What to do
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
This chapter contains technical data and an
index that will help you find information most
quickly.
Reference
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
234
Reference Technical data
Technical data
Vehicle equipment
In this chapter, all production, country, and
optional equipment that is offered in the model
range is described. As a result, some equip-
ment described may not be available in a partic-
ular vehicle, for example due to the options or
national-market version selected. This also
applies to safety related functions and systems.
Engine data
Coupe
Convertible
328i/xDrive 335i/xDrive 335is
Displacement cu in/cmμ 182.8/2,996 181.8/2,979 181.8/2,979
Number of cylinders 6 6 6
Maximum power output hp 230 300 320
at engine speed rpm 6,500 5,800 5,900
Maximum torque lb ft/Nm 200/270 300/407 332/450
with Overboost lb ft/Nm – – 369/500
at engine speed rpm 2,750 1,300-5,000 1,500
328i 335i 335is
Displacement cu in/cmμ 182.8/2,996 181.8/2,979 181.8/2,979
Number of cylinders 6 6 6
Maximum power output hp 230 300 320
at engine speed rpm 6,500 5,800 5,900
Maximum torque lb ft/Nm 200/270 300/407 332/450
with Overboost lb ft/Nm – – 369/500
at engine speed rpm 2,750 1,300-5,000 1,500
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
235
Te ch ni ca l d at a
Reference
Dimensions
Coupe
All dimensions given in inches/mm.
Smallest turning circle dia.: 36.1 ft/11.0 m, with xDrive: 38.7 ft/11.8 m
335i: height approx. 54.1 in/1,375 mm
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
236
Reference Technical data
Convertible
All dimensions given in inches/mm.
Smallest turning circle dia.: 36.1 ft/11.0 m
335i: height approx. 54.0 in/1,370 mm
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
237
Te ch ni ca l d at a
Reference
Weights
Coupe
328i 328i
xDrive
335i 335i
xDrive
Approved gross weight
> with manual transmission lbs./kg 4,288/1,945 4,508/2,045 4,486/2,035 4,663/2,115
> with automatic transmission lbs./kg 4,354/1,975 4,552/2,065 4,508/2,045 4,685/2,125
Load lbs./kg 882/400 882/400 882/400 882/400
Approved front axle load lbs./kg 2,061/935 2,227/1,010 2,172/985 2,326/1,055
Approved rear axle load lbs./kg 2,425/1,100 2,447/1,110 2,469/1,120 2,513/1,140
Approved roof load capacity lbs./kg 165/75 165/75 165/75 165/75
Cargo area capacity cu ft/
liters
15.5/440 15.5/440 15.2/430 15.2/430
335is
Approved gross weight
> with manual transmission lbs./kg 4,497/2,040
> Sport automatic transmis-
sion with double clutch
lbs./kg 4,519/2,050
Load lbs./kg 882/400
Approved front axle load lbs./kg 2,183/990
Approved rear axle load lbs./kg 2,513/1,140
Approved roof load capacity lbs./kg 165/75
Cargo area capacity cu ft/
liters
15.2/430
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
238
Reference Technical data
Convertible
328i 335i 335is
Approved gross weight
> with manual transmission lbs./kg 4,707/2,135 4,817/2,185 4,839/2,195
> with automatic transmission lbs./kg 4,773/2,165 4,839/2,195 –
> Sport automatic transmis-
sion with double clutch
lbs./kg – – 4,872/2,210
Load lbs./kg 838/380 838/380 838/380
Approved front axle load lbs./kg 2,138/970 2,205/1,000 2,227/1,010
Approved rear axle load lbs./kg 2,646/1,200 2,646/1,200 2,646/1,200
Approved roof load capacity lbs./kg – – –
Cargo area capacity cu ft/
liters
7.4-12.4/
210-350
7.4-12.4/
210-350
7.4-12.4/
210-350
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
239
Te ch ni ca l d at a
Reference
Capacities
Notes
Fuel tank US gal/liters approx. 16.1/61 Fuel grade: page 175
including reserve of US gal/liters approx. 2.1/8.0
Window washer system For more details: page 69
including headlamp washers US quarts/liters approx. 6.3/6.0
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
240
Reference Everything from A to Z
Everything from A to Z
Index
A
ABS Antilock Brake
System 90
ACC, refer to Active Cruise
Control 71
Acceleration assistant, refer to
Launch Control 66
Accessories, refer to Vehicle
equipment 5
Accident, refer to Sending an
Emergency Request 214
Activated-charcoal filter for
automatic climate
control 115
Active Cruise Control 71
– indicator lamp 74
– malfunction 75
– selecting distance 73
– sensor 75
Active steering 97
Adaptive brake lamp
– Brake Force Display 98
Adaptive Light Control 105
Additives
– coolant 200
– engine oil 200
Adjusting temperature inside
the car, refer to Air
conditioner 110
Adjusting temperature inside
the car, refer to Automatic
climate control 112
Adjusting the thigh support 44
Airbags 99
– indicator/warning lamp 101
– sitting safely 42
Air conditioner 109
Air conditioning mode
– air conditioner 110
– automatic climate
control 112
– ventilation 111, 114
Air distribution
– automatic 113
– individual 110
– manual 110
Airing, refer to
Ventilation 111, 114
Air outlets, refer to Air
vents 110
Air pressure, refer to Tire
inflation pressure 177
Air recirculation, refer to
Recirculated air
mode 110, 113
Air supply
– air conditioner 110
– automatic climate
control 112
– ventilation 111, 114
Air vents 110
Air volume 110, 11
3
AKI, refer to Fuel grade 175
Alarm system 32
– avoiding unintentional
alarms 33
– interior motion sensor 33
– switching off an alarm 32
– tilt alarm sensor 33
ALL program 114
All-season tires, refer to
Winter tires 196
All-wheel drive, refer to
xDrive 92
Ambient air, refer to
Recirculated air
mode 110, 113
AM waveband 144
Antifreeze
– coolant 200
– washer fluid 69
Antilock Brake System
ABS 90
Anti-theft alarm system, refer
to Alarm system 32
Approved axle loads, refer to
Weights 237
Approved engine oils 200
Approved gross vehicle
weight, refer to Weights 237
Armrest, refer to Center
armrest 120
Ashtray 122
Assist systems, refer to
Driving stability control 90
AUC Automatic recirculated
air control 113
Audio device, external 121
Automatic
– air distribution 113
– air volume 113
– cruise control 69, 71
– headlamp control 103
Automatic car washes 204
Automatic climate control 109
Automatic curb monitor 51
Automatic high beams and
low beams, refer to High-
beam Assistant 106
Automatic recirculated air
control AUC 113
Automatic station search 144
Automatic station storage 144
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
241
Everything from A to Z
Reference
Automatic transmission with
Steptronic 60
– interlock 60
– overriding selector lever
lock 62
– shiftlock, refer to Changing
selector lever position 60
– sport program 61
– towing 217
– tow-starting 217
AUTO program for automatic
climate control 113
AUTOSTORE 144
AUX-IN
– port 121
AUX-In connection 151
AUX-IN port 143
Average fuel consumption 80
– setting the units 83
Average speed 80, 81
Avoiding unintentional
alarms 33
Axle loads, refer to
Weights 237
B
Backrest contour, refer to
Lumbar support 44
Backrests, refer to Seat
adjustment 43
Backrest width adjustment 44
Back seats
– refer to Rear seats 46
Bag holder 124
Band-aids, refer to First aid
pouch 215
Bar, refer to Towing
methods 218
Base plate for telephone or
mobile phone
– refer to Snap-in adapter 165
– refer to Snap-in adapter in
the center armrest storage
compartment 120
Battery 212
– charging 212
– disposal 35, 213
– jump-starting 216
– remote control 24
– replacing 212
– temporary power failure 212
Battery renewal
– remote control 35
– remote control for vehicle 35
Being towed 217
Belt hand-over 49
– pinch protection system 50
Belts, refer to Safety belts 49
Belt tensioner, refer to Safety
belts 49
Beverage holders, refer to
Cupholders 121
Black ice, refer to Outside
temperature warning 78
Blinds, refer to Roller
sunblinds 120
Blower, refer to Air
volume 110, 113
Bluetooth, activating/
deactivating 157
BMW
– car shampoo 207
BMW Assist 167
– activating 168
BMW Homepage 4
BMW Maintenance
System 202
BMW Professional radio
– recalling stations 144
– sampling stations 144
– satellite radio 146
– selecting waveband 144
– station search 144
– storing stations 144
– switching on/off
142
– t
one control 143
– volume 142
BMW Teleservices 168
– activating 168
BMW webpage 4
Bottle holders, refer to
Cupholders 121
Brake Assist, refer to Dynamic
Brake Control DBC 90
Brake fluid, refer to Service
requirements 84
Brake Force Display 98
Brake lamps
– Brake Force Display 98
Brake pads 132
– breaking in 132
Brake pedal, refer to Braking
safely 134
Brake rotors 135
– brakes 132
– breaking in 132
Brakes
– ABS 90
– BMW Maintenance
System 202
– Brake Force Display 98
– breaking in 132
– parking brake 59
– service requirements 84
Brakes, refer to Braking
safely 134
Brake system 132
– BMW Maintenance
System 202
– breaking in 132
– disc brakes 135
Breakdown services, refer to
Roadside Assistance 215
Breaking in the clutch 132
Breaking in the differential,
refer to Engine and
differential 132
Break-in period 132
Bulb changing, refer to Lamps
and bulbs 208
Button for starting the engine,
refer to Start/Stop button 57
Buttons on the steering
wheel 11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
242
Reference Everything from A to Z
C
California Proposition 65
warning 6
Call
– accepting 160
– ending 161
– rejecting 161
Calling, refer to Phone
numbers, dialing 161
Calling, refer to Telephone
owner's manual
Can holders, refer to
Cupholders 121
Capacities 239
Capacity of the cargo area 237
Car battery, refer to Vehicle
battery 212
Car care, refer to Care 204
Care 204
– automatic car washes 204
– care products 204
– carpets 207
– CD/DVD drives 207
– chrome parts 206
– displays 207
– exterior 204
– fine wood parts 207
– headlamps 205
– high-pressure washer 205
– interior 206
– leather 206
– light-alloy wheels 206
– paintwork 205
– plastic parts 207
– retractable hardtop 205
– rubber seals 206
– safety belts 207
– sensors and cameras 207
– upholstery and cloth
trim 206
– washing the car
manually 205
– windows 205
Cargo, securing 137
Cargo area
– capacity 237
– Comfort Access 34
– folding up the floor
panel 125
– lamp, refer to Interior
lamps 107
– opening from inside 31
– opening from outside 31
Cargo loading 135
– securing cargo 137
– stowing cargo 136
– vehicle 135
Car jack
– jacking points 212
Ca
r key, refer to Integrated
key/remote control 24
Car phone
– installation location, refer to
Center armrest 120
– refer to separate Owner's
Manual
Car phone, refer to
Telephone 156
Car radio, refer to Radio 18
Car radio, refer to Radio BMW
Professional 142
Car shampoo 207
Catalytic converter, refer to
Hot exhaust system 134
CD changer 147
– controls 18
– fast forward/reverse 148
– installation location 148
– random sequence 148
– selecting a CD 147
– selecting a track 148
– volume 142
CD player 147
– changing the track 148
– controls 18
– fast forward/reverse 148
– playing a track 148
– random order 148
– volume 142
Center armrest 120
Center brake lamp
– replacing bulb 211
Center console, refer to
Around the center
console 14
Central locking
– from inside 29
– from outside 25
Central locking system 25
– Comfort Access 33
– hotel function 31
– setting unlocking
characteristics 26
Changes, technical, refer to
For your own safety 5
Changing bulbs, refer to
Lamps and bulbs 208
Changing gears 64
Changing wheels 211
Chassis number, refer to
Engine compartment 197
Check Control 87
Child restraint fixing system
LATCH 54
Child restraint systems 53
Child seats, refer to
Transporting children
safely 53
Chrome parts 207
Chrome polish
207
Cigarette lighter, refer
to
Lighter 122
Cleaning headlamps 68
– washer fluid 69
Cleaning your BMW, refer to
Care 204
Climate control
– automatic air
distribution 113
Clock 78
– 12h/24h format 83
– setting time 86
Closing
– from inside 29
– from outside 25
Clothes hooks 121
Cockpit 10
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
243
Everything from A to Z
Reference
Cold start, refer to Starting the
engine 58
Comfort Access 33
– replacing the battery 35
Comfort access, refer to
Comfort Access 33
Comfort area, refer to Around
the center console 14
Compartment for remote
control, refer to Ignition
lock 57
Compass 118
Compressed audio files 147
Computer 80
Concierge service 168
Condensation, refer to When
the vehicle is parked 135
Condition Based Service
CBS 202
Configuring settings, refer to
Personal Profile 24
Confirmation signal for vehicle
locking/unlocking 27
ConnectedDrive 167
Connecting vacuum cleaner,
refer to Connecting
electrical appliances 123
Consumption, refer to
Average fuel
consumption 80
Controls and displays 10
Convenient loading in
Convertible 27
Convenient opening and
closing
– glass roof 26
– glass roof with Comfort
Access 34
– retractable hardtop 26
– windows 26
– windows with Comfort
Access 34
– with Comfort Access 34
Convertible
– bag holder 124
– convenient loading 27
– enlarging cargo area 124
– folding down rear
backrest 124
– retractable hardtop 38
– rollover protection
system 101
Coolant 200
– checking level 201
Coolant temperature 200
Cooling, maximum 113
Cooling fluid, refer to
Coolant 200
Cooling system, refer to
Coolant 200
Copyright 2
Corner-illuminating lamps
– replacing bulbs 209
Cornering light, refer to
Adaptive Light C
ontrol 105
Correct tires 195
Courtesy lamps, refer to
Interior lamps 107
Cruise control 69
– active 71
– malfunction 71
Cruise control, refer to Active
Cruise Control 71
Cruising range 80, 81
Cupholders 121
Curb weight, refer to
Weights 237
D
Dashboard, refer to
Cockpit 10
Dashboard, refer to
Instrument cluster 12
Dashboard lighting, refer to
Instrument lighting 107
Data, technical 234
– capacities 239
– dimensions 235
– engine 234
– weights 237
Data memory 203
Date
– setting 86
Date setting 144
Daytime running lights 104
– replacing bulbs 209
DBC Dynamic Brake
Control 90
Deactivating front passenger
airbags 100
Deadlocking, refer to
Locking 26
Defect
– door lock 29
– fuel filler flap 174
– glass roof 37
Defogging windows 111
Defrost, windows 111
Defrosting windows and
removing condensation
– air conditioner 111
Defrosting windshield, refer to
Defrosting windows 111
Defrost position, refer to
Defrosting windows 111
Digital clock 78
Digital compass 118
Digital radio, refer to HD
Radio™ reception 145
Dimensions 235
Directional indicators, refer to
Turn signals 67
Displacement, refer to Engine
data 234
Display 18
Display lighting, refer to
Instrument lighting 107
Displays, refer to Instrument
cluster 12
Displays and controls 10
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
244
Reference Everything from A to Z
Disposal
– coolant 200
– remote control battery 35
– vehicle battery 213
Distance remaining to service,
refer to Service
requirements 84
Distance warning, refer to
Park Distance Control
PDC 89
Door key, refer to Remote
control with integrated
key 24
Door lock 29
Doors, emergency
operation 29
DOT Quality Grades 193
Draft-free ventilation 111, 115
Drinks holders, refer to
Cupholders 121
Drive mode 64
Drive-off assistance, refer to
Dynamic Stability Control
DSC 90
Drive-off assistant 93
Driving dynamics control 65
Driving lamps, refer to Parking
lamps/low beams 103
Driving notes 132
Driving off on hills, refer to
Drive-off assistant 93
Driving stability control
systems 90
Driving through water 134
Driving tips, refer to Driving
notes 132
Dry air, refer to Cooling
function 114
DSC Dynamic Stability
Control 90
DTC Dynamic Traction
Control 91
– indicator/warning lamp 91
Dynamic Brake Control
DBC 90
Dynamic Stability Control
DSC 90
– indicator/warning lamp 91
E
EBV Electronic brake-force
distribution 90
Eject button 18, 148
Electrical defect
– 7-gear Sport automatic
transmission with double
clutch 65
Electrical malfunction
– door lock 29
– driver's door 29
– fuel filler flap 174
– glass roof 37
Electric seat adjustment 44
Electric steering wheel lock
– with Comfort Access 34
Electronic brake-force
distribution EBV 90
Electronic oil level check 198
Electronic Stability Program
ESP, refer to Dynamic
Stability Control DSC 90
Emergency actuation,
automatic transmission,
refer to Overriding selector
lever lock 62
Emergency operation
– fuel filler flap, manual
release 174
Emergency operation, refer to
Closing manually
– glass roof 37
Emergency operation, refer to
Manual operation
– door lock 29
Emergency release
– trunk lid from inside 31
Emergency Request 214
Emergency services, refer to
Roadside Assistance 215
Energy, saving
– saving fuel 132
Engine
– breaking in 132
– data 234
– overheated, refer to Coolant
temperature 200
– speed 234
– starting 58
– starting, Comfort Access 33
– switching off 59
Engine compartment 197
Engine coolant, refer to
Coolant 200
Engine oil
– adding 199
– additives, refer to Approved
engine oils 200
– alternative oil types 200
– approved engine oils 200
– BMW Maintenance
System 202
– capacity 239
– checking level 198
– intervals between changes,
refer to Service
requirements 84
Engine output, refer to Engine
data 234
Engine speed, ref
er to Engine
data 234
Engine starting, refer to
Starting the engine 58
Entry lamps, refer to Interior
lamps 107
Equalizer 143
ESP Electronic Stability
Program, refer to Dynamic
Stability Control DSC 90
Exhaust system, refer to Hot
exhaust system 134
Exterior mirrors 50
– adjusting 50
– automatic dimming
feature 51
– automatic heating 51
– folding in and out 50
External audio
device 121, 143
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
245
Everything from A to Z
Reference
Eyes
– for tow-starting and towing
away 217
– for tying down loads 137
F
Failure messages, refer to
Check Control 87
Failure of an electrical
consumer 213
False alarm
– avoiding unintentional
alarm 33
– switching off an alarm 32
Fastening safety belts, refer to
Safety belts 49
Fast forward
– CD 148
Fault messages, refer to
Check Control 87
Filter
– refer to Microfilter/activated-
charcoal filter for automatic
climate control 115
– refer to Microfilter for air
conditioner 111
First aid pouch 215
Fixture for remote control,
refer to Ignition lock 57
Flash when locking/
unlocking 27
Flat tire
– Run-flat tires 196
– Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 95
Flat Tire Monitor FTM 93
– indicating a flat tire 94
– indicator/warning lamp 94
– initialization 93
– snow chains 93, 196
– system limits 93
Flat tires, refer to Tire
condition 194
Fluid reservoir, refer to
Washer fluid reservoir 69
FM waveband 144
Fog lamps 107
– indicator lamp 107, 220
Folding up the floor panel 125
Footwell lamps, refer to
Interior lamps 107
For your own safety 5
Four-wheel drive, refer to
xDrive 92
Front airbags 99
FTM, refer to Flat Tire
Monitor 93
Fuel 175
– average consumption 80
– gauge 79
– high-quality brands 175
– quality 175
– specifications 175
– tank contents, refer to
Capacities 239
Fuel clock, refer to Fuel
gauge 79
Fuel consumption indicator
– av
erage fuel
consumption 80
Fuel display, refer to Fuel
gauge 79
Fuel filler flap 174
– releasing in the event of
electrical malfunction 174
Fuses 213
G
Garage door opener, refer to
Integrated universal remote
control 116
Gasoline
– refer to Average
consumption 80
Gasoline, refer to Required
fuel 175
Gasoline display, refer to Fuel
gauge 79
Gear indicator, automatic
transmission with
Steptronic 60
Gear indicator, refer to
Displays in the instrument
cluster 63
Gearshift lever 62
– automatic transmission with
Steptronic 60
– manual transmission 60
Gearshifts
– automatic transmission with
Steptronic 60
– manual transmission 60
General driving notes 133
Glass roof, electric 37
– closing after electrical
malfunction 37
– convenient opening and
closing 26, 29
– convenient opening and
closing with Comfort
Access 34
– initializing 37
– opening, closing 37
– pinch protection system 37
– power failure 37
– remote control 26
– tilting 37
Glove compartment 120
Gong
– volume 142
Grills, refer to Air vents 110
Gross vehicle weight, refer to
Weights 237
H
Handbrake, refer to Parking
brake 59
Hands-free system 14, 163
Hazard warning flashers 14
HDC Hill Descent Control 92
HD Radio™ reception 145
Head airbags 99
Headlamp control,
automatic 103
Headlamp flasher 67
– indicator lamp 11, 14, 220
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
246
Reference Everything from A to Z
Head Light, refer to Adaptive
Light Control 105
Head restraints 45
– rear, removing 46
– sitting safely 42
Heated
– mirrors 51
– rear window 111, 114
– seats 48
– steering wheel 52
Heating 109
– mirrors 51
– rear window 111, 114
– seats 48
– steering wheel 52
Heating and ventilation, refer
to Climate 109
Heavy loads, refer to Stowing
cargo 136
Height, refer to
Dimensions 235
Height adjustment
– seats 43
– steering wheel 52
High-beam Assistant 106
High beams 105
– headlamp flasher 105
– indicator lamp 220
High beams and low beams,
automatic, refer to High-
beam Assistant 106
High-pressure
washer 204, 205
High water, refer to Driving
through water 134
Hill Descent Control HDC 92
Hills 135
Holders for cups 121
Homepage BMW 4
Hood 198
Hooks for shopping bags 125
Horn 10, 11
Hotel function, refer to
Locking or unlocking
separately 31
Hot exhaust system 134
Hydraulic brake assist, refer to
Dynamic Brake Control 90
Hydroplaning 134
I
Ice warning, refer to Outside
temperature warning 78
Identification marks
– Run-flat tires 196
– tire coding 193
Ignition 58
– switched off 58
– switched on 58
Ignition key, refer to Remote
control with integrated
key 24
Ignition key position 1, refer to
Radio readiness 57
Ignition key position 2, refer to
Ignition on 58
Ignition lock 57
Imprint 2
Indicator and warning
lamps 13
– Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 96
Indicator and warning lamps,
overview 220
Individual air distribution 110
Inflation pressure, refer to Tire
inflation pressure 177
Inflation pressure monitoring,
refer to Tire Pressure
Monitor TPM 95
Initializing
– after power failure 212
– compass, refer to
Calibrating 119
– Flat Tire Monitor FTM 93
– glass roof 37
Installation location
– CD changer 148
– telephone 120
Instrument cluster 12
Instrument cluster, refer to
Cockpit 10
Instrument combination, refer
to Instrument cluster 12
Instrument lighting 107
Integrated key 24
Integrated universal remote
control 116
Interior lamps 107
– remote control 27
Interior motion sensor 33
Interior rearview mirror 51
– automatic dimming
feature 51
– compass 118
Interlock, refer to Disengaging
the remote control 60
Intermittent mode of the
wipers 68
J
Jacking points 212
Jumpering, refer to Jump-
starting 216
Jump-starting 216
K
Key, refer to Integrated key/
remote control 24
Keyless go, refer to Comfort
Access 33
Keyless opening and closing,
refer to Comfort Access 33
Key Memory, refer to Personal
Profile 24
Keypad dialing 162
Kickdown 61
– automatic transmission with
Steptronic 61
Knock control 175
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
247
Everything from A to Z
Reference
L
Lamps
– automatic headlamp
control 103
– parking lamps/low
beams 103
Lamps and bulbs, replacing
bulbs 208
Lap-and-shoulder belt, refer
to Safety belts 49
Lashing eyes, refer to
Securing cargo 137
LATCH child restraint fixing
system 54
Launch Control 66
Leather care 206
LED Light-emitting
diodes 209
Length, refer to
Dimensions 235
License plate lamp, replacing
bulb 211
Light
– high-beam assistant 106
Light-alloy wheels 206
Light-emitting diodes
LED 209
Lighter 122
– connecting electrical
appliances 123
Lighting
– instruments 107
– lamps and bulbs 208
– vehicle, refer to Lamps 103
Light switch 103
Listening to scan samples
– BMW Professional radio 144
Load 136
Load securing equipment,
refer to Securing cargo 137
Lock buttons, doors, refer to
Locking 30
Locking
– adjusting confirmation
signal 27
– from inside 30
– from outside 26
– without remote control, refer
to Comfort Access 33
Locking and unlocking doors
– confirmation signals 27
– from inside 29
– from outside 25
Low beam control, refer to
High-beam Assistant 106
Low-beam headlamps 103
– automatic 103
– indicator lamp, defective
bulb 231
Lower back support, refer to
Lumbar support 44
Luggage rack, refer to Roof-
mounted luggage rack 137
Lumbar support 44
M
M+S tires, refer to Winter
tires 196
Maintenance, refer to Service
and Warranty Information
Booklet for US models or in
the Warranty and Service
Guide Booklet for Canadian
models
Maintenance system 202
Malfunction
– automatic transmission with
Steptronic 62
– tires 94
Malfunction warnings, refer to
Check Control 87
Manual air distribution 110
Manual car wash 205
Manually unlocking parking
lock 65
Manual mode, automatic
transmission with
Steptronic 61
Manual operation
– door lock 29
– driver's door 29
– fuel filler flap 174
– glass roof 37
– parking lock 65
– parking lock, automatic
transmission 62
Manual station search 144
Manual transmission 60
Master key, refer to Remote
control with integrated
key 24
Maximum cooling 113
Maximum speed
– with winter tires 196
Measurements, refer to
Dimensions 235
Memory, refer to Seat and
mirror memory 48
Microfilter
– BMW Maintenance
System 202
– for air conditioner 111
– for automatic climate
control 115
Microfilter/activated-charcoal
filter
– BMW Maintenance
System 202
Microphone
– telephone 14
Mirror dimming feature 51
Mirrors 50
– automatic curb monitor 51
– exterior mirrors 50
– heating 51
– interior rearview mirror 51
– memory, refer to Seat and
mirror memory 48
Mirrors, folding in before
entering a car wash 50
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
248
Reference Everything from A to Z
Mobile phone
– adjusting volume 160
– connecting, refer to Mobile
phone, pairing 157
– installation location, refer to
Center armrest 120
– pairing 157
– refer to separate Owner's
Manual
Mobile phone, installation
location, refer to Center
armrest 120
Mobile phone, refer to the
separate Owner's Manual
Modifications, technical, refer
to For your own safety 5
Monitoring system for tire
pressures, refer to Flat Tire
Monitor 93
MP3 147
Multifunctional steering
wheel, refer to Buttons on
the steering wheel 11
Multifunction switch
– refer to Turn signals/
headlamp flasher 67
– refer to Wiper system 68
Music tracks
– playing a track 148
– random order 148
My Info 170
N
Neck support, refer to Head
restraints 45
Nets, refer to Storage
compartments 121
Neutral 63
New tires 195
Next Service indicator, refer to
Condition Based Service
CBS 202
Number of cylinders, refer to
Engine data 234
Nylon rope, refer to Tow
rope 218
O
OBD socket, refer to Socket
for Onboard Diagnosis 203
Octane ratings, refer to Fuel
specifications 175
Odometer 78
Oil, refer to Engine oil 198
Oil consumption 198
Oil level 198
Old batteries, refer to
Disposal 213
Onboard vehicle tool kit 208
Opening and closing
– Comfort Access 33
– from inside 29
– from outside 25
– using the door lock 29
– using the remote control 25
Opening and closing
retractable hardtop 39
Outlets
– refer to Ventilation 111, 114
Outlets, refer to Air vents 110
Output, refer to Engine
data 234
Outside-air mode
– automatic climate
control 113
Outside temperature
display 78
– changing unit of measure 83
– in computer 83
Outside temperature
warning 78
Overheated engine, refer to
Coolant temperature 200
Overriding selector lever
lock 62
P
Paintwork care 205
Park assistant, refer to Park
Distance Control 89
Park Distance Control PDC 89
Parking
– vehicle 59
Parking aid, refer to Park
Distance Control PDC 89
Parking brake 59
– indicator lamp 59
Parking lamps 103
– replacing bulbs 209
Parking lamps/low beams 103
Parts and accessories, refer to
Vehicle equipment 5
Passenger side mirror tilt
function 51
Pathway lighting 104
PDC
– volume 142
Personal Profile 24
Phone numbers
– dialing 161
Pinch protection system
– glass roof, electric 37
– windows 36
Playing a track, scan
– CD 148
Polish 207
Pollen
– refer to Microfilter/activated-
charcoal filter for automatic
climate control 115
– refer to Microfilter for air
conditioner 111
Power failure 212
Power windows 35
Power windows, refer to
Windows 35
Pressure, tires 177
Pressure monitoring, tires 93
– Flat Tire Monitor 93
Pressure monitoring of tires,
refer to Tire Pressure
Monitor TPM 95
Programmable buttons on the
steering wheel 11
Protection function, refer to
Pinch protection system
– glass roof, electric 37
– windows 36
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
249
Everything from A to Z
Reference
Providing medical assistance,
refer to First aid pouch 215
PTY 145
Puncture
– Flat Tire Monitor 93
R
Radio 18
– autostore 144
– controls 18
– refer to separate Owner's
Manual
– switching on/off 18
– volume 18
Radio, refer to BMW
Professional radio 144
Radio position, refer to Radio
readiness 57
Radio readiness 57
– switched off 58
– switched on 57
Radio-remote key, refer to
Remote control with
integrated key 24
Rain sensor 68
RDS 145
Reading lamps 108
Rear lamps, refer to Tail
lamps 210
Rear seats
– adjusting head restraints 46
– folding down backrests 123
Rear ventilation 115
Rearview mirror, refer to
Mirrors 50
Rear window
defroster 111, 114
Rear window roller blind, refer
to Roller sunblinds 120
Reception
– radio station 144
Recirculated air
mode 110, 113
Recirculation of air, refer to
Recirculated air
mode 110, 113
Reclining seat, refer to
Backrest 43
Refueling 174
Releasing
– hood 198
Remaining distance, refer to
Cruising range 80
Remote control 24
– battery renewal 35
– Comfort Access 33
– garage door opener 116
– malfunction 28, 35
– removing from the ignition
lock 57
– service data 202
– trunk lid 27
Replacement fuses, refer to
Fuses 213
Replacement remote
co
ntrol 24
Replacing bulbs, refer to
Lamps and bulbs 208
Replacing tires 195
Replacing tires, refer to New
wheels and tires 195
Reporting safety defects 7
Reserve warning, refer to Fuel
gauge 79
Reset, resetting tone
settings 144
Restraint systems
– for children 53
– refer to Safety belts 49
Retractable hardtop 38
– care, refer to Caring for your
vehicle brochure
– convenient opening and
closing 26
– remote control 26
Reverse
– CD 148
Reverse gear 63
– automatic transmission with
Steptronic 61
– manual transmission 60
Roadside
Assistance 169, 215
Roadside parking lamps 105
– replacing bulbs 209
Roadworthiness test, refer to
Service requirements 84
Roller sunblinds 120
Rollover protection system,
Convertible 101
– resetting 101
Roof load capacity 237
Roof-mounted luggage
rack 137
Rope, refer to Tow-starting,
towing away 218
RSC Runflat System
Component, refer to Run-
flat tires 196
Runflat System Component
RSC, refer to Run-flat
tires 196
Run-flat tires 196
– continuing driving with a
damaged tire 94
– flat tire 94
– Flat Tire Monitor 94
– inflation pressure 177
– new tires 195
– tire replacement 195
– winter tires 196
Runflat tyres, refer to Run-flat
tires 196
S
Safety-belt height
adjustment 49
Safety belts 49
– belt hand-over 49
– damage 49
– indicator/warning lamp 49
– reminder 49
– sitting safely 42
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
250
Reference Everything from A to Z
Safety systems
– airbags 99
– Antilock Brake System
ABS 90
– brake system 90
– driving stability control 90
– Dynamic Stability Control
DSC 90
– rollover protection system,
Convertible 101
– safety belts 49
Safety tires, refer to Run-flat
tires 196
Satellite radio 146
– activating 146
Saving fuel 132
Scan
– CD changer 148
Scan, listening to samples
– BMW Professional radio 144
Scan, sampling tracks
– CD changer 148
– CD player 148
Screw thread for tow
fitting 217
Search button 19
Searching
– CD player 148
Searching for a music track
– CD 148
Seat adjustment
– electric 44
– mechanical 43
Seat and mirror memory 48
Seat belt reminder, refer to
Fasten safety belts
reminder 49
Seat heating 48
Seats 43
– adjusting electrically 44
– adjusting the seats 43
– heating 48
– memory, refer to Seat and
mirror memory 48
– saving a setting, refer to Seat
and mirror memory 48
– sitting safely 42
Securing cargo 126, 128
Securing the vehicle
– from inside 29
– from outside 25
Selecting distance for Active
Cruise Control 73
Selecting the sound
pattern 143
Selector lever
– automatic transmission with
Steptronic 60
Selector lever lock, refer to
Changing selector lever
positions, shiftlock 60
Selector lever positions 62
– automatic transmission with
Steptronic
60
Service, refer to
Roadside
Assistance 215
Service car, refer to Roadside
Assistance 215
Service data in the remote
control 202
Service Interval Display, refer
to Condition Based Service
CBS 202
Service requirements 84
Service status 170
Settings
– clock, 12h/24h format 83
Settings and information 82
Setting the time format 144
Shifting 64
– 7-gear Sport automatic
transmission with double
clutch 64
Shifting gears
– automatic transmission with
Steptronic 61
– manual transmission 60
Shift into a drive position, refer
to selector lever
positions 62
Shiftlock
– automatic transmission,
refer to Changing selector
lever positions 60
Shift paddles on the steering
wheel 64
Side airbags 99
Side windows, refer to
Windows 35
Signal horn, refer to
Horn 10, 11
Sitting safely 42
– with airbags 42
– with head restraint 42
– with safety belts 42
Ski bag 126
Ski bag for Convertible, refer
to Through-loading opening
with integrated transport
bag 127
Sliding/tilt sunroof, refer to
Glass roof, electric 37
Slot for remote control 57
Smokers' package, refer to
Ashtray 122
Snap-in adapter
– inserting/removing 165
– use 156
Snap-in adapter, refer to
Center armrest storage
compartment 120
Socket, Onboard Diagnosis
OBD 203
Socket, refer to Connecting
electrical appliances 123
SOS, refer to Sending an
Emergency Request 214
Spare fuses 213
Special oils, refer to Approved
engine o
ils 200
Specified engine oils, refer to
Approved engine oils 200
Speed
– Run-flat tires 94
– with winter tires 196
Speed-dependent
volume 143
Speedo, refer to
Speedometer 12
Speedometer 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
251
Everything from A to Z
Reference
Sport automatic transmission
with double clutch 62
– driving dynamics control 65
– kickdown 64
– Launch Control 66
– manually unlocking parking
lock 65
– neutral 63
– reverse gear 63
Sport program with 7-gear
Sport automatic
transmission with double
clutch 64
Spray nozzles, refer to
Cleaning windshield and
headlamps 68
Stability control, refer to
Driving stability control
systems 90
Start/Stop button 57
– starting the engine 58
– switching off the engine 59
Starting, refer to Starting the
engine 58
Starting assistance, refer to
Jump-starting 216
Starting CD changer 147
Starting difficulties
– jump-starting 216
Starting the CD player 147
Starting the engine
– Start/Stop button 57
Stations, refer to BMW
Professional radio 144
Station search
– BMW Professional radio 144
Status of this Owner's Manual
at time of printing 5
Steam jet 204, 205
Steering wheel 52
– adjustment 52
– buttons on steering
wheel 11
– heating 52
– lock 57
– locking with Comfort
Access 34
– shift paddles 64
Steering wheel buttons, refer
to Shift paddles 64
Steering with variable ratio,
refer to Active steering 97
Steptronic, refer to Automatic
transmission with
Steptronic 60
Storage 207
Storage compartments 121
Storage nets 125
Storing seat positions, refer to
Seat and mirror memory 48
Storing tires 196
Stowage, refer to Storage
compartments 12
1
Summer tires, refer to Wheels
and tires 177
Switches, refer to Cockpit 10
Switching off
– engine 59
Switching off the engine
– Start/Stop button 57
Switching on
– BMW Professional radio 142
– CD changer 147
– CD player 147
– radio 18
Switching the cooling function
on and off 114
Symbols 4
T
Tachometer 79
Tailgate, refer to Trunk lid 31
Tail lamp, refer to Tail
lamps 210
Tail lamps 210
– replacing bulb 210, 211
Tank contents, refer to
Capacities 239
Technical data 234
– dimensions 235
Technical modifications, refer
to For your own safety 5
Telephone 156
– hands-free system 163
– installation location, refer to
Center armrest 120
– refer to separate Owner's
Manual
– voice commands 163
Temperature
– air conditioner 111
– automatic climate
control 112
– coolant, refer to Coolant
temperature 200
Temperature display
– outside temperature 78
– outside temperature
warning 78
– setting the units 83
Tempomat, refer to Cruise
control 69
Tensioning straps, refer to
Securing cargo 137
Third brake lamp, refer to
Center brake lamp 211
Through-loading opening with
integrated transport
bag 127
Through-loading system 123
Tilt alarm sensor 33
Tilt function, passenger side
mirror 51
Time
– displaying 144
– setting 144
Tire inflation pressure 177
– loss 94
Tire pressure monitoring,
refer to Flat Tire Monitor 93
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
252
Reference Everything from A to Z
Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 95
– resetting the system 95
– system limitations 95
– warning lamp 96
Tire puncture, refer to Flat Tire
Monitor 94
Tire Quality Grading 193
Tires
– age 193, 195
– air loss 96
– breaking in 132
– changing, refer to Changing
wheels 211
– condition 194
– damage 194
– inflation pressure 177
– labels 193
– minimum tread depth 194
– new wheels and tires 195
– pressure monitoring, refer to
Flat Tire Monitor 93
– pressure monitoring, refer to
Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 95
– puncture 94
– replacing 195
– Run-flat tires 196
– size 193
– storage 196
– tread depth 194
– wear indicators, refer to
Minimum tread depth 194
– wheel/tire combination, refer
to Correct wheels and
tires 195
– winter tires 196
Tone
– control 143
– middle setting 144
Tools, refer to Onboard
vehicle tool kit 208
Top, refer to Retractable
hardtop 38
Torque, refer to Engine
data 234
Tow bar 218
Tow fitting 217
– screw thread 217
Tow fittings for tow-starting
and towing away 217
Towing 217
– car with automatic
transmission 217
– methods 218
– with 7-gear Sport automatic
transmission with double
clutch 218
Towing and tow-starting 217
Tow rope 218
Tow-s
tarting 217, 219
TPM, refer to Tire Pressure
Monitor 95
Traction control, refer to
Dynamic Stability Control
DSC 90
Transmission
– 7-gear Sport automatic
transmission with double
clutch 62
– automatic transmission with
Steptronic 60
– idle position 63
– Launch Control 66
– manually unlocking parking
lock 65
– manual transmission 60
– overriding selector lever lock
for automatic transmission
with Steptronic 62
– reverse gear 63
Transmission interlock
– refer to Changing selector
lever position 60
– refer to P Park 60
Transporting children
safely 53
Transport securing devices,
refer to Securing cargo 137
Tread depth, refer to Minimum
tire tread 194
Trip-distance counter, refer to
Trip odometer 78
Triple turn signal activation 67
Trip odometer 78
Trunk lid 31
– Comfort Access 34
– emergency release 31
– locking or unlocking
separately 31
– opening from inside 31
– opening from outside 31
– remote control 27
Turning circle, refer to
Dimensions 235
Turn signal 67
Turn signal indicators
– indicator/warning lamp 12
Turn signals
– triple turn signal 67
Tying down loads, refer to
Cargo loading 137
U
Uniform Tire Quality Grading/
UTQR 193
Units
– average fuel
consumption 83
Units of measure
– temperature 83
Universal garage door opener,
refer to Integrated universal
remote control 116
Unlatching, refer to
Unlocking 33
Unlocking
– from inside 30
– from outside 25
– setting unlocking
characteristics 26
– trunk lid 34
– without remote control, refer
to Comfort Access 33
USB audio interface 151
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
253
Everything from A to Z
Reference
V
Variable light distribution,
refer to Adaptive Light
Control 105
Vehicle
– battery 212
– breaking in 132
– cargo loading 135
– identification number, refer
to Engine compartment 197
– measurements, refer to
Dimensions 235
– parking 59
– weight 237
Vehicle equipment 5
Vehicle jack 212
Vehicle storage 207
Ventilation 114
– air conditioner 111
– draft-free 111, 115
– in the rear 115
Ventilation, refer to
Climate 109
Vents, refer to Air vents 110
Vents, refer to
Ventilation 111, 114
Voice commands
– telephone 163
Voice phone book 164
Volume
– fuel tank, refer to
Capacities 239
– gong 142
– mobile phone 160
– PDC 142
– setting speed-
dependent 143
W
Warning and indicator
lamps 13
Warning and indicator lamps,
overview 220
Warning messages, refer to
Check Control 87
Warning triangle 215
Washer fluid 69
– content of the reservoir 69
Washer fluid reservoir 69
Waste tray, refer to
Ashtray 122
Water on roads, refer to
Driving through water 134
Water penetration 204, 205
Waveband 144
Wear indicators in tires, refer
to Minimum tread depth 194
Weights 237
Welcome lamps 104
Wheel/tire combination, refer
to Correct wheels and
tires 195
Wheelbase, refer to
Dimensions 235
Wheels, new 195
Wheels and tires 177
Width, refer to
Dimensions 235
Wind deflector 40
Windows 35
– convenient opening and
closing 26
– convenient opening and
closing with Comfort
Access 34
– opening, closing 35
– pinch protection system 36
Windows, defrosting 111
Windshield
– cleaning 68
– defrosting and removing
condensation 111
Windshield wash 68
– filling capacity, reservoir 239
– nozzles 69
– reservoir for washer fluid 69
– washer fluid 69
Windshield wiper blades,
changing 208
Windshield wipers, refer to
Wiper system 68
Winter tires 196
– storage 196
Wiper blade replacement 208
Wiper system 68
WMA 147
Work in the engine
compartment
198
Wre
nch/screwdriver, refer to
Onboard vehicle tool kit 208
X
xDrive 92
Xenon lamps
– replacing bulb 209
Y
Your individual vehicle
– settings, refer to Personal
Profile 24
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
01 40 2 609 312 ue Basis
*BL260931200J*
The Ultimate
Driving Machine
More about BMW
bmwusa.com
Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 609 312 - © 08/11 BMW AG
